07.06.2015 Views

SECTION B - Derry City Council

SECTION B - Derry City Council

SECTION B - Derry City Council

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>SECTION</strong> B<br />

WORKS INFORMATION<br />

Part 1 – Preambles to the Specification<br />

Part 2 – Specification


Section B<br />

Part 1<br />

Preambles to the Specification


1.0 PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION<br />

1. The Specification referred to in the Tender shall be the ‘Specification for Highway Works’, published<br />

by the Stationery Office (formerly HMSO) as Volume 1 of the Manual of Contract Documents for<br />

Highway Works, as modified and extended by the following:<br />

(i) Appendix 0/1: Contract-specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled Clauses, Tables and<br />

Figures;<br />

(ii) Appendix 0/2: Contract-specific minor alterations to existing Clauses, Tables and Figures;<br />

(iii) The Numbered Appendices listed in Appendix 0/3;<br />

(iv) Appendix 0/5: Special national alterations of the Overseeing Organisation of Scotland,<br />

Wales or Northern Ireland.<br />

Appendix 0/4 contains a list of the Drawings.<br />

2. The relevant publication date of each page of the Specification for Highway Works is given in the<br />

Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates.<br />

3. An Additional Clause as indicated by a suffix ‘A’ in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from<br />

the Overseeing Organisation of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. An Additional Clause as<br />

indicated by a suffix ‘AR’ in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration.<br />

4. A Substitute Clause, as indicated by the suffix ‘S’ in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from<br />

the Overseeing Organisation of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. A Substitute Clause as<br />

indicated by a suffix ‘SR’ in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration.<br />

5. A Cancelled Clause as indicated by a suffix ‘C’ in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from the<br />

Overseeing Organisation of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. A Cancelled Clause indicated by<br />

a suffix ‘CR’ in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration.<br />

6. Insofar as any of the Numbered Appendices may conflict or be inconsistent with any provision of<br />

the Specification for Highway Works the Numbered Appendices shall always prevail. Additionally,<br />

Numbered Appendices 0/1 and 0/2 shall take precedence over Numbered Appendix 0/5.<br />

7. Any reference in the Contract to a Clause number or Appendix shall be deemed to refer to the<br />

corresponding Substitute Clause number or Appendix listed in Appendix 0/1, 0/2 or 0/5.<br />

8. Where a Clause is altered any original Table/Figure referred to in the Clause shall apply unless<br />

the Table/ Figure is also altered. Where a Table/Figure is altered any reference in a Clause to the<br />

original Table/Figure shall apply to the altered Table/Figure.<br />

9. Where a Clause in the Specification relates to work goods or materials which are not required for<br />

the Works it shall be deemed not to apply.<br />

1


10. Any Appendix referred to in the Specification which is not used shall be deemed not to apply.<br />

11. Where a Clause in the Specification is prefixed by an # this indicates that this particular Clause<br />

has a substitute National Alteration for one or more of the Overseeing Organisations of Scotland,<br />

Wales or Northern Ireland. Substitute or additional National Clauses shall be used within<br />

countries to which they specifically apply and they are deemed to replace corresponding Clauses<br />

in the main text of the Specification as appropriate. The substitute National Clauses are located at<br />

the end of the relevant Series together with the additional National Clauses of the Overseeing<br />

Organisations.<br />

12. Other than where references to the Overseeing Organisation are made in the context of the<br />

Overseeing Organisation granting statutory type approvals, the roles and functions of the<br />

Overseeing Organisation shall be undertaken by the Project Manager.<br />

Where the Specification requires the provision of documentation to the Overseeing Organisation<br />

for statutory or type approval such documentation shall be provided to the Project Manager.<br />

13. If the Specification is used in conjunction with a Contract under which the Contractor is<br />

responsible for the design of any part of the Permanent Works, the delegation of the roles and<br />

functions of the Overseeing Organisation as stated in paragraph 12 above shall be further<br />

amended as follows:<br />

(i)<br />

(ii)<br />

If any agreement, consent or approval required to be obtained from the Overseeing<br />

Organisation impacts on the health and safety of the general public, the environment or<br />

any property or equipment not owned or operated by the Contractor, such agreement,<br />

consent, approval shall be obtained from the Project Manager<br />

Where the Specification provides for the Overseeing Organisation to require a test,<br />

waive the requirement for a test or alter testing frequency, the party to whom the<br />

Overseeing Organisation’s roles and functions have been ascribed by paragraph 12 above<br />

shall exercise such decisions in accordance with the Employer’s requirements.<br />

2


Specification for Highway Works<br />

Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates<br />

Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date<br />

000<br />

000<br />

000<br />

1<br />

3F<br />

2<br />

March 1998<br />

May 2005<br />

November 2006<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

2<br />

W1F<br />

12 to 14, 20F<br />

1, 3 to 7, N1, N<br />

8 to 9, 11, 15 to 19, N2, N4<br />

10, N5 to N6F<br />

May 2001<br />

May 2005<br />

November 2005<br />

May 2006<br />

November 2006<br />

November 2008<br />

200<br />

200<br />

1, 3F<br />

2<br />

May 2001<br />

May 2004<br />

300<br />

300<br />

300<br />

1<br />

4<br />

2 to 3, 5 to 6F<br />

May 2001<br />

November 2002<br />

May 2008<br />

400<br />

400<br />

1 to 6, 8, 10 to 13F<br />

7, 9<br />

November 2007<br />

November 2008<br />

500<br />

500<br />

500<br />

500<br />

500<br />

500<br />

23 to 24, 26<br />

28F<br />

3, 22, N1F<br />

2, 5, 27<br />

6, 25<br />

1, 4, 7 to 21<br />

November 2004<br />

May 2005<br />

May 2006<br />

November 2006<br />

November 2007<br />

November 2009<br />

600<br />

600<br />

600<br />

600<br />

600<br />

600<br />

33<br />

2, 27 to 28, 30 to 32, 34 to 36, N1<br />

25 to 26<br />

42 to 49, 52 to 68F<br />

37, 50<br />

1, 3 to 24, 29, 38 to 41, S1 to S3F, N2 to N4F<br />

November 2003<br />

November 2005<br />

November 2006<br />

November 2008<br />

November 2007<br />

November 2009<br />

700<br />

700<br />

700<br />

2 to 3, 5 to 6, N1, N3 to N5F<br />

4, N2<br />

1, 7 to 32F<br />

November 2006<br />

August 2008<br />

November 2009<br />

800 1 to 25F November 2009<br />

900<br />

900<br />

900<br />

1000<br />

1000<br />

1000<br />

2 to 5, 9 to 22, 24 to 26, 28 to 67F<br />

1, 6 to 8, S1F<br />

23, 27<br />

3, 5 to 6<br />

1 to 2, 4, 7 to 15, 19 to 33F<br />

16 to 18<br />

August 2008<br />

November 2008<br />

May 2009<br />

November 2005<br />

May 2006<br />

November 2006<br />

3


Specification for Highway Works<br />

Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates<br />

Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date<br />

1100<br />

1100<br />

1100<br />

1, 4F<br />

2, N1F<br />

3<br />

August 2008<br />

November 2006<br />

November 2004<br />

1200<br />

1200<br />

1200<br />

1200<br />

1200<br />

1200<br />

1200<br />

5<br />

2 to 3, W1F<br />

1, 14 to 16F<br />

4, 9 to 11, 13<br />

12<br />

6 to 7, N1 to N4F<br />

8<br />

May 2001<br />

August 2003<br />

May 2004<br />

May 200<br />

November 2006<br />

November 2007<br />

May 2008<br />

1300<br />

1300<br />

1300<br />

1300<br />

N2F<br />

3 to 4<br />

1, 5 to 10, 12F<br />

2, 11 and N1<br />

November 2003<br />

November 2004<br />

November 2005<br />

May 2006<br />

1400<br />

1400<br />

1, 3 to 9F<br />

2, N1F<br />

May 2001<br />

May 2006<br />

1500<br />

1500<br />

1500<br />

1500<br />

1, 5 to 6, 12, 14 to 17F<br />

3 to 4, 8 to 11, 13<br />

2<br />

7<br />

November 2006<br />

November 2004<br />

February 2003<br />

May 2001<br />

1600<br />

1600<br />

3, 20 to 23, 43<br />

2, 6 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 19, 27 to 28, 32 to<br />

34, 36 to 37, 39 to 42, 44 to 48<br />

November 2005<br />

November 2003<br />

March 1998<br />

1600<br />

1, 4 to 5, 9, 15, 17 to 18, 24 to 26, 29 to 31,<br />

35, 38, 49F<br />

1700<br />

1700<br />

1700<br />

2 to 7, 10 to 15<br />

8 to 9<br />

1, 16 to 22F<br />

May 2004<br />

May 2005<br />

May 2006<br />

1800<br />

1800<br />

1, 4, 6, 8 to 9<br />

2 to 3, 5, 7, 10 to 12F<br />

May 2004<br />

November 2005<br />

1900<br />

1900<br />

1900<br />

1900<br />

2 to 4<br />

6 to 7, 15<br />

1, 5, 8 to 14, 16, 18 to 30F, S1 to S2F<br />

17<br />

May 2003<br />

May 2005<br />

May 2008<br />

November 2008<br />

2000<br />

2000<br />

1, 3 to 4F<br />

2<br />

May 2001<br />

November 2004<br />

2100<br />

2100<br />

2100<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1, 4F<br />

March 1998<br />

November 2003<br />

November 2005<br />

4


Specification for Highway Works<br />

Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates<br />

Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date<br />

2300<br />

2300<br />

1<br />

2 to 3F<br />

March 1998<br />

May 2001<br />

2400<br />

2400<br />

2400<br />

1, 4, 7F<br />

2<br />

3, 5 to 6<br />

May 2005<br />

May 2006<br />

May 2008<br />

2500<br />

2500<br />

2500<br />

2500<br />

2500<br />

2500<br />

1<br />

2, 8, 11F<br />

10<br />

6 to 7, 9<br />

5<br />

3 to 4<br />

May 2001<br />

November 2003<br />

November 2004<br />

May 2005<br />

May 2006<br />

November 2006<br />

2600<br />

2600<br />

2600<br />

2600<br />

2600<br />

1<br />

2 to 4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7F<br />

March 1998<br />

November 2003<br />

May 2005<br />

November 2004<br />

November 2006<br />

3000<br />

3000<br />

3000<br />

3000<br />

1, 4 to 7, 10, 12 to 17, 19, 22 to 27F<br />

20<br />

2 to 3<br />

8 to 9, 11, 18, 21<br />

November 2004<br />

May 2001<br />

May 2006<br />

May 2008<br />

5000<br />

5000<br />

1, 4 to 19F, S1F<br />

2 to 3<br />

May 2005<br />

November 2008<br />

Appendix A 1 to 32F May 2008<br />

Appendix B<br />

Appendix B<br />

1<br />

2 to 7F<br />

May 2006<br />

November 2006<br />

Appendix C<br />

Appendix C<br />

1<br />

2F<br />

May 2005<br />

November 2006<br />

#Appendix D<br />

Appendix D (NI)<br />

1F<br />

N1F<br />

May 2005<br />

March 1998<br />

Appendix E (NI)<br />

#Appendix E<br />

N1F<br />

1F<br />

May 2005<br />

May 2005<br />

Appendix F 1 to 55F May 2009<br />

Appendix G 1F May 2004<br />

Appendix H<br />

Appendix H<br />

Appendix H<br />

1<br />

2, 6 to 8F<br />

3 to 5<br />

November 2006<br />

November 2005<br />

May 2004<br />

5


Section A<br />

Part 2<br />

Specification<br />

6


2.0 SPECIFICATION<br />

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES<br />

AND TABLES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT<br />

Part A: Volume 1 Specification<br />

List of Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />

Clause No<br />

Title<br />

171 AR DAMAGE TO STRUCTURES, ROADS AND ADJACENT PROPERTY<br />

OR BUILDINGS<br />

172 AR ROADS TO BE KEPT CLEAN<br />

173 AR COMMUNICATIONS<br />

175 AR OTHER WORKS ON THE CONTRACT AREA<br />

176 AR COMPLETION OF CONTRACT<br />

177AR<br />

REMOVAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL<br />

178 AR FAILURE TO DISAPPROVE<br />

179AR<br />

570AR<br />

WAYLEAVES AND ACCESS RIGHTS<br />

TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES<br />

670 AR EXCAVATION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT /<br />

FOOTWAY SURFACES<br />

770 AR SURFACE CONDITION<br />

771 AR SURFACING REINSTATEMENTS<br />

772 AR CONCRETE REINSTATEMENTS<br />

List of Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />

Clause<br />

3070AR<br />

Title<br />

LANDSCAPING<br />

C20 DEMOLITION<br />

120 EXTENT OF DECONSTRUCTION/ DEMOLITION<br />

130 GROUNDWORKS<br />

140 BENCH MARKS<br />

120 STRIPPING TOPSOIL<br />

121 TREATING TOPSOIL<br />

125 HANDLING TOPSOIL<br />

168 GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE<br />

7


170 POTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION<br />

171 TREE ROOT BARRIERS (Reroot 2000 – 1mm thick by<br />

2000mm deep)<br />

172 TREE ROOT BARRIERS (Reroot 2000 – 2mm thick by<br />

1500mm deep)<br />

173 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS<br />

410 TOPSOIL:<br />

430 SURPLUS EXCAVATED TOPSOIL:<br />

440 SURPLUS SUBSOIL:<br />

FILLING<br />

510 HAZARDOUS, AGGRESSIVE OR UNSTABLE MATERIALS:<br />

530 PLACING FILL GENERALLY:<br />

610 COMPACTED LANDSCAPE FILLING:<br />

626 COMPACTED GENERAL FILLING:<br />

730 IMPORTED LAKELAND BROWN GRAVEL (75MM DEEP)<br />

TO GRAVEL AREAS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS IN<br />

<strong>SECTION</strong>S 1 AND 2<br />

740 IMPORTED BLUE GREY SLATE MULCH (75MM DEEP) TO<br />

BOULDER AND GRAVEL PLANTING AREAS IN <strong>SECTION</strong><br />

2<br />

750 IMPORTED BOULDERS (DONEGAL GREY/BROWN<br />

GRANITE) IN <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />

F20 NATURAL STONE RUBBLE WALLING/PILLARS –<br />

<strong>SECTION</strong>S 1 AND 2<br />

110 PILLAR TYPE 1<br />

130 PILLAR TYPE 3<br />

140 STONE PLINTH FOR THE HORSE SCULPTURE<br />

RELOCATION<br />

Q10<br />

KERBS/ EDGINGS/ CHANNELS/ PAVING ACCESSORIES<br />

TYPES OF KERBS/ EDGINGS AND CHANNELS<br />

100 PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTRY KERBS LAID FLUSH<br />

FOR VEHICULAR OVERIDE – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

105 PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTRY KERBS LAID 125mm<br />

SHOW – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

8


110 5mm STEEL EDGING<br />

120 5mm STEEL EDGING TREE RINGS<br />

130 SUPEREDGE PLASTIC EDGING<br />

Q20<br />

GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/PAVINGS<br />

130 HERBICIDE:<br />

140 EXCAVATION OF SUBGRADES<br />

145 PREPARATION AND COMPACTION OF SUBGRADES<br />

150 SUBGRADE FOR VEHICULAR AREAS:<br />

160 SUBGRADE FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS:<br />

170 GEOTEXTILE FILTER:<br />

Q23<br />

RESIN BOUND GRAVEL/ VEHICULAR / PEDESTRIAN<br />

TYPES OF SURFACING<br />

200 RESIN BOUND GRAVEL FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS (NEW<br />

FOOTPATHS) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

210 RESIN BOUND GRAVEL (FOR NEW VEHICULAR<br />

SURFACE) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

230 LAYING GENERALLY<br />

240 COLD WEATHER WORKING<br />

250 DRAINAGE FALLS<br />

260 LAYING GRANULAR SURFACES IN VEHICULAR AREAS<br />

280 LAYING GRANULAR SURFACES IN PEDESTRIAN AREAS<br />

290 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC AND PLANT<br />

Q28<br />

TOPSOIL AND GROWING MEDIA<br />

200 GRADING SUBSOIL<br />

250 SUBSOIL SURFACE PREPARATION<br />

330 SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE RETAINED<br />

335 SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE REMOVED<br />

9


670 CONTAMINATION<br />

680 TOPSOIL STORAGE HEAPS<br />

-<br />

690 HANDLING TOPSOIL<br />

700 SPREADING TOPSOIL<br />

910 FINISHED LEVELS OF TOPSOIL AFTER SETTLEMENT<br />

Q30 SEEDING/TURFING<br />

GENERAL INFORMATION/REQUIREMENTS<br />

115 SEEDED AND TURFED AREAS<br />

120 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS<br />

145 WATERING<br />

150 WATER RESTRICTIONS<br />

160 NOTICE<br />

210 HERBICIDE<br />

250 CULTIVATION<br />

260 GRADING<br />

275 FERTILIZER FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />

280 FINAL CULTIVATION<br />

310 GRASS SEED FOR GENERAL GRASS AREAS – MAIN<br />

CEMETERY – <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />

319 QUALITY OF SEED FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />

330 SOWING<br />

335 GRASS SOWING SEASON<br />

340 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE FOR ALL GRASSING AREAS<br />

352 EDGES TO SEEDED AREAS<br />

TURFING<br />

400 CULTIVATED TURF (TO CHAPEL GARDEN) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

420 DELIVERY AND STORAGE<br />

430 TURFING GENERALLY TO CHAPEL GARDEN – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

450 TRIMMING TURF TO CHAPEL GARDEN – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

CUTTING / MAINTENANCE<br />

10


530 FIRST CUT OF ALL GRASSED AND TURFED AREAS<br />

531 FIRST CUT OF ALL TURFED AREAS<br />

605 MAINTENANCE<br />

606 MAINTENANCE OF TURFED AREAS – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2 at the<br />

Chapel<br />

607 MAINTENANCE OF GRASSED AREAS – <strong>SECTION</strong> 1 at the<br />

Cemetery<br />

610 FAILURES OF SEEDING/TURFING<br />

620 MAINTAINING GRASS AREAS<br />

680 MAINTENANCE FERTILIZER FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />

Q31<br />

EXTERNAL PLANTING AND ACCESSORIES<br />

110 PLANTING WORKS<br />

GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS<br />

112 SITE CLEARANCE GENERALLY<br />

118 SOIL CONDITIONS<br />

120 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS<br />

125 TIMES OF YEAR FOR PLANTING<br />

130 MECHANICAL TOOLS<br />

145 WATERING<br />

150 WATER RESTRICTIONS<br />

160 NOTICE<br />

200 PLANTS/ TREES - GENERAL<br />

215 PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA<br />

216 PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA<br />

217 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES<br />

218 PLEACHED TREES<br />

219 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES<br />

220 STANDARD TREES<br />

221 SPECIMEN ROOTBALLED YEWS<br />

222 CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS/ TREES<br />

225 BULBS/ CORMS/ TUBERS<br />

230 BEDDING PLANTS<br />

245 LABELLING AND INFORMATION<br />

11


246 LABELLING AND INFORMATION<br />

250 SUPPLY OF PLANTS/ TREES<br />

260 PLANT/ TREE SUBSTITUTION<br />

265 PLANT/ TREE HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT<br />

270 PLANTING GENERALLY<br />

280 TREATMENT OF TREE WOUNDS<br />

285 PROTECTION OF EXISTING GRASS<br />

290 SURPLUS MATERIAL<br />

300 HERBICIDE<br />

335 GENERAL FERTILIZER<br />

375 CULTIVATION<br />

385 MULCH MATTING/GEOTEXTILE FABRIC<br />

405 SHRUB/ CONTAINER PLANTING<br />

420 CLIMBING PLANTS<br />

435 CLIMBING PLANTS USED AS GROUND COVER<br />

445 PLANTING BULBS/ CORMS/ TUBERS<br />

470 SHRUB AND TREE PLANTING TO GRAVEL AREAS<br />

471 NATURALIZED HEDGES / INSTANT HEDGE BETWEEN<br />

<strong>SECTION</strong> 1& 2 AT END OF CHAPEL GARDEN<br />

472 FORMAL HEDGES TO CHAPEL GARDENS AND OAK LEAF<br />

HEDGE MOTIFS ON UPPER RETAINING WALL IN <strong>SECTION</strong><br />

1<br />

475 BACKFILLING MATERIAL<br />

480 AFTER PLANTING<br />

485 MULCHING PLANTING BEDS<br />

PLANTING TREES<br />

500 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES (WITHOUT<br />

BORDERLINE STEEL EDGING)<br />

501 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES (WITH BORDERLINE<br />

STEEL EDGING)<br />

502 PLEACHED TREES<br />

503 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES WITH DOUBLE STAKES<br />

504 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES WITH UNDERGROUND<br />

GUYING SYSTEM<br />

505 STANDARD TREES<br />

507 SPECIMEN ROOTBALLED YEWS<br />

535 STAKING GENERALLY<br />

12


540 UNDERGROUND GUYING OF SPECIMEN TREES<br />

550 TREE STAKES (FEATHERED TREES ONLY)<br />

560 TREE TIES<br />

585 BACKFILLING MATERIAL<br />

710 MAINTENANCE<br />

720 FAILURES OF PLANTING<br />

740 CLEANLINESS<br />

750 PLANTING MAINTENANCE GENERALLY<br />

760 PLANTING MAINTENANCE - PRUNING<br />

765 PLANTING MAINTENANCE - WATERING<br />

770 WOODLAND PLANTING MAINTENANCE<br />

790 FINAL MULCHING<br />

Q40<br />

FENCING<br />

125 1100 MM HIGH MILD STEEL ESTATE RAILING<br />

250 1450 MM HIGH MILD STEEL SAFETY ESTATE RAILING<br />

300 OAK LEAFED DOUBLE GATES<br />

610 INSTALLATION<br />

620 SETTING POSTS IN CONCRETE<br />

630 EXPOSED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS<br />

680 DAMAGE TO GALVANIZED SURFACES<br />

Q50<br />

SITE/ STREET FURNITURE/ EQUIPMENT<br />

200 SEATS (HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL – POLYESTER<br />

POWDER COAT FINISHED)<br />

210 LITTER BINS (HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL –<br />

POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISHED)<br />

220 WASTE BASKETS FOR SETING AROUND CEMETERY –<br />

<strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />

260 PLANTERS TO CHAPEL GARDEN<br />

270 CAST STONE STATUES – SUMMER – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

13


280 CAST STONE STATUES – SPRING – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

290 CAST STONE STATUES – WINTER – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

300 CAST STONE STATUES – AUTUMN – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

310 OBELISK – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

400 PLEACHED TREE POST AND WIRE FRAME – DRAWING<br />

NR 83473- 04<br />

List of Substitute Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />

Clause No<br />

Title<br />

1800 SR STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />

1802 SR PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION<br />

List of Cancelled Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />

Clause No<br />

Series 1800<br />

Series 1900<br />

Title<br />

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />

PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION<br />

14


Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />

Clause No<br />

Title and written Text<br />

171 AR DAMAGE TO STRUCTURES, ROADS AND ADJACENT PROPERTY OR<br />

BUILDINGS<br />

The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the condition of structures, roads, walls,<br />

fences and adjacent property before commencing work on each part of the site and<br />

shall report any defects to the Project Manager in writing. The Contractor shall be<br />

responsible for any damage to structures, roads, footways or entrances (public or<br />

private) and adjoining property, walls or buildings which may be caused by his<br />

workmen or sub-contractors in the carrying out of the Works and shall make good any<br />

such damage to the satisfaction of the <strong>Council</strong>, Project Manager and those<br />

concerned.<br />

172 AR ROADS TO BE KEPT CLEAN<br />

1. The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent dirt and other deleterious<br />

material being dropped or spread by traffic from or associated with the Works on<br />

roads in public use or on roads being part of the Works which are made<br />

available for use by the Contractor. Any dirt or other deleterious matter<br />

adhering to the tyres or chassis of any vehicle shall be thoroughly cleaned off<br />

before the vehicle is permitted to leave the Site. The Contractor shall be equally<br />

responsible for the vehicles of his sub contractors and suppliers.<br />

2. While the intent of this Clause is to prevent the spilling and spreading of dirt and<br />

other deleterious matter on roadways, nevertheless the Contractor shall also<br />

clean roadways of any such dirt and other deleterious matter as may be spilled<br />

or spread by traffic travelling to or from the site in connection with the Works<br />

whether such traffic is the Contractor's or his sub contractor's or his suppliers.<br />

The Contractor shall carry out any cleaning work during hours, which will reduce<br />

interference with public traffic to a minimum. Such cleaning operation shall be<br />

carried out notwithstanding road cleaning work being carried out by the<br />

Employer or other Contractor(s) to the Employer.<br />

15


Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures (Cont.)<br />

Clause No<br />

Title and written text<br />

173 AR COMMUNICATIONS<br />

Within 7 days of award of the Contract the Contractor shall inform the <strong>Council</strong> in<br />

writing of a contact telephone number for the periods as detailed below:<br />

8.00 am to 6.00 pm on weekdays<br />

6.00 pm to 8.00 am on weekdays<br />

Saturdays, Sundays and Bank Holidays<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that he can be contacted at all times during the period of<br />

the Contract.<br />

In the event of emergency call-out or other reason the <strong>Council</strong>’s representative shall<br />

instruct the Contractor by telephone and the Contractor shall be required to deploy<br />

appropriate operative(s) and equipment to immediately respond to the call-out.<br />

175 AR OTHER WORKS ON THE CONTRACT AREA<br />

The Contractor shall take into account the presence from time to time of other<br />

authorised Contractors, <strong>Council</strong> Staff and other bodies executing work which could<br />

have or may have an impact on the Works.<br />

176AR<br />

COMPLETION OF CONTRACT<br />

At the completion of the works to the site, the Contractor shall, at his expense, inspect<br />

and sweep up and remove all surplus materials and plant and make good any<br />

damage to grass verges, planting, footpath and fences. This shall be undertaken to<br />

the all areas affected by the works.<br />

177AR<br />

REMOVAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL<br />

1. The Contractor shall not allow rubbish and surplus material of any description to<br />

accumulate but shall clear away all such material on the same day as it is<br />

generated to approved licensed tip.<br />

The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to prevent any material entering any<br />

drainage system. Any materials entering a drainage system shall be removed<br />

immediately.<br />

16


Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures (Cont.)<br />

Clause No<br />

Title and written text<br />

178 AR FAILURE TO DISAPPROVE<br />

179AR<br />

Failure by the <strong>Council</strong> or any person acting under them to disapprove any work or<br />

materials shall not prejudice the power of the <strong>Council</strong> or any of their representatives<br />

to subsequently disapprove such work or materials.<br />

WAYLEAVES AND RIGHTS OF ACCESS<br />

In general the Contractor shall allow for gaining access to boundary fences and<br />

adjacent areas from the Contract Area. If in the opinion of the <strong>Council</strong> access from<br />

the Contract Area is impractical then the <strong>Council</strong> shall notify the Contractor of any<br />

wayleaves or rights of access that have been arranged to enable the work to be<br />

undertaken.<br />

570AR<br />

TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES<br />

In addition to testing requirement in Appendix 1/5 and Clause 509 of the Specification<br />

for Highway Work.<br />

1. All Testing and cleaning of pressure pipelines and non pressured pipelines<br />

should be tested to the requirements of the Civil engineering specification for<br />

the water industry 6 th Edition Section 7<br />

2. Testing of polyethylene pressure pipelines shall be carried out in accordance<br />

with the procedures in “”Pressure Testing of Water Supply Pipelines and<br />

Sewers Rising Mains” by WRc<br />

3. Swabbing and disinfection of watermains should be carried out to<br />

requirements in Civil engineering specification for the water industry 6 th<br />

Edition Section 7<br />

670AR<br />

EXCAVATION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT / FOOTWAY<br />

SURFACES<br />

1. Where directed, existing asphalt, macadam, concrete, flagged or paved<br />

/footway surfaces shall be broken up to the specified depth.<br />

2. Where directed, stone, concrete flags, paviors etc shall be carefully taken up<br />

and set aside for reuse. Any sound materials damaged in the foregoing<br />

operation shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.<br />

All surplus material shall be excavated and removed to an approved tip / recycling<br />

area provided by the Contractor. The Contractor may be instructed to deposit<br />

excavated material in areas of fill as directed by the <strong>Council</strong>.<br />

17


Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures (Cont.)<br />

Clause<br />

(etc)<br />

770AR<br />

No<br />

Title and written text<br />

SURFACE CONDITION<br />

1. The contractor shall thoroughly clean the existing or prepared surface of all<br />

loose materials or foreign matter prior to laying macadam or asphalt, to the<br />

satisfaction of the Project Manager.<br />

2. If the Project Manager considers the surface too damp for laying the Contractor<br />

shall dry the surface by the application of limestone dust or hydrated lime to<br />

absorb any surface water and sweeping the whole surface to remove all traces<br />

of the material. No laying of bituminous material shall take place until the<br />

surface is dry to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.<br />

771AR<br />

SURFACING REINSTATEMENTS<br />

1. All areas of excavated bitumen and asphalt surfacing, removed to allow<br />

inspection and testing works to be undertaken, shall be reinstated<br />

permanently using the original construction materials. Associated cutting<br />

back and joint sealing will also be required. All materials shall be laid by<br />

hand.<br />

2. Sides of all excavations in bitumen or asphalt surfacing shall be broken out<br />

so as to provide a cut-out with straight vertical sides.<br />

3. Joint edges shall be formed by diamond saw cutting or cold milling in<br />

accordance with Clause 709 and materials removed to the required depth.<br />

The vertical faces of wearing course joints shall be painted with grade 160 /<br />

220 pen bitumen or a cold applied thixotrophic bitumen.<br />

4. All loose material shall be removed from the Works to an approved licensed<br />

tip/ recycling area.<br />

5. Replacement material shall match the existing removed materials.<br />

6. A bitumen emulsion tack coat shall be sprayed at the rate specified in<br />

Appendix 7/4 to any underlying exposed bituminous layer.<br />

All construction layers shall be laid and compacted such that on completion each<br />

layer shall be at the same level as the adjacent course within the tolerances indicated<br />

in Table 7/1.<br />

18


Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures (Cont.)<br />

Clause No<br />

Title and written text<br />

772AR<br />

CONCRETE REINSTATEMENTS<br />

1. Concrete reinstatements shall be carried out using proprietary repair mortar.<br />

2. Proprietary repair materials and systems shall have a British Board of Agrément<br />

Roads and Bridges Certificate registered with the Overseeing Organisation and<br />

Transport for the Regions/Highway’s Agency.<br />

Clause No<br />

Title and written text<br />

3070AR<br />

C20 LANDSCAPING AND ECOLOGY<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Scope: Before starting deconstruction/ demolition work, examine available<br />

information, and<br />

carry out a survey of:<br />

- the structure or structures to be deconstructed/ demolished,<br />

- the site on which the structure or structures stand, and<br />

- the surrounding area.<br />

Check Type, location and condition of adjoining Chapel that might be adversely<br />

affected by removal of the structures, by vibration and/ or dust generated<br />

during deconstruction/ demolition.<br />

Identity and location of services above and below ground, including those<br />

required for the Contractor's use, and arrangements for their disconnection<br />

and removal.<br />

Form and location of materials identified for reuse or recycling, and proposed<br />

methods for removal and temporary storage.<br />

Propose programme of work, including sequence and methods of<br />

deconstruction/ demolition.<br />

Arrangements for protection of personnel and the general public, including<br />

exclusion of<br />

unauthorized persons.<br />

Arrangements for control of site transport and traffic.<br />

120 EXTENT OF DECONSTRUCTION/ DEMOLITION<br />

o<br />

General: Subject to retention requirements specified elsewhere, deconstruct/<br />

demolish<br />

19


structures down to subbase<br />

130 GROUNDWORKS<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Old foundations, slabs and the like: Break out in locations and to the extents<br />

stated.<br />

Contaminated material: Remove, and carry out remediation required by the<br />

Enforcing<br />

Authority.<br />

140 BENCH MARKS<br />

o<br />

Unrecorded bench marks and other survey information: Give notice when found.<br />

Do not<br />

remove marks or destroy the fabric on which they are found.<br />

120 STRIPPING TOPSOIL<br />

• General: Before beginning general excavation or filling, strip topsoil from areas<br />

where there<br />

drawings.<br />

will be regrading, buildings, pavings/ roads and other areas shown on<br />

• Depth:<br />

- Remove to an average depth of 250mm<br />

- Give notice where the depth of topsoil is difficult to determine.<br />

• Handling: Handle topsoil for reuse or sale in accordance with clause 155<br />

• Around trees: Do not remove topsoil from below the spread of trees to be<br />

retained.<br />

121 TREATING TOPSOIL<br />

• Treatment: Apply a suitable translocated non residual herbicide.<br />

• Timing: Not less than two weeks before excavating topsoil.<br />

125 HANDLING TOPSOIL<br />

• Standard: To BS 3882.<br />

• Aggressive weeds:<br />

- Species: Included in the Weeds Act, section 2 or the Wildlife and<br />

Countryside Act,<br />

Schedule 9, part II.<br />

- Give notice: Obtain instructions before moving topsoil.<br />

20


• Contamination: Do not mix topsoil with:<br />

- Subsoil, stone, hardcore, rubbish or material from demolition work.<br />

- Other soil or material containing aggressive weeds, sharps, plastics<br />

and non soil forming<br />

materials and notifiable animal or plant diseases.<br />

- Oil, fuel, cement or other substances harmful to plant growth.<br />

- Other classifications of topsoil.<br />

• Multiple handling: Keep to a minimum. Use topsoil immediately after stripping.<br />

168 GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

General: Clear site of all rubbish, debris and vegetation. Do not compact topsoil,<br />

leaving site ready for planting works<br />

Treatment: translocated herbicide<br />

Works to be undertaken during reasonable dry weather to avoid compaction<br />

Taken off site or suitable material to be used as fill material in the Chapel Garden<br />

Keep all roads clean and tidy during the works<br />

174 POTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION<br />

Protect all Vegetation and Trees to be retained with appropriate fencing during<br />

the works as per BS 5837: 2005 Trees in relation to Construction<br />

175 TREE ROOT BARRIERS (Reroot 2000 – 1mm thick by 2000mm deep)<br />

o Root barrier: Reroot 2000 linear root barrier or equal and approved<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Product reference: RER 210 - Reroot 2000 – 1mm thick by 2000mm deep, 100lm<br />

rolls<br />

Supplier: Greenleaf Ireland, Ivy House, 24a Church Road, L'<strong>Derry</strong> BT47 3QQ<br />

Tel: +44 (0)28 7134 5620<br />

Location: to be fitted tightly to the base of retaining walls to protect base of<br />

retaining walls and concrete foundations – see Engineers details<br />

Installation: as per manufacturer’s instructions. Join all ends by overlapping and<br />

tape both sides with Greenleaf Reroot jointing tape where required<br />

Backfill material: Good quality topsoil 700-900mm deep, on 400-600mm<br />

subsoil, left in preparation for the landscape Contractor to plant Trees and<br />

Shrubs<br />

Backfilling: Lay and compact lightly in layers not more that 300mm thick.<br />

176 TREE ROOT BARRIERS (Reroot 2000 – 2mm thick by 1500mm deep)<br />

o Root barrier: Reroot 2000 linear root barrier or equal and approved<br />

o Product reference: RER 220 - Reroot 2000 – 2mm thick by 1500mm deep, 100m<br />

rolls<br />

o Supplier: Greenleaf Ireland, as above<br />

21


o Location: to back of headstone foundations to protect foundations and graves –<br />

see Engineers details<br />

o Installation as above<br />

o Backfill material: as above<br />

o Backfilling: as above.<br />

DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS<br />

410 TOPSOIL:<br />

Sufficient of the excavated preserved topsoil to carry out subsequent<br />

topsoiling operations to be stockpiled in temporary spoil heaps not higher than<br />

2.5m.<br />

430 SURPLUS EXCAVATED TOPSOIL:<br />

To be retained on site or removed off site only after approval has been given<br />

by the C.A.<br />

440 SURPLUS SUBSOIL:<br />

To be retained on site or removed off site only after approval has been given<br />

by the C.A.<br />

FILLING<br />

510 HAZARDOUS, AGGRESSIVE OR UNSTABLE MATERIALS:<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Do not import or use fill materials which would, either in themselves or in<br />

combination with other materials or ground water, give rise to a health hazard,<br />

damage to building structures or instability in the filling.<br />

Soluble sulphate content (SO3) of materials for filling under concrete slabs or<br />

within 1 m of substructures must not exceed 1g/litre when tested to BS<br />

1377:Part 3, clause 5 using a 2:1 water-soil extract. Submit test reports from a<br />

UKAS/NAMAS accredited laboratory demonstrating compliance of the<br />

proposed material(s).<br />

530 PLACING FILL GENERALLY:<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Ensure that excavations and areas to be filled are free from loose soil, rubbish<br />

and standing water.<br />

Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice. Do not place fill on<br />

frozen surfaces.<br />

Take all necessary precautions to avoid overloading of adjacent structures and<br />

to ensure stability. Place and compact fill against structures, membranes or<br />

buried services in a sequence and manner, which will ensure stability and<br />

avoid damage.<br />

22


o<br />

o<br />

Plant employed for transporting, laying and compacting must be suited to the<br />

type of material.<br />

Lay differing materials separately so that only one type of material occurs in<br />

each layer.<br />

610 COMPACTED LANDSCAPE FILLING:<br />

o Materials arising from the excavations or imported, capable of compaction by<br />

light earthmoving plant, and excluding the following:<br />

o - Material from marshes or bogs<br />

o - Peat, logs, stumps, slurry, mud and perishable material<br />

o - Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion<br />

o - Material in a frozen condition<br />

o - Clay of liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding 55<br />

o - Material with excessive moisture content<br />

o - Material likely to erode or decay and cause voids<br />

o - Unacceptable material class U2 as defined in clause 601 of the Highways<br />

Agency 'Specification for highway works'.<br />

o Lay in layers not more than 200 mm thick and lights compact each layer with the<br />

earthmoving plant to produce a stable soil structure.<br />

626 COMPACTED GENERAL FILLING:<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Materials arising from the excavations or imported: as agreed with CA.<br />

If both suitable and unsuitable material is excavated, select and keep separate<br />

sufficient suitable material. If there is insufficient suitable excavated material<br />

provide CA with details (and quantities) of proposed imported material.<br />

Spread and level material in layers and as soon as possible thereafter compact<br />

each layer using plant and methods suitable to the type of material.<br />

Well in advance of starting work submit details of proposed:<br />

Materials to be used<br />

ype of plant<br />

Maximum depth of each compacted layer<br />

Minimum number of passes per layer. Obtain instructions before proceeding.<br />

730 IMPORTED LAKELAND BROWN GRAVEL (75MM DEEP) TO GRAVEL<br />

AREAS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS IN <strong>SECTION</strong>S 1 AND 2<br />

o Material: Lakeland Brown gravel 20-35mm diameter or similar supplied by:<br />

Norman Emmerson and Sons Ltd<br />

1 Annaloist Road<br />

Lurgan, Co. Armagh BT66 6NJ<br />

23


Tel: 028 38344440. Contact: Michael Blake<br />

o Sample: A sample load of 1M3 is to be provided for inspection prior to any<br />

Lakeland Brown gravel being used. This sample is to remain until all gravel<br />

operations have been completed.<br />

o Filling: All Lakeland Brown gravel filling is to be carefully positioned and laid<br />

smoothly to avoid damage to adjacent surfaces. The Lakeland Brown gravel filling<br />

required (75mm deep minimum) must be checked prior to completion. Topping may<br />

be required due to settlement.<br />

o Base: Gravel to be laid on top of black polythene builders liner, on 50mm deep<br />

sand on 350mm deep good quality topsoil.<br />

Permissible deviations on surface level +/-5mm.<br />

Borderline Edging, 3mm thick Q10/120 between Gravel areas as separator,<br />

Borderline Edging, 5mm thick Q10/110 as gravel edge or Superedge plastic<br />

edging Q10/130 to Oak leaf shape as shown on the drawing<br />

740 IMPORTED BLUE GREY SLATE MULCH (75MM DEEP) TO BOULDER<br />

AND GRAVEL PLANTING AREAS IN <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />

Material: Blue Grey Slate Mulch or similar supplied by :<br />

Norman Emmerson and Sons Ltd<br />

1 Annaloist Road<br />

Lurgan, Co. Armagh BT66 6NJ<br />

Tel: 028 38344440. Contact: Michael Blake<br />

- Sample: A sample load of 1M3 is to be provided for inspection prior to any<br />

Blue Grey Slate Mulch being used. This sample is to remain until all gravel<br />

operations have been completed.<br />

- Filling: All Blue Grey Slate Mulch filling is to be carefully positioned and laid<br />

smoothly to avoid damage to adjacent surfaces. The Blue Grey Slate Mulch<br />

filling<br />

required (75mm deep minimum) must be checked prior to completion. Topping<br />

may be required due to settlement.<br />

- Base: Mulch to be laid on a black builders polythene liner on a 50mm deep<br />

layer of sand on 350mm minimum depth of good quality topsoil<br />

Permissible deviations on surface level +/-5mm.<br />

- Plastic Edging, Q10/130 between Gravel areas as separator or Borderline<br />

Edging, 5mm thick Q10/110 as gravel edge to grassed area as shown on the<br />

drawing<br />

24


750 IMPORTED BOULDERS (DONEGAL GREY/BROWN GRANITE) IN<br />

<strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />

o To be provided in Gravel Area 1 at the main Entrance into the Cemetery<br />

o Material: Donegal Grey/Brown granite rectangular to round in shape, originally<br />

sourced from McMonagle Stone in Mountcharles, Co. Donegal Tel: 00353-<br />

749735061 but available from Norman Emmerson, or similar.<br />

- Sample: A sample load of 1M3 of boulders is to be provided for<br />

inspection prior to any boulders being used. This sample is to remain until all<br />

gravel and boulder operations have been completed.<br />

- Filling: All boulders are to be carefully positioned in groups of 3-<br />

5Number on gravel areas, or stacked on top of one another to form the rockery<br />

feature, and laid smoothly to avoid damage to adjacent surfaces.<br />

- Base: Boulders to be set on top of the Gravel Areas<br />

- Boulders to be nominal size 350-500mm diameter, random sizes.<br />

- Boulders to be supplied in 20/22 tonne loads.<br />

Allow for all onsite lifting machinery and storage, protection etc. and site<br />

supervision<br />

F20 NATURAL STONE RUBBLE WALLING/PILLARS – <strong>SECTION</strong>S 1 AND 2<br />

All work in this section must be carried out by an approved Stone Mason<br />

TYPES OF WALLING/PILLARS<br />

110 PILLAR TYPE 1<br />

COURSED GLENTOWN STONE PILLAR TO INTERMEDIATE BETWEEN 1450<br />

AND 1100mm HIGH ESTATE RAILINGS<br />

PILLAR TYPE 1<br />

o Drawing References: 83473 – 05<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Height: 2400mm overall<br />

Pillars<br />

- Stone: Glentown – Blue/Black Slate, angular and rectangular in shape<br />

- Colour: Black and variants of black, blue and brown ochres.<br />

- Supplier: McMonagle Stone, Mountcharles, Co. Donegal or other equal and<br />

approved.<br />

- Size of Stone: Random sizes150 - 300 mm deep, 150 - 300mm long x 100 -<br />

150 mm wide. Quality: Seasoned and free from vents, cracks, fissures or<br />

other defects deleterious to strength, durability or appearance.<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Stone to be split and shaped as required to form regular coursed stonework,<br />

with C40 concrete mix infill as stonework is built up<br />

Coping: Sandstone<br />

top of stone pillar flat and level to receive coping stone and ornamental Acorn shaped<br />

25


sandstone Finial<br />

o Acorn shaped sandstone finial as supplied by McMonagle stone or similar fixed<br />

onto coping with 20mm thick solid steel rod, 600mm long min; set in recessed<br />

mould in coping with epoxy resin<br />

o Sandstone pillar coping stone to be 800 x 800 x 100mm natural sandstone<br />

coping dowelled (4nr.) to pillars with 10mm dia x 400mm long m.s. bar recessed<br />

75mm in coping stone and fixed with an epoxy resin.<br />

o Mortar: As section Z21.<br />

- Mix: 1:2:9: cement: lime: sand.<br />

- Sand: N/a.<br />

o<br />

Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />

120 PILLAR TYPE 2<br />

COURSED GLENTOWN STONE PILLAR TO 1100MM HIGH ESTATE RAILINGS<br />

o PILLAR TYPE 2<br />

o Drawing References: 83473 – 05<br />

o Height 2060mm overall<br />

o Build up - as for Pillar Type 1<br />

o Coping and Acorn top - as for Pillar Type 1<br />

o Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />

130 PILLAR TYPE 3<br />

COURSED GLENTOWN STONE PILLAR TO M.S OAK LEAF GATES TO<br />

CHAPEL GARDENS<br />

o PILLAR TYPE 3<br />

o Drawing References: 83473 – 05<br />

o Height 2770mm overall<br />

o Pillar to be build around Gate post - 2620 x 200 x 200 x 8mm thick rhs post with<br />

welded metal bracket/cleats to gates<br />

o Build up - as for Pillar Type 1<br />

o Coping and Acorn top- as for Pillar Type 1<br />

o Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />

140 STONE PLINTH FOR THE HORSE SCULPTURE RELOCATION<br />

o Drawing References: 83473 – 05<br />

o Plinth Height 800mm<br />

o Stone: Glentown – Blue/Black Slate, angular and rectangular in shape<br />

- Colour: Black and variants of black, blue and brown ochres.<br />

- Supplier: McMonagle Stone, Mountcharles, Co. Donegal or other equal and<br />

26


approved.<br />

o Size of Stone: Random sizes150 - 300 mm deep, 150 - 300mm long x 100 -150<br />

mm wide. Stone to be split and shaped as required to form regular coursed<br />

stonework, with C40 concrete mix infill as stonework is built up<br />

- Quality: Seasoned and free from vents, cracks, fissures or other defects<br />

deleterious to strength, durability or appearance.<br />

o Coping: Relocated Horse statue with trowelled mortar edging<br />

o fixed with an epoxy resin.<br />

o Mortar: As section Z21.<br />

- Mix: 1:2:9: cement: lime: sand.<br />

- Sand: N/a.<br />

o<br />

Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />

Q10 KERBS/ EDGINGS/ CHANNELS/ PAVING ACCESSORIES<br />

TYPES OF KERBS/ EDGINGS AND CHANNELS<br />

100 PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTRY KERBS LAID FLUSH FOR VEHICULAR<br />

OVERIDE – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

• Manufacturer: Tobermore Concrete Products Ltd, 2 Lisnamuck Road,<br />

Tobermore, County L'<strong>Derry</strong><br />

BT45 5QF. Tel: 028 7964 2411, Fax: 028 7964 4145. Email:<br />

sales@tobermore.co.uk<br />

Web: www.tobermore.co.uk<br />

• Product reference: Country Kerbs<br />

• Type: 250 x 125 x 915mm Country Kerb<br />

• Finish/ colour: Standard Aggregate Textured<br />

o<br />

Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />

Drawing Nr 83473-05<br />

105 PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTRY KERBS LAID 125mm SHOW – <strong>SECTION</strong><br />

2<br />

• Manufacturer: Tobermore Concrete Products Ltd, 2 Lisnamuck Road,<br />

Tobermore, County L'<strong>Derry</strong><br />

BT45 5QF. Tel: 028 7964 2411, Fax: 028 7964 4145. Email:<br />

sales@tobermore.co.uk<br />

27


Web: www.tobermore.co.uk<br />

• Product reference: Country Kerbs<br />

• Type: 250 x 125 x 915mm Country Kerb<br />

• Finish/ colour: Standard Aggregate Textured<br />

o<br />

Foundations and excavations and builders work as shown on the details<br />

Drawing Nr 83473-05<br />

110 5mm STEEL EDGING<br />

o Borderline steel lawn edging as supplied by Greenleaf Ireland (Ivy House, 24a<br />

Church Road, Londonderry, BT47 3QQ, T: +44 (0)28 7134 56820,<br />

E: sales@greenleafireland.com) or similar approved. Fitted in accordance with<br />

manufacturer’s instructions.<br />

o Product Reference: BL 150 JS; Borderline Steel lawn edging, 2m long units,<br />

150mm deep x<br />

5mm thick, including 3 Nr staked per length, Colour brown polyester powder<br />

coated.<br />

o Excavations and builders work as shown on the detail Drawing Nr 83473-05<br />

and fitted as per manufacturer’s recommendations<br />

120 5mm STEEL EDGING TREE RINGS<br />

o Borderline steel edging as supplied by Greenleaf Ireland (Address as previously<br />

stated, Tel: 028 7134 5620) or similar approved.<br />

Product Reference: Special order, Borderline steel edging, 150mm deep x 5mm<br />

thick, 1800mm Diameter, including 8 Nr stakes per ring, colour brown polyester<br />

powder coated fitted as per manufacturer’s recommendations<br />

130 SUPEREDGE PLASTIC EDGING<br />

o Plastic edging as supplied by Greenleaf Ireland (Address as previously stated,<br />

Tel: 028 7134 5620) or similar approved.<br />

o Product Reference: SELE; 30m rolls, 150mm Deep, Colour Black; 3mm thick<br />

To include 40Nr Stakes per 30m roll and 4Nr H-clips per roll fitted as per<br />

manufacturer’s recommendations<br />

Q20<br />

GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/PAVINGS<br />

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.<br />

130 HERBICIDE:<br />

Apply an approved type of herbicide in accordance with manufacturer's<br />

recommendations to subgrade of roads, footpaths and courtyards.<br />

28


140 EXCAVATION OF SUBGRADES<br />

• Final excavation to formation/ sub-formation level: Carry out immediately<br />

before compaction of subgrade.<br />

• Soft spots and voids: Give notice.<br />

• Wet conditions: Do not excavate or compact when the subgrade may be<br />

damaged or destabilized.<br />

145 PREPARATION AND COMPACTION OF SUBGRADES<br />

• Timing: Immediately before placing sub-base.<br />

• Compaction: Thoroughly, by roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist<br />

subsidence or deformation of the subgrade during construction and of the<br />

completed roads/ pavings when in use. Take particular care to compact fully at<br />

intrusions, perimeters and where local excavation and backfilling has taken<br />

place.<br />

150 SUBGRADE FOR VEHICULAR AREAS:<br />

Sub-base to be placed within 12 hours of formation level being exposed and<br />

compacted. Immediately before placing sub-base prepare and compact<br />

subgrade in accordance with Highways Agency Specification for highway works,<br />

clauses 616 and 617.<br />

160 SUBGRADE FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS:<br />

Sub-base to be placed within 12 hours of formation level being exposed and<br />

compacted. Immediately before placing sub-base thoroughly compact subgrade<br />

with a roller weighing not less than 2.5 tonnes or equivalent other plant.<br />

170 GEOTEXTILE FILTER:<br />

• Lay an approved type in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to<br />

compacted subgrade of vehicular areas.<br />

• Do not allow construction or other vehicles over the geotextile until it is fully<br />

covered by the granular sub-base.<br />

Q23<br />

RESIN BOUND GRAVEL/ VEHICULAR / PEDESTRIAN<br />

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.<br />

29


TYPES OF SURFACING<br />

200 RESIN BOUND GRAVEL FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS (NEW FOOTPATHS)<br />

– <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

o<br />

Subgrade improvement layer (Capping): as section Q20 if required,<br />

- Compacted thickness: 0-600 mm<br />

o Granular sub-base: as section Q20, 110 mm Crusher run stone, lay geotextile<br />

Terram 1000 below as Q20.<br />

- Compacted thickness: 150 mm<br />

o Base course: 20 mmDBM B/C toBS 4987/ 6.5 - Thickness: 50 mm<br />

o Wearing course: 10mm aggregate bitmac<br />

- Binder: Cold bitumen emulsion to BS 434-1, class K1 60.<br />

- Chippings: To BS EN 13043, nominal size 6 mm.<br />

clean chippings.<br />

- Application: Uniformly spray binder at a rate of 2 L/m². Cover with<br />

compact.<br />

Provide 100-105% shoulder to shoulder coverage to BS 598-108 and<br />

Thickness: 20 mm<br />

o Surface treatment: 18 mm deep layer of resin bound gravel ‘Sure Set 6mm<br />

‘Barley Beach’, where shown on the drawing,<br />

o Product Ref: L1403/10, as supplied by SureSet UK Ltd, 32 Deverill Road, Trading<br />

Estate, Sutton Veny, Warminster, England BA12 7BZ, Tel 01985 841180. A<br />

sample of resin bound gravel is to be provided prior to commencing this item, +<br />

provision of warranty of min 10years<br />

o Compaction to all layers: By heavy roller or other appropriate means, adequate to<br />

resist<br />

subsidence or deformation of the completed roads/ pavings when in use. Do<br />

not crush<br />

chippings.<br />

o Completion: Before trafficking, remove excess chippings<br />

o Laid in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and to the detail<br />

shown on Drawing Nr 83473 - 05, and to include for all related builders work in<br />

association, and all materials.<br />

o To be laid to long falls and cross falls as shown on Drawing Nr 83473-03, allow<br />

for all soft spots and compacted build up on fill materal under new paving areas.<br />

o Pathways to be suitable for a ride on grass cutting machine laid flush with turfed<br />

lawns<br />

30


210 RESIN BOUND GRAVEL (FOR NEW VEHICULAR SURFACE) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

o Subgrade improvement layer (Capping): as section Q20 clause 200 if required,<br />

- Compacted thickness: 0-600 mm<br />

o Granular sub-base: as section Q20, 110 mm Crusher run stone, lay geotextile<br />

o Terram 1000 below as Q20<br />

o Compacted thickness: 225 mm<br />

o Granular road-base: as section Q20, 65 mm Crusher run stone,Thickness: 190<br />

mm<br />

o Base course: 25 mmDBM B/C toBS 4987/ 6.5,Thickness: 60mm<br />

o Wearing course: 10 mm aggregate bitmac<br />

- Binder: Cold bitumen emulsion to BS 434-1, class K1 60.<br />

- Chippings: To BS EN 13043, nominal size 10 mm.<br />

- Application: Uniformly spray binder at a rate of 2 L/m². Cover with<br />

clean chippings.<br />

- Provide 100-105% shoulder to shoulder coverage to BS 598-108 and<br />

compact.<br />

- Thickness: 30 mm<br />

o Surface treatment: 18 mm deep layer of resin bound gravel ‘Sure Set 6mm<br />

‘Barley Beach’, where shown on the Drawing Nr 83473 - 05, as supplied by<br />

SureSet UK Ltd, 32 Deverill Road, Trading Estate, Sutton Veny, Warminster,<br />

England BA12 7BZ, Tel 01985 841180. A sample of resin bound gravel is to be<br />

provided prior to commencing this item, + provision of warranty of min 10years<br />

o Compaction to all layers: By heavy roller or other appropriate means, adequate to<br />

resist<br />

- subsidence or deformation of the completed roads/ pavings when in<br />

use. Do not crush<br />

- chippings.<br />

o Completion: Before trafficking, remove excess chippings. Laid to falls as agreed<br />

on site.<br />

230 LAYING GENERALLY<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Finished surfaces:<br />

Lines and levels: To prevent ponding.<br />

Overall texture: Even.<br />

State at completion: Clean.<br />

240 COLD WEATHER WORKING<br />

• Frozen materials: Do not use.<br />

• Freezing conditions: Do not lay pavings.<br />

• Cold bituminous surface dressings: Do not apply when ambient temperature is<br />

31


elow 10°C.<br />

250 DRAINAGE FALLS<br />

• Sealed surfaces:<br />

- Falls and cross falls (minimum): 1:40<br />

- Camber (minimum): 1:50<br />

• Unsealed surfaces (minimum): 1:30<br />

260 LAYING GRANULAR SURFACES IN VEHICULAR AREAS<br />

• Permissible deviation from required levels, falls and cambers (maximum):<br />

±20mm.<br />

• General: Spread and level in 150 mm maximum layers. As soon as possible<br />

compact each<br />

layer.<br />

• Dry weather: Lightly water layers during compaction.<br />

280 LAYING GRANULAR SURFACES IN PEDESTRIAN AREAS<br />

mm.<br />

• Permissible deviation from required levels, falls and cambers (maximum): ±12<br />

• General: Spread and level in 100 mm maximum layers. As soon as possible,<br />

compact<br />

each layer.<br />

• Dry weather: Lightly water layers during compaction.<br />

290 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC AND PLANT<br />

• Paved areas: Restrict access to prevent damage.<br />

Q28<br />

TOPSOIL AND GROWING MEDIA<br />

200 GRADING SUBSOIL<br />

o General: Grade to smooth flowing contours to achieve specified finished levels<br />

o of topsoil to desired levels shown of the drawings to the Chapel Garden –<br />

Section 2.<br />

o Areas of thicker topsoil: Excavate locally.<br />

250 SUBSOIL SURFACE PREPARATION<br />

o<br />

General: Excavate and/ or place fill to required profiles and levels, as shown on<br />

sections shown on drawings to the Chapel Garden – Section 2.<br />

32


o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Loosening:<br />

- Light and noncohesive subsoils: When ground conditions are<br />

reasonably<br />

- dry, loosen thoroughly to a depth of 300 mm.<br />

- Stiff clay and cohesive subsoils: When ground conditions are<br />

reasonably dry, loosen thoroughly to a depth of 450 mm.<br />

- Rock and chalk subgrades: Lightly scarify to promote free<br />

drainage.<br />

Stones: Immediately before spreading topsoil, remove stones larger than 75mm<br />

in any dimension.<br />

Other items: Remove any debris and foreign matter.<br />

330 SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE RETAINED<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Generally: Spread and level on site:<br />

Locations: to be agreed with C.A.<br />

Protected areas: Do not raise soil level within root spread of trees that are to be<br />

retained.<br />

335 SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE REMOVED<br />

o<br />

Generally: Remove from site to a licensed landfill site – if required surplus<br />

topsoil may be deposited elsewhere on site with the Clients permission.<br />

670 CONTAMINATION<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Protected areas: Do not raise soil level within root spread of trees that are to be<br />

retained.<br />

General: Do not use topsoil contaminated with subsoil, rubbish or other<br />

materials that are:<br />

- Corrosive, explosive or flammable.<br />

Hazardous to human or animal life.<br />

- Detrimental to healthy plant growth- contain noxious weeds e.g. Japanese<br />

Knotweed<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Subsoil: In areas to receive topsoil, do not use subsoil contaminated with the<br />

above materials.<br />

Give notice: If any evidence or symptoms of soil contamination are discovered<br />

on the site, or in topsoil to be imported.<br />

680 TOPSOIL STORAGE HEAPS<br />

33


o Location: to be agreed with C.A.<br />

o Height (maximum): 1 m.<br />

o Width (maximum): 5 m.<br />

o Protection:<br />

- Do not place any other material on top of storage heaps.<br />

- Do not allow construction plant to pass over storage heaps.<br />

- Prevent compaction and contamination, by fencing and covering as<br />

- appropriate.<br />

-<br />

690 HANDLING TOPSOIL<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Aggressive weeds: Give notice and obtain instructions before moving topsoil.<br />

Plant: Select and use plant to minimize disturbance, trafficking and compaction.<br />

Contamination: Do not mix topsoil with: Subsoil, stone, hardcore, rubbish or<br />

material from demolition work.<br />

Other grades of topsoil.<br />

Multiple handling: Keep to a minimum. Use topsoil immediately after stripping.<br />

Wet conditions: Handle topsoil in the driest condition possible. Do not handle<br />

during or after heavy rainfall or when it is wetter than the plastic limit less 3%,<br />

to BS 1377-2.<br />

700 SPREADING TOPSOIL<br />

Layers: Depth (maximum): 150 mm.<br />

o Gently firm each layer before spreading the next.<br />

o Depths after firming and settlement (minimum)<br />

- grass areas: 150mm; planted areas: 350mm.<br />

o<br />

Crumb structure: Do not compact topsoil. Preserve a friable texture of separate<br />

visible crumbs wherever possible.<br />

910 FINISHED LEVELS OF TOPSOIL AFTER SETTLEMENT<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Above adjoining paving or kerbs: 30 mm.<br />

Below dpc of adjoining buildings: Not less than 150 mm.<br />

Shrub areas: Higher than adjoining grass areas by 30 mm.<br />

Within root spread of existing trees: Unchanged.<br />

Adjoining soil areas: Marry in where levels permit.<br />

Thickness of turf or mulch: Included.<br />

34


Q30<br />

SEEDING/TURFING<br />

The Contractor should note that all grassing and Turfing Works are to be carried<br />

out by an approved Landscape sub-Contractor who is a member of the<br />

Association of Landscape Contractors Ireland (ALCI) and aRegistered member of<br />

Constructionline<br />

GENERAL INFORMATION/REQUIREMENTS<br />

115 SEEDED AND TURFED AREAS<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Growth and development: Healthy, vigorous grass sward, free from the visible<br />

effects of pests, weeds and disease.<br />

Appearance: A closely knit, continuous ground cover of even density, height<br />

and colour.<br />

120 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS<br />

o<br />

General: Carry out the work while soil and weather conditions are suitable.<br />

145 WATERING<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Quantity: Wet full depth of topsoil.<br />

Application: Even and without displacing seed, seedlings or soil.<br />

Frequency: As necessary to ensure the establishment and continued thriving of<br />

all seeding/turfing, particularly during periods of exceptionally dry weather.<br />

150 WATER RESTRICTIONS<br />

o<br />

Timing: If water supply is or is likely to be restricted by emergency legislation<br />

do not carry out seeding/turfing until instructed. If seeding/ turfing has been<br />

carried out, obtain instructions on watering.<br />

160 NOTICE<br />

o<br />

Give notice before:<br />

- Setting out.<br />

- Applying herbicide.<br />

35


- Applying fertilizer.<br />

- Preparing seed bed.<br />

- Seeding or turfing.<br />

- Visiting site during maintenance period.<br />

o<br />

Period of notice: 3 working days.<br />

PREPARATION<br />

210 HERBICIDE<br />

o<br />

Operations: apply a suitable translocated herbicide to perennial weeds and<br />

allow a sufficient<br />

period of time to elapse for these weeds to die as recommended by the<br />

Manufacture before commencing cultivation<br />

250 CULTIVATION<br />

o Compacted topsoil: Break up to full depth.<br />

o Soil ameliorant/ Conditioner/ Fertilizer: Fully incorporate into topsoil to 150mm<br />

deep.<br />

o Tilth: Reduce top 100 mm of topsoil to a tilth suitable for blade grading, particle<br />

size 10 mm (maximum).<br />

o Material brought to the surface: Remove stones and clay balls larger than 50<br />

mm in any dimension, roots, tufts of grass, rubbish and debris.<br />

260 GRADING<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Topsoil condition: Reasonably dry and workable.<br />

Contours: Smooth and flowing, with falls for adequate drainage. Remove minor<br />

hollows and ridges.<br />

Finished levels after settlement: 25 mm above adjoining paving, kerbs, manholes or<br />

garden edging<br />

Blade grading: May be used to adjust topsoil levels provided depth of topsoil is<br />

nowhere less than 150mm .<br />

Give notice: If required levels cannot be achieved by movement of existing soil.<br />

275 FERTILIZER FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />

36


o<br />

Type: 'Floranid Master' slow release fertliiser (16:5:10), (or other equal and<br />

approved) as supplied by U.A.P, The Crossways, Alconbury Hill, Alconbury<br />

Weston, Hunting PE28 4JH; Tel (08456) 073322; Contact: Craig Brisley.<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Application: Before final cultivation and three to five days before seeding/turfing.<br />

Coverage: Spread evenly at 40g/m2.<br />

280 FINAL CULTIVATION<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Timing: After grading and fertilizing.<br />

Seed bed: Reduce to fine, firm tilth with good crumb structure.<br />

- Depth: 25 mm.<br />

- Surface preparation: Rake to a true, even surface, friable and lightly firmed<br />

but not over compacted.<br />

- Remove surface stones/earth clods exceeding:<br />

General areas: 50mm – (to the Cemetery extension works – Section 1)<br />

Fine lawn areas: 25 mm – (to the Chapel Garden – Section 2)<br />

o<br />

Adjacent levels: Extend cultivation into existing adjacent grassed areas<br />

sufficient to ensure full marrying in of levels.<br />

SEEDING<br />

310 GRASS SEED FOR GENERAL GRASS AREAS – MAIN CEMETERY –<br />

<strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />

o<br />

Mixture: Seed mixture shall be as follows:<br />

40% 'Premo' perennial ryegrass<br />

30% 'Royal' perennial ryegrass<br />

25% 'Moncorde' creeping red fescue<br />

5% 'Highland' browntop<br />

Seed to be supplied from an approved source.<br />

Rate of application: 40g/m2.<br />

- See Drawing Nrs 83473 – 01 and 02<br />

37


319 QUALITY OF SEED FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Freshness: Produced for the current growing season.<br />

Certification: Blue label certified varieties to EC purity and germination<br />

regulations. When requested, submit an Official Seed Testing Station<br />

certificate of germination, purity and composition.<br />

o<br />

Samples of mixtures: Submit when requested.<br />

330 SOWING<br />

o<br />

o<br />

General: Establish good seed contact with the root zone to promote healthy,<br />

consistent growth.<br />

Method: To suit soil type, proposed usage of grassed area, location and<br />

weather conditions during and after sowing.<br />

335 GRASS SOWING SEASON<br />

o<br />

Grass seed generally: beginning of June to end of September.<br />

340 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE FOR ALL GRASSING AREAS<br />

o<br />

General: Where soil has not been allowed to lie fallow apply a suitable preemergent<br />

herbicide immediately after sowing.<br />

352 EDGES TO SEEDED AREAS<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Location: Planting beds and around newly planted trees.<br />

Timing: After seeded areas are well established.<br />

Edges: Cut to clean straight lines or smooth curves. Soil drawn back to permit<br />

edging.<br />

Arisings: Remove.<br />

TURFING<br />

400 CULTIVATED TURF (TO CHAPEL GARDEN) – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

o See Drawing Nr. 83473 - 03<br />

o Supplier: “Emerald Lawns” or other equal and approved supplier who must be a<br />

Turfgrass<br />

o Growers Association (TGA) member, to TGA quality standards.<br />

o Seed mixture as per Emerald Premium Lawn Turf, free from broad leaved<br />

weeds available from Emerald Lawns, 45 Point Road, Limavady, BT49 0LP, Tel:<br />

38


o<br />

028 7775 0297<br />

Properties of soil used for turf production: high sand content<br />

420 DELIVERY AND STORAGE<br />

o Timing: Lay turf with minimum possible delay after lifting. If delay occurs, lay turf<br />

out on topsoil and keep moist.<br />

o Frosty weather or waterlogged ground: Do not lift turf.<br />

o Delivery: Arrange to avoid need for excessive stacking.<br />

o Stacking height (maximum): 1 m.<br />

o Dried out or deteriorated turf: Do not use.<br />

430 TURFING GENERALLY TO CHAPEL GARDEN – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Time of year: in appropriate weather conditions.<br />

Timing of laying:<br />

Spring and summer: within 18 hours of delivery.<br />

Autumn and winter: within 24 hours of delivery.<br />

Weather conditions: Do not lay turf when persistent cold or drying winds are<br />

likely to occur or soil is frost bound, waterlogged or excessively dry.<br />

Working access: Planks laid on previously laid turf. Do not walk on prepared<br />

bed or newly laid turf.<br />

Jointing: Laid with broken joints, well butted up. Do not stretch turf.<br />

Edges: Whole turfs, trimmed to a true line.<br />

Adjusting levels: Remove high spots and fill hollows with fine soil.<br />

Consolidating: Lightly and evenly firm as laying proceeds to ensure full contact<br />

with substrate. Do not use rollers.<br />

Dressing, brushed well in to completely fill all joints.<br />

Watering: Thoroughly water completed turf immediately after laying. Check that<br />

water has penetrated to the soil below.<br />

450 TRIMMING TURF TO CHAPEL GARDEN – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2<br />

o<br />

Newly planted tree pits: Neatly cut away around individual trees.<br />

- Diameter: 800mm to Trees against instant hedge on turfed bank.<br />

- Tree pit surface: Leave soil exposed and apply screened topsoil as detailed<br />

in the Bill of Quantities<br />

- trim turf to paths and beds<br />

CUTTING / MAINTENANCE<br />

530 FIRST CUT OF ALL GRASSED AND TURFED AREAS<br />

o<br />

Timing: When grass is reasonably dry.<br />

39


o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Height of initial growth: 50mm for grassed areas and 30mm for turfed areas.<br />

Preparation: clear areas to be cut of all extraneous matter and foreign debris<br />

Debris and litter: Remove.<br />

Stones and earth clods larger than 25 mm in any dimension: Remove<br />

Height of first cut: 25mm.<br />

Mower type: Cylinder.<br />

Arisings: to be removed and boxed at turf areas<br />

531 FIRST CUT OF ALL TURFED AREAS<br />

o Cut with cylindrical hand mower and roller 2 weeks after laying and rolling –<br />

remove<br />

all arisings. Heel back any loose turf.<br />

605 MAINTENANCE<br />

o<br />

Duration: Carry out the following operations from completion of seeding/ turfing<br />

for an initial period of 1 month to achieve establishment (Practical Completion)<br />

and then maintain for a 12 month period of maintenance (running concurrently<br />

with Defects Liability Period).<br />

606 MAINTENANCE OF TURFED AREAS – <strong>SECTION</strong> 2 at the Chapel<br />

o<br />

Duration - After initial cut, undertake to keep turfed areas less than 15 - 30mm in<br />

height with a minimum of 25 Nr further cuts – total 26 cuts during the<br />

1 years establishment maintenance, all clippings to be boxed and removed off<br />

site<br />

607 MAINTENANCE OF GRASSED AREAS – <strong>SECTION</strong> 1 at the Cemetery<br />

o<br />

Duration - After initial cut, undertake to keep grassed areas less than 30-50mm<br />

in height with a minimum of 21 Nr further cuts – total 22 cuts during the<br />

1 years establishment maintenance, all clippings to be left.<br />

610 FAILURES OF SEEDING/TURFING<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Defective materials or workmanship: Areas that have failed to thrive.<br />

Exclusions: Theft or malicious damage.<br />

Method of making good: Recultivation and reseeding/ returfing.<br />

Timing of making good: Submit proposals.<br />

620 MAINTAINING GRASS AREAS<br />

o<br />

Maximum height of growth at any time :30-50mm for general grassed areas to<br />

40


Section 1 in the Cemetery and 15-30mm for the turfed areas at Chapel Garden<br />

o Preparation: Before each cut remove all litter and debris.<br />

o Cutting: As and when necessary to a height of 30-50mm for general areas<br />

o around the Cemetery and 15-30mm for the turfed areas at the Chapel Garden.<br />

o Cylinder mowers ONLY to be used for all areas that have been turfed.<br />

- Arisings: To be removed off site at the Chapel but not for the Cemetery<br />

o Bulb planting areas: Do not cut until bulb foliage has died down.<br />

o Trimming: All edges.<br />

- Arisings: Remove.<br />

o Weed control: All turfed and sown areas are to be maintained substantially free<br />

o of broad leaved weeds, using suitable and approved selective herbicides.<br />

o Method: Application of a suitable selective herbicide.<br />

o Stones brought to the surface: Remove regularly.<br />

o Size: Exceeding 25 mm in any dimension.<br />

o Areas of settlement: Make good.<br />

o Watering: As clause Q30 / 145<br />

680 MAINTENANCE FERTILIZER FOR ALL GRASS AREAS<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

March application: 15:10:10 Spring turf fertilizer at 35 g/m².<br />

September application: 5:10:10 Autumn turf fertilizer at 50 g/m².<br />

Fertiliser application: all Fertiliser is to be applied using suitable machinery to<br />

insure even distribution. Any scorching of grass is to be made good at<br />

Contractor’s expense.<br />

Q31<br />

EXTERNAL PLANTING AND ACCESSORIES<br />

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.<br />

GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS<br />

110 PLANTING WORKS<br />

All planting works under Clause Q31 External Planting are to be carried as a<br />

Domestic Sub-Contract by an approved specialist Landscape Contractor and<br />

must be a member of (ALCI) The Association of Landscape Contractors<br />

Ireland and a registered member of Constructionline.<br />

GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS<br />

112 SITE CLEARANCE GENERALLY<br />

o General: Remove rubbish, concrete, metal, glass, decayed vegetation and<br />

contaminated topsoil.<br />

41


o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Stones: Remove those with largest dimension exceeding 75mm.<br />

Contamination: Substances injurious to plant growth including subsoil, rubble,<br />

fuel, and lubricants.<br />

Vegetation: Clear all including briars and hogweed.<br />

Large roots: Grub up and dispose of without undue disturbance of soil and<br />

adjacent areas.<br />

Additional requirements: Apply a suitable nonresidual herbicide to all.<br />

118 SOIL CONDITIONS<br />

o Soil for cultivating and planting: Moist, friable and (excepting aquatic/ marginal<br />

planting) not waterlogged.<br />

o Frozen or snow covered soil: Give notice before planting. Provide additional root<br />

protection. Prevent planting pit sides and bases and backfill materials from<br />

freezing.<br />

120 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS<br />

o General: Carry out the work while soil and weather conditions are suitable. Do<br />

not plant during periods of frost or strong winds.<br />

125 TIMES OF YEAR FOR PLANTING<br />

o All plant material has been specified as container grown or rootballed and can<br />

be planted at any reasonable time of the year subject to suitable climatic<br />

conditions<br />

o Dried bulbs, corms and tubers: September/ October.<br />

o Colchicum (crocus): July/ August.<br />

o Green bulbs: After flowering in spring.<br />

o Wildflower plugs: Late August to mid November or March/ April.<br />

o Aquatic and marginal plants: May/ June or September/ October.<br />

130 MECHANICAL TOOLS<br />

o<br />

Restrictions: Do not use within 100 mm of tree and plant stems.<br />

145 WATERING<br />

o Quantity: Wet full depth of topsoil.<br />

o Application: Even and without damaging or displacing plants or soil.<br />

o Frequency: As necessary to ensure establishment and continued thriving of<br />

planting.<br />

150 WATER RESTRICTIONS<br />

o General: If water supply is or is likely to be restricted by emergency legislation,<br />

do not carry out planting until instructed. If planting has been carried out,<br />

obtain instructions on watering.<br />

160 NOTICE<br />

42


Give notice before:<br />

o Setting out.<br />

o Applying herbicide.<br />

o Applying fertilizer.<br />

o Delivery of plants/ trees.<br />

o Planting shrubs.<br />

o Planting trees into previously dug pits.<br />

o Watering.<br />

o Visiting site during maintenance period.<br />

o Period of notice: 7 days.<br />

200 PLANTS/ TREES - GENERAL<br />

o Condition: Materially undamaged, sturdy, healthy and vigorous.<br />

o Appearance: Of good shape and without elongated shoots.<br />

o Hardiness: Grown in a suitable environment and hardened off.<br />

o Health: Free from pests, diseases, discoloration, weeds and physiological<br />

disorders.<br />

o Budded or grafted plants: Bottom worked.<br />

o Root system and condition: To requirements of the National Plant Specification<br />

and balanced with branch system.<br />

o Species: True to name.<br />

o Origin/ Provenance: UK/Ireland where possible and feasible.<br />

o Origin and Provenance have the meaning given in the National Plant<br />

Specification.<br />

215 PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA<br />

o Name, forms, dimensions, provenance and other criteria: As scheduled and<br />

defined in the National Plant Specification.<br />

216 PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA<br />

o Name, forms, dimensions and other criteria: To the relevant part of BS 3936.<br />

217 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES<br />

o They shall comprise: Semi Mature Trees, root balled or container grown,<br />

Overall height 6m+ (except for 1Nr Monkey Puzzle Tree to be 8m+)<br />

o They shall have a well developed and balanced head. All shall have a good<br />

fibrous root system and shall have been regularly transplanted to build up the<br />

main roots with well developed laterals and fibrous root system.<br />

o All trees shall have an upright central leader and shall have min. five main<br />

branches with lateral shoots. Unless they are feathered stock, they shall have a<br />

clear stem to 1.8m to 2.1m A.G.L.<br />

o All Multi-stem Trees shall have a minimum of five branches rising from the stool.<br />

218 PLEACHED TREES<br />

o To be rootballed or container grown, 2.0m high clear stem<br />

o Minimum 4Nr tier layer of horizontal branches with 40 cms between each tier<br />

43


o With well developed and equally balanced growth, complete with bamboo cane<br />

frame to maintain shape.<br />

o Overall height 4.0m plus<br />

219 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES<br />

o To be container grown (bare rooted plant material will not be acceptable by the<br />

client) with 1.8 – 2.5 m clear stemmed, girth at 1.0m a.g.l. 18 - 20cms<br />

o All trees shall be well grown, healthy, well established nursery transplants of<br />

good form, free from defects, furnished with a fibrous root system exactly true to<br />

name as specified and open ground grown unless otherwise detailed.<br />

o Transplants shall have been transplanted or undercut at least once and shall<br />

have a minimum number of brakes in the lower third of the main stem<br />

o To be pruned back where necessary (depending on species) to achieve a<br />

sturdy, well balanced, bushy plant.<br />

o Overall height 4.5 – 5.0m plus<br />

220 STANDARD TREES<br />

o To be container grown standard trees (bare rooted plant material will not be<br />

acceptable by the client) with 1.8m clear stemmed, girth at 1.0m a.g.l. 8-10cms;<br />

overall height 2.75 -3.0m, planted with double stake and timber cross brace<br />

o All trees shall be well grown, healthy, well established nursery transplants of<br />

good form, free from defects, furnished with a fibrous root system exactly true to<br />

name as specified and open ground grown unless otherwise detailed.<br />

o Transplants shall have been transplanted or undercut at least once and shall<br />

have a minimum number of brakes in the lower third of the main stem<br />

221 SPECIMEN ROOTBALLED YEWS<br />

o To be rootballed or container grown if 2.5 -3.0 m in height min 5 times<br />

transplanted with well developed and even branch system all around the plant<br />

o All trees shall be well grown, healthy, well established nursery transplants of<br />

good form, free from defects, furnished with a fibrous root system exactly true to<br />

name as specified and open ground grown unless otherwise detailed.<br />

222 CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS/ TREES<br />

o Growing medium: With adequate nutrients for plants to thrive until permanently<br />

planted.<br />

o Plants: Centred in containers, firmed and well watered.<br />

o Root growth: Substantially filling containers, but not root bound, and in a<br />

condition conducive to successful transplanting.<br />

o Hardiness: Grown in the open for at least two months before being supplied.<br />

o Containers: With holes adequate for drainage when placed on any substrate<br />

commonly used under irrigation systems.<br />

o All whips, conifers, shrubs and climbers shall be well grown, bushy, healthy, well<br />

established nursery transplants of good from hardy, free from defects, furnished<br />

44


o<br />

o<br />

with a fibrous root system exactly true to name as specified and open ground<br />

grown unless otherwise detailed.<br />

Transplants shall have been transplanted or undercut at least once and shall<br />

have a minimum number of brakes in the lower third of the main stem, as<br />

specified in the plant schedule. They shall be pruned back where necessary<br />

(depending on species) to achieve a sturdy, well balanced, bushy plant.<br />

Feathered Whips shall have no clear stem, shall have a well balanced head with<br />

an upright central leader and evenly branched laterals from the nursery soil<br />

mark upwards.<br />

225 BULBS/ CORMS/ TUBERS<br />

o Condition: Firm, entire, not dried out or shrivelled.<br />

o Health: Free from pests, diseases and fungus.<br />

o Handling: Remove from packaging immediately.<br />

o Storage: Permitted only when necessary.<br />

-Location: Well ventilated, dark, covered, rodent proof container, away from<br />

exhausts and fruit.<br />

-Duration: Minimum period.<br />

-Temperature: 18-21°C.<br />

230 BEDDING PLANTS<br />

o CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS/ TREES<br />

o Growing medium: With adequate nutrients for plants to thrive until permanently<br />

planted.<br />

o Plants: Centred in containers, firmed and well watered.<br />

o Root growth: Substantially filling containers, but not root bound, and in a condition<br />

conducive to successful transplanting.<br />

o Hardiness: Grown in the open for at least two months before being supplied.<br />

o Containers: With holes adequate for drainage when placed on any substrate<br />

commonly used under irrigation systems.<br />

245 LABELLING AND INFORMATION<br />

o General: Provide each plant/ tree or group of plants/ trees of a single species or<br />

cultivar with supplier's labelling for delivery to site, showing:<br />

o Full botanical name.<br />

o Total number.<br />

o Number of bundles.<br />

o Part bundles.<br />

o Supplier's name.<br />

o Employer's name and project reference.<br />

o Plant specification, in accordance with scheduled National Plant Specification<br />

categories.<br />

45


246 LABELLING AND INFORMATION<br />

o Standard: To BS 3936.<br />

250 SUPPLY OF PLANTS/ TREES<br />

o Suppliers: Members of the Horticultural Trades Association Nursery Certification<br />

Scheme.<br />

260 PLANT/ TREE SUBSTITUTION<br />

o Plants/ trees unobtainable or known to be likely to be unobtainable at time of<br />

ordering: Submit alternatives, stating:<br />

o Price.<br />

o Difference from specified plants/ trees.<br />

o Further alternatives: Proposed substitutions may not be acceptable and<br />

submission of further alternatives may be required.<br />

o Approval: Obtain before making any substitution.<br />

265 PLANT/ TREE HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT<br />

o Standard: To HTA ‘Handling and establishing landscape plants’ (obtainable from<br />

the Horticultural Trades Association) Part I, Part II and Part III, paragraphs 1.3.3<br />

to 1.3.6, 3.0, and 4.0.<br />

o Frost: Protect plants/ trees from frost.<br />

o Handling: Handle plants/ trees with care. Protect from mechanical damage and<br />

do not subject to shock, e.g. by dropping from a vehicle.<br />

o Plant packaging: Coextruded polyethylene bags with black interior and white<br />

exterior.<br />

o Packaging of bulk quantities: The supplier may alternatively use pallets or bin<br />

sealed with coextruded polyethylene as above.<br />

270 PLANTING GENERALLY<br />

o Standard: To HTA ‘Handling and establishing landscape plants’ (obtainable from<br />

the Horticultural Trades Association) Part III, paragraphs 6.2 to 6.6.<br />

o Appearance: Plant upright or well balanced with best side to front.<br />

280 TREATMENT OF TREE WOUNDS<br />

o Cutting: Keep wounds as small as possible.<br />

o Cut cleanly back to sound wood using sharp, clean tools.<br />

o Leave branch collars. Do not cut flush with stem or trunk.<br />

o Set cuts so that water will not collect on cut area.<br />

o Fungicide/ Sealant: Do not apply unless instructed.<br />

285 PROTECTION OF EXISTING GRASS<br />

o General: Protect areas affected by planting operations using boards/ tarpaulins.<br />

Do not place excavated or imported materials directly on grass.<br />

46


290 SURPLUS MATERIAL<br />

o General: Remove subsoil, stones, debris, wrapping material, canes, ties,<br />

temporary labelling, prunings and other arisings/ rubbish.<br />

PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS/ PLANTING MATERIALS<br />

300 HERBICIDE<br />

o Locations: All planted areas.<br />

o Type: Suitable for suppressing perennial weed<br />

o Timing: Allow fallow period before cultivation.<br />

o Duration: (minimum): As manufacturers recommendations.<br />

335 GENERAL FERTILIZER<br />

o Locations: All areas to be planted.<br />

o Manufacturer: As approved by CA.<br />

o Product reference: As approved by CA.<br />

o Application: Spread evenly.<br />

o Timing: Immediately before cultivation.<br />

o Coverage: Evenly over all areas to be planted at 30g/sq m.<br />

375 CULTIVATION<br />

o Compacted topsoil: Break up to full depth.<br />

o Cultivation: Loosen, aerate and break up soil into particles of 2-8 mm.<br />

o Depth: Top 350mm of planting beds.<br />

o Timing: Within a few days before planting.<br />

o Weather and ground conditions: Suitably dry.<br />

o Surface: Leave regular and even.<br />

o As required in sections D20 and Q28.<br />

o Levels: Within 50mm of levels specified on drawings.<br />

o Undesirable material brought to the surface: Remove, including weeds, roots,<br />

stones and clods larger than 20 mm in any dimension, tufts of grass and foreign<br />

matter.<br />

o Soil within root spread of trees and shrubs to be retained: Do not dig or<br />

cultivate.<br />

o<br />

385 MULCH MATTING/GEOTEXTILE FABRIC<br />

o Manufacturer: Mypex. Product reference – Mypex Ground Cover – or similar<br />

approved<br />

o Timing: Lay after cultivating and before planting<br />

o Watering: Water soil thoroughly before laying.<br />

o Laying: In close contact with soil surface. Lap or butt joints as recommended<br />

by Manufacturer, with no gaps<br />

47


o Fixing: Laid to slopes overlapping and retained flush with ground level with<br />

suitable galvanised ‘U@ shaped pegs/pins as per manufacturer’s<br />

recommendations.<br />

o Planting: Cut neat slits or flaps. Refit closely around plant stems. Laid on Bed<br />

Nr.19 and Bed Nr.21<br />

o Overlay: Bark mulch as Q31/485<br />

PLANTING SHRUBS/ HERBACEOUS PLANTS/ BULBS<br />

405 SHRUB/ CONTAINER PLANTING<br />

o Preparation: Remove coarse weeds, debris, etc.<br />

o Planting sites: Form level, stepped or gently sloping areas as scheduled and/ or<br />

appropriate to container sizes and shapes.<br />

o Planting: Lower containers/ bags/ bunches gently into place, keeping plants<br />

upright.<br />

o Planting Pits:<br />

Shrubs generally in pre-pared bed sufficient to fit rootball 250 x 250 x 250mm<br />

deep<br />

Feathered whips 400 x 400 x 350mm deep<br />

Specimen conifers 750mm dia x 500mm deep with a special sized extra over pit<br />

for the specimen Monkey puzzle Tree<br />

Woodland whips 350 x 350 x 350mm pit<br />

Specimen shrubs – pit to adequately suit rootball size<br />

Woodland Whips – 250 x 250 x 250mm pit – complete with spiral rabbit guard<br />

o Sloping ground: Maintain horizontal bases and vertical sides with no less than<br />

minimum depth throughout.<br />

o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />

o Pit sides: Scarify.<br />

o Backfilling material: Selected topsoil.<br />

o Timing: Excavate not more than 1 day (maximum) before planting.<br />

420 CLIMBING PLANTS<br />

o Planting: 150 mm clear of supporting structure (e.g. wall/ fence) with roots<br />

spread outward.<br />

- Branches: Lightly secured to supports.<br />

o Climber supports: all climbers to be complete with bamboo cane securely set in<br />

ground at 90º fixed and screwed securely to retaining wall.<br />

- Centres: 1.5 c/s or as stated on the drawings<br />

48


- Distance from wall: 300mm approx<br />

435 CLIMBING PLANTS USED AS GROUND COVER<br />

o Planting: Canes or other supports: Remove<br />

o Arrangement: Spread Stems<br />

o Fixing: Pinned to ground to ensure good contact<br />

445 PLANTING BULBS/ CORMS/ TUBERS<br />

o Depth: Top of bulb/ corm/ tuber at a depth of approximately twice its height, base<br />

in contact<br />

with bottom of hole.<br />

o Backfilling: Finely broken soil. Lightly firm to existing ground level.<br />

o Naturalized planting in existing grassed areas:<br />

-Scattering: Random. Plant bulbs/ corms/ tubers where they fall.<br />

- Planting: Neatly remove a plug of turf and replace after planting.<br />

470 SHRUB AND TREE PLANTING TO GRAVEL AREAS<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Rake back gravel and puncture liner<br />

Plant shrubs and reform liner around stem of plant<br />

Rake back gravel neatly around plant, firm and heel back gravel<br />

471 NATURALIZED HEDGES / INSTANT HEDGE BETWEEN <strong>SECTION</strong> 1& 2 AT<br />

END OF CHAPEL GARDEN<br />

o Shrubs for hedges: Consistent in species, cultivar and clone to ensure a uniform<br />

hedge.<br />

o Planting: In trenches large enough to take full spread of roots. Set out plants<br />

evenly as per planting plan. Allow for 3 cuts per year to promote good<br />

shape, or as stated in the BOQ. Remove clippings.<br />

472 FORMAL HEDGES TO CHAPEL GARDENS AND OAK LEAF HEDGE<br />

MOTIFS ON UPPER RETAINING WALL IN <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />

o Shrubs for hedges: Consistent in species, cultivar and clone to ensure a uniform<br />

hedge.<br />

o Planting: In trenches large enough to take full spread of roots. Set out plants<br />

evenly as per planting plan. Allow for 6 cuts per year to promote good<br />

shape, or as stated in the BOQ. Remove clippings.<br />

475 BACKFILLING MATERIAL<br />

o Composition: Previously prepared mixture of topsoil excavated from pit and<br />

additional topsoil as required.<br />

49


480 AFTER PLANTING<br />

o Watering: Immediately after planting, thoroughly and without damaging or<br />

displacing plants or soil.<br />

o Firming: Lightly firm soil around plants and fork and/ or rake soil, without<br />

damaging roots, to a fine tilth with gentle cambers and no hollows.<br />

o Top dressing: Apply top dressing of ‘Osmocote’ slow release fertilizer evenly<br />

over all shrub areas at 60g/sq m. .<br />

485 MULCHING PLANTING BEDS<br />

o Material: Bark Mulch.<br />

o Purity: Free of pests, disease, fungus and weeds.<br />

o Coverage: To all shrub beds shown on the drawings<br />

o Finished level of mulch: 75mm deep min.<br />

PLANTING TREES<br />

500 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES (WITHOUT BORDERLINE STEEL<br />

EDGING)<br />

o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised specimen Trees: At least 500m<br />

wider and deeper than the diameter of the rootball (approx.1.8m diameter by<br />

1.4m deep ). Allow for all excavations<br />

o Planted as per detail Drawing Nr.83473-04 to include 0.8m² prime quality<br />

Topsoil<br />

o Accessories: Arborguy strapped large anchor system (Q31/ 540) and Rainroot<br />

Urban Irrigation system (Product Reference: RRURB2A); Roof Rain Urban,<br />

pipe diameter 1530mm, length 5m; 60mm diameter irrigation system with 80mm<br />

diameter fixed plastic grid inlet.<br />

o To be fitted 300mm below final ground level as per manufacturers recommended<br />

installation instructions. As supplied by Greenleaf Ireland (Ivy House, 24a<br />

Church Road, Londonderry, BT47 3QQ, Tel: 028 7134 5620) or similar<br />

approved.<br />

501 SPECIMEN/ SEMI MATURE TREES (WITH BORDERLINE STEEL EDGING)<br />

o Trees planted in Pits with irrigation system and underground guying system as<br />

above Q31/500<br />

o Planted as per detail Drawing Nr.83473-04 to include 0.8m² prime quality<br />

Topsoil<br />

o Accessories: Accessories: Borderline Steel edge ring (Q10/120); As supplied<br />

by Greenleaf Ireland (Ivy House, 24a Church Road, Londonderry, BT47 3QQ,<br />

Tel: 028 7134 5620) or similar approved. Include screened Topsoil 0.3m³<br />

approx to be spread in conical form, from the steel edge up to the tree, tamped<br />

and firmed down, left suitable for planting with bedding plants<br />

50


502 PLEACHED TREES<br />

o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />

deeper than the diameter of the rootball (approx.1.8m diameter by 1.4m deep ).<br />

Planted in Pits with irrigation system as previously described Q31/500<br />

o Allow for all excavations<br />

o Planted with sawn treated softwood stake, 2Nr 75mm dia, 1800mm long and<br />

38mm d-rail cross member, including ties, straps and spacers to good<br />

horticultural standard<br />

o Planted with crown arranged through supporting straining wires on site.<br />

o Fix branches with elasticated ties to support wires<br />

o Complete with post and wire frame as shown on Drawing 83473-04<br />

o Species as per BOQ<br />

o<br />

503 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES WITH DOUBLE STAKES<br />

o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />

deeper than the diameter of the rootball (approx.1.8m diameter by 1.4m deep).<br />

Allow for all excavations<br />

o Planted with 2Nr 75mm dia, 1800mm long, double stake and 38mm d-rail cross<br />

member, including ties, straps and spacers to good horticultural standard.<br />

o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />

o<br />

504 EXTRA HEAVY STANDARD TREES WITH UNDERGROUND GUYING<br />

SYSTEM<br />

o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />

deeper than the diameter of the rootball (approx.1.8m diameter by 1.4m deep ).<br />

Planted in Pits with irrigation system as previously described Q31/500<br />

o Allow for all excavations<br />

o planted with underground guying system Q31/ 540<br />

o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />

o<br />

505 STANDARD TREES<br />

o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />

deeper than the diameter of the rootball. Allow for all excavations<br />

o Planted with 2Nr 75mm dia, 1800mm long, double stake and 38mm d-rail cross<br />

member, including ties, straps and spacers to good horticultural standard.<br />

o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />

o<br />

507 SPECIMEN ROOTBALLED YEWS<br />

o Tree Pit Sizes For Rootballed/ Containerised Trees: At least 500m wider and<br />

deeper than the diameter of the rootball. Allow for all excavations<br />

o Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm.<br />

To be planted with 45º angled stake, 1800mm x75mm dia laid @ 45° to the<br />

51


horizontal<br />

535 STAKING GENERALLY<br />

o Stakes: Softwood, peeled chestnut, larch or oak, straight, free from projections<br />

and large or edge knots and with pointed lower end.<br />

o Preservative treatment: To be approved.<br />

o Nails: To BS 1202-1, galvanized, minimum 25 mm long and with 10 mm<br />

diameter heads.<br />

o Minimum stake sizes:<br />

Tree Overall length Cross section<br />

size/type: of stake: of stake:<br />

All Trees 1800mm 75mm dia (2 Nr. per tree+<br />

38mm d-rail cross brace)<br />

Feathered whips 900mm 50 x 50mm<br />

Specimen conifers 1800mm 75mm dia laid @ 45° to<br />

the horizontal<br />

o including ties, straps and spacers to good horticultural standard.<br />

540 UNDERGROUND GUYING OF SPECIMEN TREES<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Secure trees with Arborguy anchorage system or similar approved, as supplied<br />

by Greenleaf Ireland (Ivy House, 24a Church Road, Londonderry, BT47 3QQ, T:<br />

+44 (0)28 7134 56820, E: sales@greenleafireland.com) in accordance with<br />

manufacturer’s instructions.<br />

Product Code SASLP - Strapped large anchor system with drive in heavy-duty<br />

composite anchors. Includes webbing strap and ratchet tensioner. Suitable for<br />

trees up to 40cm girth.<br />

550 TREE STAKES (FEATHERED TREES ONLY)<br />

o<br />

Shall be straight poles of sweet chestnut, oak or peeled larch. They shall be fully<br />

tanalised and shall be to the following length and minimum butt diameter:<br />

feathered trees 1250 mm long X 75mm diameter<br />

560 Tree Ties<br />

o<br />

Shall be ‘nail on type’, with rubber block consisting of a rubber-based strap,<br />

3mm wide for advanced Nursery Stock Trees and conifers, and 25 mm wide for<br />

52


Feathered Trees.<br />

585 BACKFILLING MATERIAL<br />

o Composition: Previously prepared mixture of topsoil excavated from pit and<br />

additional topsoil as required.<br />

PROTECTING/ MAINTAINING/ MAKING GOOD DEFECTS<br />

710 MAINTENANCE<br />

o Duration: Carry out the operations in the following clauses from completion of<br />

planting for a period of 12 months after practical completion has been achieved<br />

or as instructed by the CA. This period will run concurrently with the Defects<br />

Liability Period for the planting works.<br />

o Frequency of maintenance visits: Monthly during growing season.<br />

720 FAILURES OF PLANTING<br />

o General: Plants/ trees/ shrubs that have failed to thrive (unless due to theft or<br />

malicious damage after completion) during period stated in clause 710, will be<br />

regarded as defects due to materials or workmanship not in accordance with the<br />

Contract. Replace with equivalent plants/ trees/ shrubs.<br />

o Replacements: To match size of adjacent or nearby plants of same species or<br />

match original specification, whichever is the greater.<br />

o Timing of making good: Within 12 months of practical completion.<br />

740 CLEANLINESS<br />

o Soil and arisings: Remove from hard surfaces and grassed areas.<br />

o General: Leave the works in a clean tidy condition at Completion and after any<br />

maintenance operations.<br />

750 750 PLANTING MAINTENANCE GENERALLY (Shrubs, Trees and<br />

Pleached Trees)<br />

o Weed control: Maintain weed free area around each tree and shrub, minimum<br />

diameter the larger of 1 m or the surface of original planting pit.<br />

o Keep planting beds clear of weeds, by use of suitable and approved herbicides.<br />

o Planted areas: Fork over beds as necessary to keep soil loose, with gentle<br />

cambers and no hollows. Take care not to reduce depth or effect of mulch.<br />

o Precautions: Ensure that trees and shrubs are not damaged by use of mowers,<br />

nylon filament rotary cutters and similar powered tools.<br />

o Staking: Check condition of stakes, ties, guys and guards. Replace broken or<br />

53


o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

missing items. Adjust if necessary to allow for growth and prevent rubbing of<br />

bark. Cut back any damaged bark. Tie loose climbers back to support.<br />

Frequency of checks: Monthly.<br />

Firming up: Gently firm loosened soil around trees/ shrubs. Straighten leaning<br />

trees/ shrubs.<br />

Trees: Spray crown when in leaf during warm weather. Carry out in the evening.<br />

Check elasticated tie-fixings of pleached Trees<br />

760 PLANTING MAINTENANCE – PRUNING<br />

o<br />

o<br />

General: Prune at appropriate times, to remove dead or dying and diseased<br />

wood and suckers, to promote healthy growth and natural shape.<br />

Prune trees to favour a single central leading shoot.<br />

765 PLANTING MAINTENANCE – WATERING<br />

o<br />

General: As clauses 145 and 150, using a fine rose pr sprinkler until full depth of<br />

topsoil is saturated.<br />

770 WOODLAND PLANTING MAINTENANCE<br />

Watering: Only as necessary to prevent plants wilting.<br />

Loose plants: Refirm surrounding soil, without compacting.<br />

diameter area<br />

Weed control: Cut down and remove weeds prior to setting seed in a 1 m<br />

around each tree.<br />

Vegetation except trees and coppice shoots to be retained: Cut within the<br />

plantation area.<br />

- Arisings: Leave<br />

proposals.<br />

Mechanical, chemical or mulching methods of vegetation control: Submit<br />

790 FINAL MULCHING<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Timing: At end of maintenance period<br />

Watering: Ensure that soil is thoroughly moistened prior to remulching,<br />

applying water where necessary.<br />

All planting beds including Mypex matting: Remulch. Depth (Min.) 50mm<br />

54


Q40<br />

FENCING<br />

125 1100 MM HIGH MILD STEEL ESTATE RAILING<br />

o Manufacturer: To be confirmed/manufactured by Main Contractor<br />

o Drawing References: 83473 - 01, 02, 03, 04 & 05<br />

o Railing Height above ground level:1100mm<br />

o Material: Galvanised Mild Steel. All materials to be polyester powder coated<br />

Colour Black RAL 9005.<br />

o Posts: 50 x10mm thick x 1530mm long solid galvanised mild steel posts<br />

complete with rounded top and welded base plate 50 x 100 x 10mm thick. Posts<br />

pre-drilled to accommodate 5 Nr. 20mm diameter solid horizontal bars. Posts<br />

set in 300 x 300 x 560mm deep mass concrete surround. Posts at 1.0m centres.<br />

o Straining posts: Posts as above, but complete with a 5 Nr double sets of<br />

circular receiving lugs welded to each post to receive 5 Nr 20mm diameter<br />

horizontals each side. Posts set in an additional concrete foundation of 450 x<br />

450 x 560mm deep mass concrete surround. Posts at 4.0m centres.<br />

o End Posts: As above with only 5 Nr single circular receiving lugs as shown on<br />

the drawings<br />

o Horizontal Rails: 5 Nr 20 mm diameter solid galvanised mild steel rails.<br />

o Method of setting posts: In concrete as described above and as shown on the<br />

drawings<br />

o Other requirements: No sharp edges on either posts or rails. Rails to be parallel<br />

to ground level and not stepped. Allow for all radii and curves on site.<br />

o Special – top rail and fixing to Pillar Type 3 to balance Oak Leaf gates at Chapel<br />

Garden – See Detail Sheet 2 83473 – 05<br />

o Special – special Section of 1100mm high estate railing to corner of<br />

Chapel – See Detail on Drawing Nr 83473 – 03.<br />

o Allow for all site measurements and forming rake with rising ground, and all<br />

excavations and foundations and supports as shoen on the drawings<br />

250 1450 MM HIGH MILD STEEL SAFETY ESTATE RAILING<br />

o Manufacturer: To be confirmed/manufactured by Main Contractor<br />

o Drawing References: 83473 - 01, 02, 03, 04 & 05<br />

o Railing Height above ground level: 1400 mm (although with a 50mm curved top<br />

to each post makes the overall height 1450mm)<br />

o Material: Galvanised Mild Steel. All materials to be polyester powder coated<br />

Colour Black RAL 9005.<br />

o Posts: 60 x10mm thick at top reaching 125 x 10mm thick at the base 1900mm<br />

long approximately – as shown on the drawings, solid galvanised mild steel<br />

posts complete with rounded top and welded base plate 50 x 200 x 10mm thick<br />

to key into concrete foundation. Posts pre-drilled to accommodate 6 Nr. 20mm<br />

diameter solid horizontal bars. Posts set in 450 x 450 x 610mm deep mass<br />

concrete surround (although there will be an element of Contractor Designed<br />

55


o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

solution for the foundations of posts linked to the Contractor Designed Retaining<br />

Walls. Posts at 1.0m centres.<br />

Straining posts: Posts as above, but complete with a 6 Nr double sets of<br />

circular receiving lugs welded to each post to receive 6 Nr 20mm diameter<br />

horizontals each side. Straining Posts set in an additional concrete foundation of<br />

550 x 550 x 610 mm deep mass concrete surround. Posts at 4.0m centres.<br />

End Posts: As above with only 6 Nr single circular receiving lugs as shown on<br />

the drawings<br />

Horizontal Rails: 6 Nr 20 mm diameter solid galvanised mild steel rails.<br />

Method of setting posts: In concrete as described above and as shown on the<br />

drawings or as Contractor Designed i.e. set in concrete pipe work set in<br />

concrete as the retaining wall is constructed to accommodate posts after site<br />

measurements.<br />

Other requirements: No sharp edges on either posts or rails. Rails to be parallel<br />

to ground level and not stepped. Allow for all radii and curves on site.<br />

300 OAK LEAFED DOUBLE GATES<br />

o 2.05m high x 3.2m wide mild steel Double Gates<br />

o Manufacturer: To be approved<br />

o Drawing Reference: 83473-05<br />

o Size: 2.05m high x 3.0m wide clear opening.<br />

o Vertical Bars: 16 x 16mm square vertical bars at 100mm spacing (116mm<br />

centres); bottom section of gate to have intermediate vertical bars at100mm<br />

spacing (116mm centres); all vertical bars to be welded to horizontal members<br />

at all points.<br />

o Gate Frame: 50 x 50mm solid bars adjacent to gate posts with rounded profile<br />

at hinge point and at bottom to bear down on 50mm diameter stainless steel ball<br />

bearing; 50 x 12mm flat bar framing top, bottom and opening side. Top member<br />

to be bowed as indicated. Two horizontal members, each 25mm diameter,<br />

spaced 100mm apart as indicated. Hinge point and gate pivot arrangements to<br />

be as indicated.<br />

o Posts: 100 x 100 x 4 x 2750mm long RHS mild steel gate post c/w capping<br />

piece and 200 x 200 x 6mm base plate; posts to have a 150 x 75 x 10mm thick<br />

m.s. plate welded to accommodate strap hinge arrangement and detail as<br />

indicated.<br />

o Method of setting posts: Base plate bolted to pier foundation using M8<br />

expanding bolts in 4 Nr. positions.<br />

o Finish: Galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461:1999 and polyester powder coated to<br />

BS6497. Colour Black RAL: 9005.<br />

o Special Oak leaf motifs to top of each folding gate to be Oak Leaf shaped solid<br />

6mm galvanised plate welded to frame at each Oak Leaf touching frame. To be<br />

primed and painted with haemarite exterior paint 2Nr finished coats ‘Gold’.<br />

Colour to be agreed with colour chart to CA prior to painting<br />

56


o Other requirements: Gates to be provided with hot forged mild steel finials at top<br />

and mid point as indicated; 1 Nr. slam plate at top of 1 Nr. leaf; 1 Nr. lockable<br />

barrel bolt - 200mm long, 12mm diameter, 2 Nr. M.S. 450mm long x 16mm<br />

diameter drop bolts; 4 Nr. drop bolt holders, 2 Nr. for closed position and 2 Nr.<br />

for open position; Gate to be supplied complete with an approved Heavy Duty<br />

“Abus” padlock and three keys [all gate padlocks to be operated with the same<br />

key]. All mild steel – gates, fixings and fittings to be hot dipped galvanised and<br />

polyester powder coated, Colour Black RAL: 9005.<br />

o Conformity: Submit manufacturer's and installer's certificates, to BS 1722-12,<br />

clause 9.<br />

610 INSTALLATION<br />

o<br />

Set out and erect:<br />

- In straight lines or smoothly flowing curves as shown on drawings.<br />

- With tops of posts following profile of the ground.<br />

- With posts set rigid, plumb and to specified depth, or greater where<br />

necessary to ensure adequate support.<br />

- With correct fasteners and all components securely fixed.<br />

620 SETTING POSTS IN CONCRETE<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Mix: To BS 8500-1 and -2 and BS EN 206-1, Designated mix not less than<br />

GEN1 or Standard mix not less than ST2.<br />

Alternative mix for small quantities: 50 kg Portland cement to 150 kg fine<br />

aggregate to 250 kg 20 mm nominal maximum size coarse aggregate, medium<br />

workability.<br />

Admixtures: Do not use.<br />

Holes: Excavate neatly and with vertical sides.<br />

Filling: Position post/ strut and fill hole with concrete to not less than the<br />

specified depth, well rammed as filling proceeds and consolidated.<br />

Backfilling of holes not completely filled with concrete: Excavated material, well<br />

rammed and consolidated.<br />

Foundations and builders work all to be included as shown on drawing Nrs<br />

83473-04 + 05<br />

630 EXPOSED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

No concrete to be exposed on surface of ground.<br />

Filling: Compact until air bubbles cease to appear on the upper surface.<br />

Finishing: Weathered to shed water and trowelled smooth.<br />

680 DAMAGE TO GALVANIZED SURFACES<br />

57


o<br />

Treatment of minor damage (including on fasteners and fittings): Low melting<br />

point zinc alloy repair rods or powders made for this purpose, or at least two<br />

coats of zinc-rich paint to BS 4652.<br />

o<br />

Thickness: Apply sufficient material to provide a zinc coating at least equal in<br />

thickness to the original layer.<br />

Q50<br />

SITE/ STREET FURNITURE/ EQUIPMENT<br />

200 SEATS (HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL – POLYESTER POWDER COAT<br />

FINISHED)<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Manufacturer: Ollerton (Supplied by Marshalls Street Furniture)<br />

Product reference: Festival Straight Seat with Steel Slats and Armrests each<br />

end<br />

or other equal and approved<br />

As supplied by MB Civils, 4 Balmoral Road, Belfast, BT12 6QA;<br />

Tel: 028 90551390 Contact: Justin Reid – justin.reid@mbcivils.com<br />

Material: mild steel galvanised and polyester powder coated Black<br />

Finish: ’Polyester powder coated. Coated parts are to be fully cured to coating<br />

manufacturer’s specifications. The thickness of the finish coat is to average 8-10<br />

mils (200-250 microns).<br />

Colour: RAL 9005 Black<br />

Size: 1800mm long.<br />

Seat Height: 480mm<br />

Fixing Method: Ground fixed ( below ground level set seat root fixings in 450 x<br />

450 x 500mm deep Mix C30 Concrete surround prior to paving over strictly in<br />

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations<br />

Accessories: 1 pair of armrests, one each either end of seat, material and finish<br />

to match seat body.<br />

210 LITTER BINS (HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL – POLYESTER POWDER<br />

COAT FINISHED)<br />

o Manufacturer: Ollerton (Supplied by Marshalls Street Furniture)<br />

o Product reference: Festival Flared Top 110 Litre Capacity or other equal and<br />

approved Complete with galvanised mild steel liner.<br />

o As supplied by MB Civils, 4 Balmoral Road, Belfast, BT12 6QA; Tel: 028<br />

90551390 Contact: Justin Reid – justin.reid@mbcivils.com<br />

o Material: mild steel galvanised and polyester powder coated Black<br />

o Finish: ’Polyester powder coated. Coated parts are to be fully cured to coating<br />

58


manufacturer’s specifications. The thickness of the finish coat is to average 8-10<br />

mils (200-250 microns).<br />

o Colour: RAL 9005 Black<br />

o Size: 610 mm diameter<br />

o Bin Height (without lid): 850mm<br />

o Fixing Method: Surface Mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />

recommendations<br />

o Accessories: side Loading Lockable Lid, colour Black RAL 9005<br />

220 WASTE BASKETS FOR SETING AROUND CEMETERY – <strong>SECTION</strong> 1<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Wire Bin/Baskets for placing of dead flowers etc by members of the public<br />

Wire compost bin made from galvanised mild steel, powder coated colour Black<br />

RAL 9005<br />

Size: 75cm x 75cm x 100cm high with 3mm dia. Galv MS welded mesh.<br />

To include mesh bottom ( no lid required) and 2 folding handles for lifting at<br />

short ends<br />

Mesh to be min 30 x 30mm<br />

No sharp edges after the galvanising process<br />

260 PLANTERS TO CHAPEL GARDEN<br />

o Manufacturer: Ollerton (Supplied by Marshalls Street Furniture)<br />

o Product reference: Festival Planter, circular flared top, Circular Rolled Top<br />

620mm high x 650mm o/d Part No. PL106<br />

o As supplied by MB Civils, 4 Balmoral Road, Belfast, BT12 6QA; Tel: 028<br />

90551390 Contact: Justin Reid – justin.reid@mbcivils.com<br />

o Material: mild steel, galvanised and polyester powder coated Black<br />

o Finish: ’Polyester powder coated. Coated parts are to be fully cured to coating<br />

manufacturer’s specifications. The thickness of the finish coat is to average 8-10<br />

mils (200-250 microns).<br />

o Colour: RAL 9005 Black<br />

o Size: 650mm diameter<br />

o Height: 620mm high<br />

o Fixing Method: Surface Mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />

recommendations<br />

270 CAST STONE STATUES – SUMMER – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />

House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />

770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />

Product Reference: THE FOUR SEASONS/ Statue SUMMER - HE755<br />

59


o The Summer Statue of the “Four Seasons” set of cast stone statues is to be<br />

fitted in central circle in chapel garden as shown on the drawings. Summer is to<br />

be related to the west position. The colour of the statue of Summer is to be<br />

Portland/ Sandstone<br />

o To be fitted on 910cm high pedestal on Concrete Base.<br />

o Height: 1430mm<br />

o Weight: 140 kg<br />

o Max. base width:360mm<br />

o Pedestal: 485 x 485 x 915mm high (B265 36" QUEEN ANNE<br />

PEDESTAL)<br />

o Erection:<br />

The cast stone statue should be erected on a suitable foundation - Mass concrete<br />

Foundation, C30mix, with steel A393 reinforcement mesh to be designed to suit loadings<br />

and ground conditions (min 670 x670 x450mm deep, set 70mm below finished Ground<br />

Level). To include a suitable steel starter bar set into a concrete foundation. The statue<br />

pedestal is then bedded on 1:1:6 cement/lime/sand mortar. All joints would normally be<br />

6mm (1/4”) with the mortar slightly recessed from the surface of the stonework to allow<br />

for pointing after the cast stone statue is erected. It is important that polystyrene (or<br />

similar) is used to act as an isolating medium between the stonework and infill concrete.<br />

This is inserted into the core of the statue pedestal. Care should be taken to ensure<br />

sufficient overlap at both vertical and horizontal joints with continuous contact between<br />

the isolating material and the inner stonework core.<br />

All subsequent concrete pours should only take place after the concrete in the preceding<br />

section has reached its initial set. The core is then partly in filled with concrete (C30mix)<br />

before the isolating material is trimmed flush. Continue concrete infill until level with top of<br />

pedestal.<br />

The joint around the structural core between the pedestal and the statue above should be<br />

formed using compressible filler or a weak mortar mix, to form a 6mm (1/4”) soft joint.<br />

This ensures that any loading is carried by the central structural core and not by the<br />

stonework.<br />

The isolating/expansion material is trimmed and the concrete toweled so that both are<br />

flush. Insert 10mm stainless steel dowel 150mm long minimum into top of concrete, to<br />

protrude by 50mm. Only proceed once concrete has reached its initial set. Bed the statue<br />

on a continuous mortar bed onto the pedestal with the dowels resin fixed.<br />

Allow for sufficient amount of concrete infill during set up (0.1m³approx).<br />

280 CAST STONE STATUES – SPRING – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

60


o Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />

House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />

770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />

o Product Reference: THE FOUR SEASONS/ Statue Spring - HE750<br />

o The Spring Statue of the “Four Seasons” set of cast stone statues is to be fitted<br />

in central circle in chapel garden as shown on the drawings. Spring is to be<br />

related to the east position. The colour of the statue of Spring is to be Portland/<br />

Sandstone<br />

o To be fitted on 910cm high pedestal on Concrete Base.<br />

o Height: 1430mm<br />

o Weight: 140 kg<br />

o Max. base width:360mm<br />

o Pedestal: 485 x 485 x 915mm high (B265 36" QUEEN ANNE<br />

PEDESTAL)<br />

o Erection as previously described<br />

290 CAST STONE STATUES – WINTER – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

o Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />

House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />

770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />

o Product Reference: THE FOUR SEASONS/ Statue Winter - HE765<br />

o The Winter Statue of the “Four Seasons” set of cast stone statues is to be fitted<br />

in central circle in chapel garden as shown on the drawings. Winter is to be<br />

related to the north position. The colour of the statue of Spring is to be Portland/<br />

Sandstone .<br />

o To be fitted on 685cm high pedestal on Concrete Base.<br />

o Height: 1430mm<br />

o Weight: 140 kg<br />

o Max. base width: 360mm<br />

o Pedestal: 485 x 485 x 685mm high (B255 27" QUEEN ANNE<br />

PEDESTAL)<br />

o Erection as previously described<br />

300 CAST STONE STATUES – AUTUMN – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />

House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />

770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />

Product Reference: THE FOUR SEASONS/ Statue Autumn - HE760<br />

The Autumn Statue of the “Four Seasons” set of cast stone statues is to be<br />

fitted in central circle in chapel garden as shown on the drawings. Autumn is to<br />

be related to the south position. The colour of the statue of Spring is to be<br />

Portland/ Sandstone .<br />

61


o To be fitted on 685cm high pedestal on Concrete Base.<br />

o Height: 1430mm<br />

o Weight: 140 kg<br />

o Max. base width:360mm<br />

o Pedestal: 485 x 485 x 685mm high (B255 27" QUEEN ANNE<br />

PEDESTAL)<br />

o Erection as previously described<br />

310 OBELISK – DRAWING NR 83473- 05<br />

o Manufacturer: Haddonstone (as supplied by Haddonstone Limited, The Forge<br />

House, East Haddon, Northampton, NN6 8DB, England;Telephone: 01604<br />

770711 Fax: 01604 770027 e-mail:info@haddonstone.co.uk)<br />

o Product Reference: Obelisk E550<br />

o The Obelisk will be used as a focal point at the end of path in Chapel garden as<br />

shown on the drawing. The colour of the Georgian style Obelisk is to be<br />

Portland/ Sandstone.<br />

o To be fitted on Concrete Base.<br />

o Weight: 656 kg<br />

o Width of base: 700mm<br />

o Height overall: 2672mm<br />

o Erection as previously described. The Obelisk should be erected on a suitable<br />

foundation - Mass concrete Foundation, C30mix with steel A393 reinforcement<br />

mesh to be designed to suit loadings and ground conditions (min<br />

1200x1200x500mm deep, set 70mm below finished Ground Level). To include a<br />

suitable steel bar set into a concrete foundation.<br />

400 PLEACHED TREE POST AND WIRE FRAME – DRAWING NR 83473- 04<br />

Standard: To BS 1722-2<br />

Wire: 5 Nr 3.15mm diameter galvanised high tensile line wires<br />

Posts and struts: see drawing Nr 83473-04 Overall length 8.5m long approx<br />

Straining posts: in straight runs and at all ends, corners, changes of direction and acute<br />

variations in level.<br />

Intermediate posts: 3.5 m.<br />

Method of setting posts and struts:<br />

Intermediate posts: 2Nr<br />

62


Setting posts in concrete Standard: To BS 8500-2.<br />

Mix: C30<br />

Alternative mix for small quantities: 50 kg Portland cement to 150 kg fine aggregate to<br />

250<br />

kg 20 mm nominal maximum size coarse aggregate, medium workability.<br />

Admixtures: Do not use.<br />

Holes: Excavate neatly and with vertical sides.<br />

Filling: Position post/ strut and fill hole with concrete to not less than the specified depth,<br />

well rammed as filling proceeds and consolidated.<br />

Backfilling of holes not completely filled with concrete: Excavated material, well rammed<br />

and consolidated.<br />

Substitute Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />

Clause No<br />

Title and rewritten text<br />

63


1800SR<br />

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />

1 DEFINITION OF TERMS IN THIS CLAUSE<br />

The ‘Engineer’ shall mean the Project Manager<br />

The ‘Steelwork Sub-Contractor’ shall mean the Firm appointed by<br />

the Main Contractor on a domestic sub-contract basis to supply,<br />

fabricate, deliver and erect the Structural Steelwork as indicatively<br />

shown on the Contract Drawings and as described in this<br />

Specification. Firm must be a member of the British<br />

Constructional Steelwork Association, or an equal and<br />

approved quality scheme.<br />

The ‘Main Contractor’ shall mean the firm appointed to by the<br />

Employer to carry out the building work under the Main Contract.<br />

The ‘Employer’ shall mean <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong><br />

The ‘Architect’ will be <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong><br />

The Quantity Surveyor will be Doran Consulting<br />

2 DESCRIPTION OF THE STEELWORK<br />

The Steelwork Domestic Sub-contract includes the supply,<br />

fabrication, delivery to the site and erection complete of the<br />

structural framework as indicatively shown on the Contract<br />

Drawings and described in this Specification. The Steelwork is to be<br />

erected on concrete foundations prepared by the Main Contractor.<br />

3 ADVICE NOTES<br />

Immediately on the despatch of any steelwork to the site, advice<br />

notes shall be sent to the Engineer.<br />

4 BRITISH AND EUROPEAN STANDARDS<br />

Where British and European Standards are referred to in the<br />

Specification the references shall be taken as referring to the latest<br />

editions of any such British or European Standards including all<br />

amendments and additions issued up to 42 days prior to the date of<br />

the Specification. The initials BS shall be taken to mean British<br />

64


Standard, EN shall be taken to mean European Standard, and the<br />

initials BS EN shall be taken to mean European Standard adopted<br />

as a British Standard.<br />

5 STEELWORK DESIGN, DRAWINGS & PROGRAMME<br />

The Structural Steelwork has been designed by the Engineer in<br />

accordance with BS 5950: Part 1, Specification for "The use of<br />

steelwork in building".<br />

The Engineer will supply to the Steelwork Sub-Contractor drawings<br />

giving sizes of the principal members and showing member forces<br />

and reactions in kilonewtons as well as any bending moments<br />

which have to be taken up in the "fixed joints" of the structure<br />

expressed in kilonewton metres. From this information the<br />

Steelwork Sub-Contractor will be required to prepare his own shop<br />

details in accordance with BS 5950: Part 2 and Appendix 2 of this<br />

Specification. These drawings are to be supplied in duplicate to the<br />

Engineer, Architect and Quantity Surveyor for comment before<br />

fabrication. Should these shop details in the opinion of the Engineer<br />

or Architect be insufficient, or unsatisfactory, the Engineer or<br />

Architect will require fresh details to be submitted as below.<br />

(The shop drawings shall indicate the location and type of<br />

temporary guys and bracings proposed for use during erection of<br />

the steelwork).<br />

On receiving Engineer or Architect comments in writing on such<br />

detail drawings, a further copy of the revised drawings are to be<br />

submitted to the Engineer and Architect. One further copy shall be<br />

sent to the Clerk of Works on the Site.<br />

On his appointment the Main Contractor and his Steelwork Sub-<br />

Contractor shall produce a programme for the production of<br />

workshop and erection drawings and drawings of temporary and<br />

other works. The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall, after consultation<br />

with the Engineer and Architect, be required to agree a programme<br />

and a final date for the submission and checking of drawings. No<br />

work is to be put in hand until the Engineer or Architect’s comments<br />

have been obtained and the Main Contractor's and Steelwork Sub-<br />

Contractor’s programme shall make suitable allowance for checking<br />

procedures including the re-submission of amended drawings<br />

following comments by the Engineer.<br />

65


6 DIMENSIONS<br />

The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor will be required<br />

to take all working dimensions and other necessary particulars from<br />

drawings, site measurements and information supplied by the<br />

Engineer, or Architect.<br />

7 CORRECTNESS OF DIMENSIONS etc<br />

The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor will be held<br />

responsible for the correctness of dimensions and details, fitting and<br />

workmanship and for the strength of all connections,<br />

notwithstanding the checks carried out by the Engineer on the<br />

detailed drawings, and for all parts of the various structures coming<br />

together correctly for assembling in position.<br />

In the event of any connection being found unsatisfactory before or<br />

after erection, or errors arising in fabrication, the Main Contractor<br />

and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Engineer their<br />

proposals as to the method to be adopted in making good. The<br />

Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall abide by the<br />

Engineer's decision and in the event of replacements or site<br />

modification of steelwork being required the Main Contractor shall<br />

be responsible for all costs and testing charges involved.<br />

Sufficient tolerance shall be provided in connections or parts of the<br />

structure to ensure that the steelwork can be erected, within the<br />

limits specified, to the overall building dimensions.<br />

8 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT FOR ERECTION<br />

The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall provide all<br />

plant, tools, tackle, scaffolding, shoring, service bolts and other<br />

accessories, steel packing and wedges which are required for the<br />

satisfactory erection and completion of the steelwork.<br />

9 ERECTION<br />

The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall obtain the<br />

permission of the Engineer to start erecting steel on site. Before<br />

starting however the Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor<br />

shall check the foundations for line and level, and the holding-down<br />

bolts for position, protruding length, condition and slackness.<br />

66


The steel is to be supplied to the site by the Steelwork Sub-<br />

Contractor and he is to erect and hoist it into position and bolt up all<br />

members.<br />

The erection of the steelwork for the structural frame shall be<br />

planned and carried out by the Steelwork Sub-Contractor so as to<br />

ensure safe working conditions at all times. The recommendations<br />

of BS 5531 : "Code of practice for safety in erecting structural<br />

frames" shall be followed.<br />

Thermal cutting equipment shall not be allowed on site except with<br />

the prior written approval of the Contract Engineer.<br />

Welding equipment shall not be used on site unless approved in<br />

writing by the Engineer.<br />

Tolerances for erected steelwork shall be to BS 5950: Part 2.<br />

10 ERECTION PRECAUTIONS<br />

The method of transport, handling and erection of materials shall be<br />

to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in accordance with the<br />

drawings, or as directed. These operations shall be carried out in<br />

such a manner as will not injure, overstress or disfigure any part of<br />

the structure. Any member injured, overstressed or disfigured shall<br />

be replaced or rectified as directed by the Engineer. Site joints and<br />

connections shall not be finally bolted up until sufficient of the<br />

structure is properly plumbed levelled and aligned, and no straining<br />

into position will be allowed subsequently.<br />

All High Strength Friction Grip Bolts including "Tension Control<br />

Bolts" shall be in accordance with BS 4395 and shall be handled<br />

and fitted in accordance with BS 4604 "Specification for the Use of<br />

High Strength Friction Grip Bolts in Structural Steelwork".<br />

On receipt of written approval from the Engineer a calibrated<br />

tightening device may be used for tightening bolts, in conformity<br />

with the "torque control" method for normal HSFG bolts, and in<br />

conformity with the manufacturers recommended method for TC<br />

Bolts. The equipment shall be calibrated regularly while in use and<br />

adjusted to maintain a shank tension 10% higher than the minimum<br />

values tabulated in Table 3 of BS 4604 : Part 1.Load indicating<br />

washers shall be used on all HSFG Bolts. The position of the load<br />

67


indicating washer on the bolt, and the method of tightening and<br />

measurement, shall be strictly in accordance with the<br />

manufacturer's recommendations. A plain hardened steel washer<br />

shall be used under the part of the bolt being turned during<br />

tightening operations.<br />

Irrespective of the tightening procedure, the Steelwork Sub-<br />

Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a Schedule of all HSFG<br />

bolts to be used on the Contract. This schedule should indicate the<br />

location of each bolt and the type of fabrication into which it is fitted.<br />

After final tightening of bolts the schedule must be signed by the<br />

Steelwork Sub-Contractor's erection supervisor. A copy of the<br />

completed bolt schedule must be forwarded to the Engineer for<br />

record purposes. If after final tightening, a nut or bolt is slackened<br />

off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer or washers shall be<br />

discarded and not used again.<br />

The Steelwork Sub-Contractor is to take all necessary precautions<br />

to ensure the stability and safety of the steelwork structure during<br />

erection and shall maintain any special temporary guying or other<br />

supports until the structure is completed, and the Steelwork Sub-<br />

Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any accidents which may<br />

arise from lack of suitable precautions.<br />

Extra care shall be exercised by the Steelwork Sub-Contractor<br />

when handling steelwork which is metal sprayed, galvanised or<br />

coated with anti-corrosive paint treatment. In order to avoid<br />

damage to these coatings padded slings should be used for lifting<br />

the steelwork. Temporary timber packers and spacing members<br />

shall be used extensively during transport, storage and erection, in<br />

an effort to reduce the possibility of damage to the treated surfaces<br />

of the steel.<br />

Zinc or Cadmium plated bolts, nuts and washers shall be used in<br />

the assembly and erection of all galvanised or specially treated<br />

steelwork.<br />

11 SETTING OF STEELWORK<br />

Unless otherwise specified stanchion bases are to be set on the<br />

concrete on steel wedges leaving a nominal gap of 40 mm and<br />

when the steelwork has been accurately levelled and aligned the<br />

space beneath will be filled by the Main Contractor with fluid<br />

Portland Cement mortar.<br />

68


The mortar shall be mixed as thickly as possible consistent with<br />

fluidity and shall be poured under a suitable head and tamped until<br />

the space is completely filled. The mortar shall be not leaner than<br />

1:2 cement to sand and should be regarded as a "sanded grout" for<br />

the assessment of working stresses, in bearing, on the material.<br />

The size of holding-down bolts and foundation anchorages shall be<br />

determined by the Steelwork Sub-Contractor considering the<br />

combination of maximum overturning moment with minimum<br />

column load, as specified on the contract drawings. The foundation<br />

bolt anchorages and column base thickness shall be designed to<br />

suit the bolt tension and the strength of the concrete. Holding down<br />

bolts shall be cast-in with a nominal play of 25 mm all round to<br />

accommodate alignment of the steelwork. The projection of<br />

holding-down bolts above the concrete shall be determined by the<br />

Steelwork Sub-Contractor to suit the base fabrication. A minimum<br />

allowance of 40 mm of bolt projection beyond the nut shall be<br />

provided to compensate for tolerances in the levels of foundations.<br />

Stanchion base plates should not be raised more than 25 mm nor<br />

lowered more than 15 mm, from the designed level, without the<br />

approval of the Engineer.<br />

Holding down bolts shall be not less than 20 mm diameter and 375<br />

mm long. The anchorage plate shall be not less than half the bolt<br />

diameter in thickness. All holding-down bolts, nuts, washers and<br />

anchorages shall be galvanised after fabrication.<br />

12 STEEL<br />

The Steel for this Contract shall be in accordance with the<br />

requirements of<br />

EN 10025:2004 for rolled steel sections and plates, and EN 10210<br />

for hot finished structural hollow sections. The grades of steel to be<br />

employed in the structure are to be noted on the Design Engineer’s<br />

Drawings.<br />

Care should be taken to protect mill identification marks on all steel<br />

sections during storage and fabrication.<br />

It is expected that steel of grade S355, in addition to ring marking,<br />

shall have a continuous pale blue paint line on the plate or section,<br />

in accordance with BS EN 10025:2004, applied after rolling.<br />

69


The steel sections used in the structure shall be in accordance with<br />

the requirements of the following British Standard Specifications:-<br />

BS 4 Part 1:2005 "Hot rolled steel sections".<br />

BS EN 10210-2:1997 "Hot rolled structural<br />

hollow sections".<br />

BS EN 10056-1:1999 "Hot rolled equal and unequal<br />

angles".<br />

BS EN 10162:2003 "Cold formed steel sections" made from<br />

galvanised steel sheet to BS EN<br />

10143, with a minimum yield<br />

strength of 280 N/mm 2 .<br />

13 FABRICATION<br />

The steelwork generally shall be fabricated in accordance with the<br />

requirements of BS 5950 : Part 2 unless otherwise specified.<br />

The ends of all sections unless specified otherwise on the contract<br />

drawings shall be accurately sawn, square to the axis of the<br />

member, and all burrs removed. Where loads are required to be<br />

transmitted by direct bearing, as in stanchion shafts with slab<br />

bases, the matching steel faces shall be machined "dead square"<br />

and the faces protected with grease during fabrication.<br />

Generally all bolts and nuts shall be I.S.O. metric black hexagon<br />

and conform to the requirements of BS 4190:2001. Higher grade<br />

bolts and nuts, except friction grip bolts, shall be ISO metric<br />

precision bolts and nuts in accordance with the requirements of BS<br />

3692:2001.<br />

All threads shall be clean and the nuts shall closely fit the bolts so<br />

that they can only just be turned by hand. Bolts shall be fitted in the<br />

fabrications with flat washers under all nuts. Tapered washers shall<br />

be used on tapering sections and flanges to ensure true bearing of<br />

the bolt head or nut. Two clear threads shall show beyond the nut<br />

on a fully tightened bolt.<br />

The faying surfaces of HSFG bolted joints in steel 25 mm thick or<br />

more should be checked for deformities such as bowing, twist or<br />

rippling which would reduce the safe load capacity of the joint.<br />

Zinc or Cadmium plated bolts, nuts and washers shall be used in<br />

the assembly of all steelwork which has been galvanised or treated<br />

70


with anti-corrosive treatments.<br />

Light angle sections may be cut by cropping providing the ends are<br />

dressed flush and burrs removed.<br />

Flame cutting (thermal cutting) of steel will be permitted only for the<br />

wall ends of beams, filler joists, or the like.<br />

Flame cutting of plates is permitted provided that properly prepared<br />

templates or guides are used and all gas cuts are dressed up free<br />

from oxidised metal to a bright metal finish.<br />

All holes generally shall be drilled with a maximum of 2 mm<br />

clearance for black bolts up to 24 mm diameter and 3 mm maximum<br />

clearance for bolts over 24 mm diameter.<br />

Punching of holes is acceptable only for secondary structural<br />

members such as sheeting rails and light bracing angles and all<br />

arises or burrs shall be removed prior to final assembly. Holes for<br />

high strength friction grip bolts shall not be punched.<br />

Unless adequate weld metal is provided to transmit forces, bearing<br />

stiffeners shall be accurately ground over their full bearing faces to<br />

fit tightly the angle or section stiffened.<br />

For fabrication in Structural Hollow Sections, the ends of members<br />

may be prepared for welding by sawing, machining, or by hand<br />

flame cutting using properly prepared templates or by automatic<br />

flame cutting or other approved methods.<br />

The correct fusion bevel for the welding of sections or plates may<br />

be achieved by flame cutting and/or grinding or machining. A<br />

smooth contour, free from irregularities is essential. Surfaces<br />

should also be free of any deleterious matter likely to affect the<br />

ease of welding and the efficiency of the connection.<br />

The edges of all plates etc cut by flame, which will be subject to<br />

dynamic or fatigue loading or liable to brittle fracture, shall be further<br />

machined to remove excessive face hardness. The amount of<br />

metal to be removed shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.<br />

Vent holes must be provided in Structural Hollow Section<br />

fabrications which are subsequently to be hot-dip galvanised. After<br />

71


galvanising, these vent holes must be plugged effectively to seal the<br />

tube and to ensure that there is no ingress of moisture. The method<br />

of sealing shall be approved by the Engineer. Location of any such<br />

venting holes shall be agreed with Engineer and Architect and be so<br />

located that they will be hidden from view in the finished building<br />

14 WELDING<br />

Welding of all structural sections shall be by electric arc process.<br />

The procedures to be followed, plant and equipment to be used and<br />

the testing and inspection to be applied shall be to the satisfaction<br />

of the Engineer and shall conform generally with the relevant British<br />

Standards and with the requirements contained in this Specification.<br />

All welding shall be carried out in workshops unless specifically<br />

shown otherwise on the Contract Drawings.<br />

Mild steel, Grade S275 may be welded in thicknesses up to 20 mm<br />

without preheat. Grade S355 steel plate and sections may be<br />

welded in thicknesses up to 16 mm without preheat. Material over<br />

this thickness requires some degree of preheat which shall be<br />

determined in consultation with the Engineer.<br />

When the surfaces to be welded are wet the sections or plates<br />

should be heated until they are warm to the touch for a distance of<br />

not less than 75 mm on each side of the joint.<br />

The minimum size of weld and electrode size shall be proportioned<br />

by careful consideration of the combined thickness of the parts to<br />

be welded and the ambient temperature at which welding will be<br />

carried out.<br />

Tack welds shall be deposited by a qualified welder. The length of<br />

tack welds shall not be less than 50 mm or 4 times the thickness of<br />

the thinner part, whichever is the smaller.<br />

All Steel Sections and plates of grades S275 and S355 shall be<br />

welded in accordance with BS EN 1011:1998. "Specification for<br />

metal arc welding of carbon and carbon-manganese steels".<br />

The design of welds shall recognise the requirements of the<br />

aforementioned British Standard Specifications but in all instances<br />

the conditions laid down by BS 5950 : Part 2 shall be adhered to.<br />

72


Covered electrodes used shall give a weld deposit having<br />

mechanical properties not less than the minimum specified for the<br />

parent metal. All electrodes shall comply with the requirements of<br />

BS 639 "Specification for Covered Electrodes for the Manual<br />

Metal-Arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese Steels".<br />

Where welding is required between different grades of material the<br />

choice of electrode shall be that relating to the higher yield stress<br />

material.<br />

Electrodes shall be stored in their original cartons or bundles in dry<br />

conditions and adequately protected from adverse weather effects.<br />

The approval of the Engineer shall be sought where deep<br />

penetration electrodes are considered for the welding of butt joints<br />

with minimal edge preparation.<br />

In fillet welded connections where the angle between fusion faces is<br />

less than 30 o the Steelwork Sub-Contractor will be required to<br />

submit sample welds as evidence that adequate root fusion and<br />

throat thickness are obtainable by the welding procedure employed.<br />

All butt joints in Structural Hollow Sections shall be welded with the<br />

aid of specially fitted backing rings in order to ensure complete<br />

penetration at the root of the welds. In every case where a backing<br />

ring is employed, the location of the joint, preparation and fit-up<br />

shall be arranged in such a way as to ensure that complete fusion<br />

of the tubes to be joined is readily obtained.<br />

The weld metal deposited shall be substantially free from weld<br />

defects such as cracks, slag inclusions, gross porosity, cavities etc.<br />

The weld metal shall be properly fused with the parent metal without<br />

serious under-cutting or overlapping. The quality of welding<br />

generally shall be assessed according to the acceptance levels<br />

stated in BS EN 1011:1998. All full strength butt welds shall be<br />

category "A" and all other welds category "B" standard.<br />

Any serious undercut shall be made good by the deposition of<br />

additional weld metal.<br />

Evidence of qualification of welders will be required by the Engineer<br />

and in cases where recent test results, certificates or other<br />

acceptable proof of welder qualification is not available, the<br />

Engineer will require welder approval tests to be carried out.<br />

73


In the particular case of welders engaged on fillet welding only the<br />

welder tests may be in accordance with BS 4872 : Part 1:1982<br />

"Approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is<br />

not required". The tests shall be carried out under the supervision<br />

of the Engineer and to his satisfaction and the extent of qualification<br />

thereby attained shall be in conformity with the recommendations of<br />

BS EN 287 : Part 1:2004<br />

For certain critical welds and all full strength butt welds it will be<br />

necessary to carry out welding procedure tests and satisfy the<br />

requirements of BS EN 288 "Specification and Approval of welding<br />

procedures for metallic materials" In all such cases the welders to<br />

be employed on the work shall be tested additionally to BS EN 287 :<br />

Part 1:2004 "Qualification test of welders, fusion welding".<br />

Details of proposed weld sizes, weld preparations, welding positions<br />

and sequences for manual metal arc welding accompanied by<br />

diagrams showing the number and arrangement of runs in multi-run<br />

main welds together with the details of the manufacturer,<br />

classification code (as defined in BS EN ISO 2560:2005) and size of<br />

electrodes to be used, shall be submitted in advance to the<br />

Engineer for his approval. Similarly, for semi-automatic gas<br />

shielded and automatic welding processes on main welds, the<br />

welding procedure in detail shall be submitted in advance to the<br />

Engineer for his approval. The approval of the details submitted<br />

shall not relieve the Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor<br />

of their responsibility for producing sound welded joints nor of the<br />

requirement to undertake welding procedure tests.<br />

Unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer all steel components<br />

and structures which are externally exposed or subjected to<br />

condensation or corrosive vapours etc shall be fully seal welded<br />

during fabrication. Intermittent welding in such fabrications is not<br />

permitted.<br />

The Steelwork Sub-Contractor should note that changes may not be<br />

made to agreed welding procedures or material preparation without<br />

the consent of the Engineer.<br />

The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall bear the<br />

cost of all material and labour necessary in the production of test<br />

pieces for welding procedure tests and for the qualification of<br />

welding operatives. The Employer shall bear the cost of assessing<br />

the test pieces and the associated non-destructive testing.<br />

74


15 TESTS OF MATERIALS<br />

The Steelwork Sub-Contractor, when required, shall provide and<br />

send sample pieces carriage paid to such testing stations as may<br />

be directed. Sample pieces shall be 500 x 100 mm for plates or as<br />

near that as practicable and 500 mm long of full section for<br />

structural shapes, rods etc. The sample pieces shall be selected by<br />

the Engineer and despatched to the testing station where test<br />

pieces will be made and tested.<br />

The decision of the Engineer as to the acceptance or rejection of<br />

material on reports from the testing station shall be final. The<br />

Employer will pay all fees for tests that are accepted as satisfactory.<br />

The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall pay all<br />

fees involved in unsatisfactory tests.<br />

The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall when requested by the<br />

Engineer submit two copies of the test certificates for steel ex-stock<br />

or from rolling mills.<br />

Certain steel plates as defined by the Engineer shall be<br />

ultrasonically tested to detect laminations in the material. Welded<br />

plate girders and certain division plates in member connections<br />

which are stressed in tension in the "through plate" direction are<br />

examples of critical fabrications where the integrity of the material is<br />

of paramount importance.<br />

16 EXAMINATION AND TESTING OF WELDS<br />

The Engineer or his representative shall at all reasonable times be<br />

permitted access to the Steelwork Contractor's works for the<br />

purposes of examination and testing of welded structural<br />

components.<br />

Records (such as a marked up General Arrangement drawing) must<br />

be kept of all major welds, as required by the Engineer (e.g. tension<br />

member butt welds) to ensure non-destructive testing results and<br />

welding operators responsible for the work can be identified<br />

accordingly. Hard stamping of the finished work for this purpose will<br />

not be permitted.<br />

The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall provide facilities for the<br />

Engineer or his representatives to carry out non-destructive tests on<br />

75


welded joints in completed weldments. The extent of testing shall<br />

be at the discretion of the Engineer but it is anticipated that 25% of<br />

all butt welds and 10% of all fillet welded joints shall be tested by<br />

non-destructive means.<br />

If any sample fails a specified test the consignment which it<br />

represents may be rejected in part or whole at the discretion of the<br />

Engineer.<br />

Major welds, where catastrophic collapse would follow weld failure,<br />

shall be tested 100%.<br />

The Main Contractor and Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall pay all<br />

fees involved in testing unsatisfactory welds and repaired,<br />

previously failed welds. The Employer shall pay all fees for all first<br />

time tests that are accepted as satisfactory by the Engineer.<br />

All areas of defective welding shall be cut out and made good to the<br />

entire satisfaction of the Engineer and all costs for these remedial<br />

measures shall be borne by the Main Contractor and Steelwork<br />

Sub-Contractor. The remedial work shall be deemed to include<br />

radiographical or other suitable examination to verify the<br />

acceptability of the repair.<br />

All slag shall be removed from welds to facilitate inspection.<br />

The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall give at least three days notice<br />

of his intention to despatch any major welded component to site.<br />

This stipulation is made in order that inspection can be carried out<br />

on the weldment and analysis of test results completed prior to<br />

despatch.<br />

Non-destructive testing of welds shall be in accordance with the<br />

following British Standard Specifications:-<br />

Visual Inspection .. .. BS EN 970:1997<br />

Radiographic Examination.. .. BS EN 1435:1997<br />

Ultrasonic Examination.. .. BS EN 1714:1998<br />

BS 3923 : Part<br />

2:1974<br />

Penetrant Test.. .. .. BS EN 571-1:1997<br />

Magnetic Particle Test.. .. BS EN ISO 9934-<br />

1:2001<br />

17 WEIGHTS<br />

76


All weights and variations or otherwise will be based on the listed<br />

weights of members and no allowance made for rolling margins. All<br />

steel sections shall be of "full profile" with no appreciable loss of<br />

material through corrosion or deficient rolling. If it is found that any<br />

steel weights less than 2% less than the listed weights, the<br />

Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall replace it with a satisfactory section.<br />

18 CLEANING & SURFACE PREPARATION<br />

All steelwork, except where metal coatings or anti-corrosive paint<br />

treatments are to be applied, shall be thoroughly scraped and wire<br />

brushed free from dirt, loose rust, scale and grease immediately<br />

before despatch to site.<br />

Steel which has weathered to some degree may be used but<br />

heavily pitted steel, as depicted for Grade D surfaces in the<br />

Swedish Standards SIS 05 5900 shall not be used except with the<br />

consent of the Engineer.<br />

Irrespective of the steel protection system specified elsewhere the<br />

interfaces of connections where High Strength Friction Grip Bolts<br />

are to be employed shall be thoroughly cleaned as specified and<br />

the steel surfaces shall be left unpainted.<br />

Steelwork which is to be galvanised shall be flash cleaned by<br />

pickling immediately prior to galvanising. This operation shall be<br />

carried out by immersing the fabrication in a bath of warm diluted<br />

sulphuric acid or hydrochloric acid to remove all residues of<br />

millscale, rust and foreign matter. Care should be taken to ensure<br />

complete drainage of the acid from the steel on completion of the<br />

process.<br />

All steelwork to receive metal spray, or anti-corrosive paint<br />

treatment shall be prepared by grit blasting or shot blasting of the<br />

steel surface to a "Second Quality" surface cleanliness as defined in<br />

BS 7079 Part 0:1990. "Preparation of steel substrates before<br />

application of paints and related products". The surface roughness<br />

of the blast cleaned steel should not be greater than the<br />

recommended maximum amplitude of 75 microns (0.003 inch). The<br />

steel surface profile may be further limited by the paint<br />

manufacturer's requirements and these shall be accepted as<br />

forming part of this specification.<br />

APPENDIX 1 – THE PREPARATION OF STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />

77


DRAWINGS<br />

A Check List for Steelwork Sub-Contractor<br />

Clause<br />

Requirement<br />

Steelwork Details:<br />

Indicate all member sizes and weights.<br />

Provide full setting out dimensions on all Plans,<br />

Cross-sections & Elevations.<br />

Provide setting out plan for holding down bolts.<br />

Provide Cross-sections/Elevations on each grid<br />

line.<br />

Provide details of all bolted and welded<br />

connections.<br />

Add a General Note to the GA Drawings detailing<br />

anti-corrosion protection system.<br />

Indicate on GA Drawings fire protection system to<br />

be applied to all steel members<br />

Erection Precautions:<br />

Add a General Note to the GA Drawings to<br />

ensure that a Schedule of all High Strength<br />

Friction Grip Bolts used on the project.<br />

Indicate on drawings the location and type of any<br />

temporary bracing which may be required for the<br />

stability of the bare steel frame. These additional<br />

braces shall ensure the stability of the partially<br />

clad building prior to the erection of all roof and<br />

vertical bracing etc.<br />

Steel:<br />

List on GA Drawings the grades of steel to be<br />

used on the project.<br />

1802SR<br />

PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION<br />

METAL COATINGS AND ANTI-CORROSIVE PAINT TREATMENTS<br />

(a)<br />

Galvanising<br />

Galvanising treatment shall be carried out in accordance with the<br />

requirements of BS EN ISO 1461:1999 "Specification for Hot-dip<br />

Galvanised Coatings". The metal coating thickness shall be not<br />

less than 85 microns (610 grams per square metre).<br />

78


The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall make certain that all<br />

fabrications to be galvanised are free from excessive rust and<br />

traces of paint, varnish or cutting oil etc., as normal pickling<br />

operations will not remove these materials. The galvanising<br />

process shall be applied to completed structural components and<br />

holding down bolt assemblies. Unless agreed otherwise with the<br />

Engineer all galvanised steel fabrications shall be fully seal welded<br />

prior to galvanising. Intermittent welding in such fabrications is not<br />

permitted.<br />

(b)<br />

Sprayed Metal Coatings<br />

Zinc or aluminium sprayed metal coatings shall be applied strictly in<br />

accordance with the requirements of BS EN ISO 2063:2005.<br />

"Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Thermal spraying: zinc,<br />

aluminium and their alloys".<br />

The type of metal coating shall be as specified on the Contract<br />

Drawings but the coatings of either metal shall have a minimum<br />

nominal thickness of 150 microns at any point. The metal spray<br />

must be applied to blast-cleaned steel prepared as described in the<br />

preceding clause "Cleaning and Surface Preparation". Unless<br />

agreed otherwise all metal sprayed steel fabrications shall be fully<br />

seal welded prior to treatment. Intermittent welding is not permitted<br />

in metal sprayed fabrications. The finished surface of sprayed<br />

metal coatings shall be sealed before the application of paint coats<br />

in accordance with BS 5493 Table 4C Part 2.<br />

(c)<br />

Anti-Corrosive Paint Treatments<br />

The preparation of surfaces and methods of application of the paint<br />

system shall at all times be in accordance with the paint<br />

manufacturers instructions and these shall be accepted as forming<br />

part of the specification.<br />

All paint treatments shall be applied to blast-cleaned steel of<br />

"Second Quality" surface cleanliness as described in the earlier<br />

clause of this Specification dealing with "Cleaning and Surface<br />

Preparation".<br />

The blast cleaned surfaces shall be brushed clean of abrasive<br />

residues and dust etc immediately prior to painting. Sharp<br />

protuberances, surface laminations etc shall be removed by<br />

79


chipping and grinding. No blasted surface shall be left overnight<br />

before painting. All interfaces of connections, except those which<br />

are to be clamped together by friction grip bolts, shall be fully<br />

primed before assembly.<br />

The Steelwork Sub-Contractor shall take all necessary precautions<br />

to satisfy the relevant sections of the Factories Act and any other<br />

regulations governing the handling and welding of primed steelwork.<br />

Care shall be taken to remove grease and oil including cutting oil,<br />

from the primed steel surfaces immediately prior to painting.<br />

If the primed surface has become contaminated with dirt or soluble<br />

salts etc, these shall be removed with clean water and the surface<br />

then allowed to dry. Handling of the coated steel shall not take<br />

place until all the coating is touch dry. Coated Steelwork shall be<br />

protected against mechanical damage during handling,<br />

transportation and erection. Fabricated steelwork which is to be<br />

stored either on site or in the works, awaiting delivery or erection,<br />

shall be kept clear of the ground and stored on suitable packing in<br />

such a way as to ensure that the minimum amount of water or dirt<br />

comes in contact with the coated steel. Suitable packings shall also<br />

be placed between layers of stocked steelwork.<br />

All sharp edges on steel sections etc. shall be removed by light<br />

grinding to improve the quality of the final paint system. Such<br />

edges in addition shall be "stripe" painted first, to allow a build up of<br />

paint on the steel edges, prior to the application of the paint<br />

generally.<br />

The following is a summary of the anti-corrosive paint system. The<br />

paint system is an International Paint Company specification. Other<br />

paint manufacturer's anti-corrosive paint systems, of equal quality<br />

and performance, may be substituted providing the Engineer's<br />

written approval is obtained.<br />

Shop primer: Apply Interplate 180 (2 pack Epoxy primer<br />

with zinc phosphate and iron oxide) to blast cleaned steel<br />

at works immediately or within 2 hours of blast cleaning. After<br />

fabrication carry out remedial treatment of damaged areas and<br />

welds the latter by blast cleaning followed by touch up with<br />

Interplate 180.<br />

Dry film thickness: 25 micrometres.<br />

- Shop Second coat: Intergard 251 (colour to be defined by CA).<br />

80


Dry film thickness: 75 micrometres.<br />

- Shop Third coat: Intergard 400 (colour to be defined by CA).<br />

Dry film thickness: 125 micrometres.<br />

- Site Preparation: Touch in shop coats and prepare surface as<br />

Clause 765.<br />

- Site top coat: Interthane 990<br />

Dry film thickness: 50 micrometres (number of coats dependant on<br />

colour)<br />

Colour: To be defined by Architect.<br />

Top Coat to be site applied to Architect’s specification.<br />

20 IDENTIFICATION<br />

All beams and stanchions etc shall be clearly marked with their<br />

numbers, together with the number of the members into which they<br />

frame at both ends. All parts shall carry a contract reference<br />

number or mark. Unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer all<br />

identification marks shall be removed or painted out after<br />

completion of steel erection and during the steel touch-up painting<br />

operation. Embossed weld metal identification markings will not be<br />

permitted on the steelwork.<br />

21 GENERAL<br />

If anything in the drawings, specifications or other documents is not<br />

clear to the Main Contractor and/or Steelwork Sub-Contractor, they<br />

shall draw the attention of the Engineer to such in writing and ask<br />

for his instructions.<br />

The workmanship and materials throughout the work shall be to the<br />

standards required by the relevant British Standard Specifications where these<br />

apply and otherwise shall be the best of their respective kinds, and shall be of<br />

quality consistent with the performance required or implied. The work shall be<br />

done to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer and the Engineer's wishes<br />

and instructions in all these matters shall be considered as forming part of the<br />

Specification for the work.<br />

81


APPENDIX 0/2: CONTRACT - SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES AND<br />

TABLES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT<br />

Part A: Volume 1 Specification<br />

Clause No (etc)<br />

Alterations to be made<br />

None<br />

82


APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION FOR<br />

HIGHWAY WORKS<br />

Appendix 0/3 is comprised of two lists, A and B, of Numbered Appendices as follows:<br />

List ‘A’ is a complete list of the Numbered Appendices referred to in the Specification for Highway Works<br />

with those not adopted marked ‘Not Used’. Those identified by the letters T or C shall be completed by<br />

the Tenderer or Contractor respectively.<br />

List ‘B’ gives the list of Contract-specific Numbered Appendices devised for the Contract.<br />

Guide to Type of Number Appendices – who compiles/completes<br />

Symbol<br />

(Co) Compiler compiles : Identified in the Notes for Guidance examples by the term “Sample”<br />

included in their title.<br />

(Co/C) Compiler partially compiles and Contractor completes and returns to Overseeing<br />

Organisaion.<br />

(Co/T) Compiler partially compiles and Tenderer completes and returns with Tender.<br />

(C) Contractor completes and returns to Project Manager.<br />

(P) This indicates the Appendix is a national proforma and format must not be altered.<br />

Volume<br />

Completed<br />

Appendix<br />

Title<br />

No<br />

by<br />

No<br />

INTRODUCTION<br />

(Co)<br />

0/1<br />

Contract-specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled<br />

Clauses, Tables and Figures<br />

Included in the Contract<br />

(Co)<br />

0/2<br />

Contract-specific Minor Alterations to Existing Clauses,<br />

Tables and Figures<br />

Included in the Contract<br />

(Co)<br />

0/3<br />

List of Numbered Appendices Referred to in the<br />

Specification and Included in the Contract<br />

(Co)<br />

0/4<br />

List of Drawings Included in the Contract<br />

(Co)<br />

0/5<br />

Special National Alterations of the Overseeing Organisations<br />

of Scotland/Wales/Northern Ireland<br />

PRELIMINARIES<br />

(Co)<br />

1/1<br />

Temporary Accommodation and Equipment for the<br />

Overseeing Organisation<br />

Not Used<br />

1/2#<br />

Vehicles for the Overseeing Organisation<br />

(Co)<br />

1/3<br />

Communication System for the Overseeing Organisation<br />

(Co)<br />

1/4<br />

Working and Fabrication Drawings<br />

(Co)<br />

1/5<br />

Testing to be Carried out by the Contractor<br />

(Co)<br />

1/6<br />

Supply and Delivery of Samples to the Overseeing<br />

Organisation<br />

(Co)<br />

1/7<br />

Site Extent and Limitations on Use<br />

83


Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />

Volume<br />

No<br />

Completed<br />

by<br />

Appendix<br />

No<br />

(Co) 1/8<br />

(Co) 1/9<br />

(Co/C) 1/10<br />

(Co/C) 1/11<br />

(Co/C) 1/12<br />

(C) Not 1/13<br />

Used 1/14<br />

Not Used 1/15<br />

(Co) 1/16<br />

Not Used 1/17<br />

(Co) 1/18<br />

Not Used 1/19<br />

Not Used 1/20#<br />

(Co) 1/21<br />

Not Used 1/22<br />

Not Used 1/23<br />

Not Used 1/24<br />

Not Used 1/25<br />

Not Used 1/26<br />

Not Used 1/27<br />

Title<br />

Operatives for the Overseeing Organisation<br />

Control of Noise and Vibration<br />

Structures to be Designed by the Contractor<br />

Structural Elements and Other Features to be Designed by<br />

the Contractor<br />

Setting Out and Existing Ground Levels<br />

Programme of Works<br />

Payment Applications<br />

Accommodation Works<br />

Privately and Publicly Owned Services and Supplies<br />

Traffic Safety and Management<br />

Temporary Diversions for Traffic<br />

Routing of Vehicles<br />

Recovery Vehicles for Breakdowns<br />

Information Boards<br />

Progress Photographs<br />

Risks to Health and Safety from Materials or Substances<br />

Quality Management System<br />

Temporary Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System for the<br />

Monitoring of Traffic<br />

Temporary Automatic Speed Camera System for the<br />

Enforcement of Mandatory Speed Limits at Road Works<br />

(TASCAR)<br />

Temporary Automatic Speed Camera System for the<br />

Enforcement of Mandatory Speed Limits at Road Works<br />

(TASCAR) - Particular Requirements<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

2/1<br />

2/2<br />

2/3<br />

2/4<br />

2/5<br />

SITE CLEARANCE<br />

List of Buildings, etc. to be Demolished or Partially<br />

Demolished<br />

Filling of Trenches and Pipes<br />

Retention of Material Arising from Site Clearance<br />

Explosives and Blasting<br />

Hazardous Materials<br />

(Co)<br />

3/1<br />

FENCING<br />

Fencing, Gates and Stiles<br />

84


Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />

Volume<br />

No<br />

Completed<br />

by<br />

Appendix<br />

No<br />

(Co) 4/1<br />

(Co) 4/2<br />

Title<br />

ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND<br />

PEDESTRIAN)<br />

(05/04) Road Restraint Systems (Vehicle and Pedestrian)<br />

(05/04) Information Required to Demonstrate Compliance of<br />

Road Restraint Systems to BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2,<br />

BS EN 1317-3 and DD ENV 1317-4: 2002<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

(Co)<br />

5/1<br />

5/2<br />

5/3<br />

5/4<br />

5/5<br />

5/6<br />

5/7<br />

DRAINAGE AND SERVICE DUCTS<br />

Drainage Requirements<br />

Service Duct Requirements<br />

Surface Water Channels and Drainage Channel Blocks<br />

Fin Drains and Narrow Filter Drains<br />

Combined Drainage and Kerb Systems<br />

Linear Drainage Channel Systems<br />

Thermoplastics Structural Wall Pipes and Fittings<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

Not Used<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

Not Used<br />

(Co)<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

6/1<br />

6/2<br />

6/3<br />

6/4<br />

6/5<br />

6/6<br />

6/7<br />

6/8<br />

6/9<br />

6/10<br />

6/11<br />

6/12<br />

6/13<br />

6/14<br />

6/15<br />

EARTHWORKS<br />

Requirements for Acceptability and Testing etc. of<br />

Earthworks Materials<br />

Requirements for Dealing with Class U1B and Class U2<br />

Unacceptable Materials<br />

Requirements for Excavation, Deposition, Compaction<br />

(Other than Dynamic Compaction)<br />

Requirements for Class 3 Material<br />

Geotextiles Used to Separate Earthworks Materials<br />

Fill to Structures and Fill Above Structural Foundations<br />

Sub-formation and Capping and Preparation and Surface<br />

Treatment of Formation<br />

Topsoiling<br />

Earthwork Environmental Bunds, Landscape Areas,<br />

Strengthened Embankments<br />

Ground Anchorages, Crib Walling and Gabions<br />

Swallow Holes and Other Naturally Occurring Cavities and<br />

Disused Mine Workings<br />

Instrumentation and Monitoring Ground Improvement<br />

Limiting Values for Pollution of Controlled Waters (11/06)<br />

Limiting Values for Harm to Human Health and the<br />

Environment (11/04)<br />

85


Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />

Volume<br />

No<br />

Completed<br />

by<br />

Appendix<br />

No<br />

(Co) 7/1#<br />

(Co) 7/2<br />

Not Used 7/3<br />

(Co)<br />

7/4<br />

7/5<br />

Not Used<br />

7/6<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

7/7<br />

Not Used<br />

7/8<br />

(Co)<br />

7/9<br />

Not Used 7/10<br />

Not Used 7/11<br />

Not Used 7/12<br />

Not Used 7/13<br />

Not Used 7/14<br />

Not Used 7/15<br />

Not Used 7/16<br />

Not Used<br />

7/17<br />

7/18<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

7/19<br />

Not Used<br />

7/20<br />

Not Used<br />

7/21<br />

Not Used<br />

7/22<br />

Title<br />

ROAD PAVEMENTS – GENERAL<br />

Permitted Pavement Options (Schedules 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5)<br />

Excavation, Trimming and Reinstatement of Existing<br />

Surfaces<br />

Surface Dressing - Performance Specification (Sheets 1, 2<br />

and 3)<br />

Bond Coats, Tack Coats and Other Bituminous Sprays<br />

(Sheets 1, 2 and Binder Data Sheet)<br />

In Situ Recycling - The Remix and Repave Processes<br />

Breaking Up or Perforation of Existing Pavement<br />

Slurry Surfacing Incorporating Microsurfacing (Sheets 1, 2<br />

and 3)<br />

Not Used<br />

Cold-Milling (Planing) of Bituminous Bound Flexible<br />

Pavement<br />

Not used (11/09)<br />

Overband and Inlaid Crack Sealing Systems<br />

Arrester Beds<br />

Saw-Cut Crack and Seal Bituminous Overlays on Existing<br />

Jointed Concrete Pavements<br />

Preparation of Jointed Concrete Pavements Prior to<br />

Overlaying and Saw-Cut and Seal of the Bituminous Overlay<br />

(11/03)<br />

Saw-Cut, Crack and Seat Existing Jointed Reinforced<br />

Concrete Pavements (11/03)<br />

Cracking and Seating of Existing Jointed Unreinforced<br />

Concrete Pavements and CBM Bases<br />

Cracking Plant and Equipment Progress Record<br />

Site Specific Details and Requirements for Cold Recycled<br />

Bitumen Bound Material<br />

Site Specific Details and Requirements for Recycled Cement<br />

Bound Material<br />

Not Used<br />

Surface Dressing - Recipe Specification (Sheets 1, 2 and<br />

Binder Data Sheet)<br />

Repairs to Potholes (11/03)<br />

86


Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />

Volume<br />

No<br />

Completed<br />

by<br />

Appendix<br />

No<br />

Not Used 10/1<br />

Title<br />

ROAD PAVEMENTS - CONCRETE AND CEMENT BOUND<br />

MATERIALS<br />

Plant and Equipment for the Construction of Exposed<br />

Aggregate Concrete Surface<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

11/1<br />

11/2#<br />

KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS<br />

Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas<br />

Access Steps<br />

(Co)<br />

Not Used<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

Not Used<br />

12/1#<br />

12/2<br />

12/3<br />

12/4<br />

12/5<br />

12/6<br />

TRAFFIC SIGNS<br />

Traffic Signs: General<br />

Traffic Signs: Marker Posts<br />

Traffic Signs: Road Markings and Studs<br />

Traffic Signs: Cones, Cylinders, FTDs and Other Traffic<br />

Delineators<br />

Traffic Signs: Traffic Signals<br />

Traffic Signs: Special Sign Requirements on Gantries<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

13/1#<br />

13/2<br />

13/3<br />

13/4<br />

13/5<br />

13/6<br />

13/7#<br />

13/8<br />

13/9<br />

ROAD LIGHTING COLUMNS AND BRACKETS, CCTV<br />

MASTS AND CANTILEVER MASTS (11/03)<br />

Information to be Provided When Specifying Lighting<br />

Columns and Brackets<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Typical Lighting Column<br />

and Bracket Data Sheets 1 and 2<br />

Instructions for Completion of Lighting Column and Bracket<br />

Data Sheets<br />

Information to be Provided When Specifying CCTV Masts<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Typical CCTV Mast Data<br />

Sheet<br />

Instructions for Completion of CCTV Mast Sheets<br />

Information to be Provided When Specifying Cantilever<br />

Masts (11/03)<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Typical Cantilever Masts<br />

Data Sheets 1 and 2 (11/03)<br />

Instructions for Completion of Cantilever Masts Data Sheets<br />

(11/03)<br />

87


Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />

Volume<br />

No<br />

Completed<br />

by<br />

Appendix<br />

No<br />

Not Used 14/1<br />

Not Used 14/2<br />

Not Used 14/3<br />

Not Used 14/4<br />

Not Used 14/5<br />

Title<br />

ELECTRICAL WORK FOR ROAD LIGHTING AND<br />

TRAFFIC SIGNS<br />

Site Records<br />

Location of Lighting Units and Feeder Pillars<br />

Temporary Lighting<br />

Electrical Equipment for Road Lighting<br />

Electrical Equipment for Traffic Signs<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

15/1<br />

15/2<br />

MOTORWAY COMMUNICATIONS<br />

Motorway Communications<br />

Cable Duct Requirements<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

16/1<br />

16/2<br />

16/3<br />

16/4<br />

16/5<br />

16/6<br />

16/7<br />

16/8<br />

16/9<br />

16/10<br />

16/11<br />

16/12<br />

16/13<br />

16/14<br />

16/15<br />

16/16<br />

16/17<br />

16/18<br />

PILING AND EMBEDDED RETAINING WALLS<br />

General Requirements for Piling and Embedded Retaining<br />

Walls<br />

Precast Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Piles and<br />

Precast Reinforced Concrete Segmental Piles<br />

Bored Cast-in Place Piles<br />

Bored Piles Constructed using Continuous Flight Augers and<br />

Concrete or Grout Injection throughHollow Auger Stems<br />

Driven Cast-in-Place Piles<br />

Steel Bearing Piles<br />

Reduction of Friction on Piles<br />

Non-Destructive Methods for Testing Piles<br />

Static Load Testing of Piles<br />

Diaphragm Walls<br />

Hard/Hard Secant Pile Walls<br />

Hard/Soft Secant Pile Walls<br />

Contiguous Bored Pile Walls<br />

King Post Walls<br />

Steel Sheet Piles<br />

Integrity Testing of Wall Elements<br />

Instrumentation or Piles and Embedded Walls<br />

Support Fluid<br />

88


Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />

Volume<br />

No<br />

Completed<br />

by<br />

Appendix<br />

No<br />

(Co) 17/1<br />

Not Used 17/2<br />

(Co) 17/3<br />

(Co) 17/4<br />

(Co) 17/5<br />

Not Used 17/6<br />

Title<br />

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE<br />

Schedule for the Specification of Designed Concrete (05/06)<br />

Concrete - Impregnation Schedule<br />

Concrete - Surface Finishes<br />

Concrete - General<br />

Buried Concrete (05/02)<br />

Grouting and Duct Systems for Post-tensioned Tendons<br />

(Co)<br />

18/1<br />

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK<br />

Requirements for Structural Steelwork<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

19/1<br />

19/2<br />

19/3<br />

19/4#<br />

19/5<br />

PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P1 (New Works)<br />

Paint System Sheet<br />

Requirements for Other Work<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P2 Paint Data<br />

Sheet<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P3 Paint Sample<br />

Despatch List: Sheets 1 and 2<br />

General Requirements<br />

(Co)<br />

20/1<br />

WATERPROOFING FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES<br />

Waterproofing for Concrete Structures<br />

Not Used<br />

21/1<br />

BRIDGE BEARINGS<br />

Bridge Bearing Schedule<br />

Not Used<br />

22/1<br />

(05/04) Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

23/1<br />

23/2<br />

BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS AND SEALING OF GAPS<br />

Bridge Deck Expansion Joints Schedule<br />

Sealing of Gaps Schedule (Other than in Bridge Deck<br />

Expansion Joints)<br />

(Co)<br />

24/1<br />

BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK<br />

Brickwork, Blockwork and Stonework<br />

89


Appendix 0/3 List A (Cont.)<br />

Volume<br />

No<br />

Completed<br />

by<br />

Appendix<br />

No<br />

Not Used 25/1<br />

Not Used 25/2<br />

Not Used 25/3<br />

Not Used 25/4<br />

Not Used 25/5<br />

Title<br />

SPECIAL STRUCTURES<br />

Requirements for Corrugated Steel Buried Structures<br />

Requirements for Reinforced Soil and Anchored Earth<br />

Structures<br />

Requirements for Pocket - Type and Grouted - Cavity<br />

Reinforced Brickwork Retaining Wall Structures<br />

Environmental Barriers<br />

Requirements for Buried Rigid Pipes for Drainage Structures<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

26/1<br />

26/2<br />

26/3<br />

MISCELLANEOUS<br />

Ancillary Concrete<br />

Bedding Mortar<br />

Cored Thermoplastic Node Markers<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

Not Used<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

(Co)<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

30/1<br />

30/2<br />

30/3<br />

30/4<br />

30/5<br />

30/6<br />

30/7<br />

30/8<br />

30/9<br />

30/10<br />

30/11<br />

30/12<br />

LANDSCAPE AND ECOLOGY<br />

General, sheets 1, 2 and 3<br />

Weed Control<br />

Control of Rabbits and Deer<br />

Ground Preparation<br />

Grass Seeding, Wildflower Seeding and Turfing<br />

Planting, sheets 1 and 2<br />

Grass, Bulbs and Wildflower Maintenance<br />

Watering<br />

Establishment Maintenance for Planting<br />

Maintenance of Established Trees and Shrubs<br />

Management of Waterbodies<br />

Special Ecological Measures<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

Not Used<br />

50/1<br />

50/2<br />

50/3<br />

50/4#<br />

50/5<br />

MAINTENANCE PAINTING OF STEELWORK<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P1<br />

(Maintenance) Paint System Sheet<br />

Requirements for Other Work<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P2 Paint Data<br />

Sheet<br />

(Specification for Highway Works) Form HA/P3 Paint Sample<br />

Despatch List: Sheets 1 and 2<br />

General Requirements<br />

90


List ‘B’ gives the list of Contract-specific Numbered Appendices devised for the Contract.<br />

Volume No Appendix No Appendix Title<br />

AS<br />

Quality Management Schemes<br />

91


APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT<br />

1. Contract-specific Drawings Supplied to Each Tender<br />

Drawing No.<br />

073030/GA/01<br />

073030/GA/02<br />

073030/GA/03<br />

073030/GA/04<br />

073030/GA/05<br />

073030/GA/06<br />

073030/GA/07<br />

073030/GA/08<br />

073030/GA/09<br />

073030/GA/10<br />

073030/GA/11<br />

073030/GA/12<br />

073030/GA/13<br />

073030/GA/14<br />

073030/GA/15<br />

073030/GA/16<br />

073030/GA/17<br />

073030/GA/18<br />

073030/GA/19<br />

073030/GA/20<br />

073030/GA/21<br />

073030/GA/22<br />

073030/GA/23<br />

073030/GA/24<br />

073030/GA/25<br />

073030/GA/26<br />

073030/GA/27<br />

073030/GA/28<br />

073030/GA/29<br />

073030/GA/30<br />

073030/GA/31<br />

073030/GA/32<br />

073030/GA/33<br />

073030/GA/34<br />

073030/GA/35<br />

073030/GA/36<br />

83473/01<br />

83473/02<br />

Title<br />

Site Location Plan<br />

Topographical Survey Information<br />

Japanese Knotweed Area<br />

Site Boundary<br />

Proposed Road Plan<br />

Longitudinal Road Section Sheet 1<br />

Longitudinal Road Section Sheet 2<br />

Site Crossections Sheet 1<br />

Site Crossections Sheet 2<br />

Site Crossections Sheet 3<br />

Site Crossections Sheet 4<br />

Detailed Proposed Cemetery Layout Sheet 1<br />

Detailed Proposed Cemetery Layout Sheet2<br />

Detailed Site Sections 1-1 and 2-2<br />

Detailed Site Crossections 3-3<br />

Detailed Site Crossections 4-4<br />

Detailed Site Crossectins 5-5<br />

Detailed Site Crossections 6-6<br />

Detailed Site Crossections 7-7<br />

Detailed Site Crossection 8-8<br />

Detailed Site Crossection 9-9<br />

Retaining Wall Elevations Sheet1<br />

Retaining Wall Elevations Sheet 2<br />

Proposed Water Supply Layout<br />

Proposed Cable Duct Layout<br />

Proposed Drainage Plan<br />

Drainage Longsections Sheet 1<br />

Drainage Longsections Sheet 2<br />

Drainage Longsections Sheet 3<br />

Drainage Schedule<br />

Toilet Block<br />

Topsoil and Salt Silo<br />

General Arrangement Contractor Designed Retaing Walls<br />

General Arrangement Contractor Designed Steps and Ramps<br />

Miscellaneous Construction Details Sheet 1<br />

Miscellaneous Construction Details Sheet 2<br />

Landscape Proposals Sheet 1 of 3<br />

Landscape Proposals Sheet 2 of 3<br />

92


83473/03<br />

83473/04<br />

83473/05<br />

Landscape Proposals Sheet 3 of 3<br />

Landscape Details Sheet 1 of 2<br />

Landscape Details Sheet 2 of 2<br />

2. Standard Drawings<br />

(i)<br />

Supplied to Each Tenderer<br />

Drawing No.<br />

Title<br />

NONE<br />

(ii)<br />

Inspected by Tenderers<br />

The following drawings are available for inspection by tenderers at:<br />

One copy will be supplied to the Contractor<br />

Drawing No. Title Aspect required if not the whole<br />

None<br />

Drawing<br />

(iii) Brought Into the Contract by Reference<br />

HCD published by HMSO as Volume 3 of the Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works<br />

contains the following drawings brought into the Contract by reference. Unless otherwise stated below<br />

the whole drawing is brought into the Contract.<br />

Drawing<br />

No<br />

F1<br />

F2<br />

F4<br />

F5<br />

F6<br />

Title Date Aspect/ Alternative required if<br />

not the whole Drawing<br />

Surface Water Drains – Trench and<br />

Bedding Details Dec 91<br />

Filter Drains – Trench and Bedding<br />

Details Nov 03<br />

Type 2 Chamber (Precast Concrete<br />

Manhole) May 06<br />

Type 3 Chamber (Precast Concrete<br />

Manhole) May 06<br />

Type 4 Chamber (Precast Concrete<br />

Manhole) May 06<br />

93


F7<br />

Type 5 Chamber (Precast Concrete<br />

Manhole) May 06<br />

94


APPENDIX 0/5: SPECIAL NATIONAL ALTERATIONS OF THE OVERSEEING DEPARTMENT OF<br />

NORTHERN IRELAND<br />

The following Additions, Substitutions and Cancellations and minor alterations shall be made :<br />

Additional Clauses<br />

Clause No<br />

Title and written text<br />

650A<br />

Waste Management<br />

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of all waste including but not<br />

limited to spoil detritus and the like arising from all work required by or<br />

associated with the Contract. Waste shall be transported to appropriate<br />

licensed waste disposal or recycling sites. The contractor shall be responsible<br />

for all costs, charges and taxes incurred in disposal of the waste.<br />

2 The Contractor shall be aware of and comply with current Waste Management<br />

statutory obligations. Information on Waste Management and The Controlled<br />

Waste (Duty of Care) Regulations can be obtained from the Environmental<br />

and Heritage Service (Environment Protection Section) web site –<br />

www.ehsni.gov.uk and also www.greentriangle.org/<br />

3 Under the Regulations both the Contractor and Carrier (Transferor and<br />

Transferee) shall complete Controlled Waste Transfer Notes. The format of a<br />

typical “Controlled Waste Transfer Note” is set out below.<br />

4 The Controlled Waste Transfer Notes are legal documents and the Transferor<br />

and Transferee shall keep copies of these for at least two years, and make<br />

them available for inspection by the Department of the Environment and the<br />

Employer on request. A season ticket may be used, where a series of<br />

transfers of waste of the same description is being made, to the same place by<br />

the same person. In this case, one transfer note may be used covering a<br />

series of transfers.<br />

5 A summary of transfer Notes / Season Tickets shall be provided by the<br />

Contractor at six month intervals and on Completion. The summary shall<br />

include the following minimum information:-<br />

• Details of the Transferor and Transferee<br />

• Site Location and Dates of Waste Transfer<br />

• Description of Waste and European Waste Catalogue Code<br />

95


• Quantity of Waste transferred<br />

6 If the Contractor is required to transfer material (including topsoil) from one<br />

Roads Service site to another site at a different geographical location, transfer<br />

notes shall be required. Similarly, for any materials recycled off-site, an<br />

estimate of the weight of material processed, shall be indicated on transfer<br />

notes.<br />

7 Disposal of Class U1 unacceptable material (as defined in sub-Clause 601-2)<br />

shall be carried out in accordance with the “The Controlled Waste (Duty of<br />

Care) Regulations (Northern Ireland).<br />

Under the Regulations both the Contractor and Carrier (Transferor and<br />

Transferee) shall complete Controlled Waste Transfer Notes.<br />

8 If Class U2 material (as defined in sub-Clause 601-2) is encountered in the<br />

Works, it shall be disposed of in a manner to be agreed between the Contractor<br />

and the Overseeing Organisation and comply with the current Waste<br />

Management legislation in Northern Ireland.<br />

9 Certain particularly difficult or dangerous wastes (“special wastes”) are subject<br />

to additional requirements in the Special Waste Regulations (Northern Ireland)<br />

and other legislation on Road Transport of dangerous substances. The<br />

Contractor shall seek advice from the Environmental and Heritage Service at<br />

the Duty of Care help-line - 02890 546450 or at their website<br />

http://www.ni-environment.gov.uk if he has any doubts concerning applicable<br />

legislation or the constitution of dangerous waste or the identification of any<br />

waste material.<br />

Special Waste is subject to the “The Controlled Waste (Duty of Care)<br />

regulations (Northern Ireland) and the completion of the Waste Transfer Notes /<br />

Season Ticket is required in the same way as Controlled Waste.<br />

96


Cancelled Clauses<br />

Clause No.<br />

801NIC<br />

TITLE<br />

General Requirements for Unbound, Hydraulically Bound and Other Materials<br />

850NIC Granular Sub-base Material Type 3<br />

851NIC<br />

1212NIC<br />

APPENDIX<br />

AC<br />

Filter Layers<br />

Road Markings<br />

Quality management schemes<br />

Substitute Clauses<br />

1212 NIS General<br />

1. Road markings shall be white or yellow (Classes Y1 and Y2) complying with BSEN<br />

1436 Table 6 as appropriate except where an alternative shade has been specified in<br />

Appendix 12/3. The markings shall consist of continuous or intermittent lines, figures,<br />

arrows or symbols and comply with sub-clause 2 to 10 of this clause.<br />

Statutory requirements controlling road markings are contained in the Traffic Signs<br />

Regulations (Northern Ireland) 1997 and subsequent amending Regulations.<br />

Permanent Road Marking<br />

2. Permanent road markings shall be one of the following materials and comply with<br />

the colour, location and material type requirements described in Appendix 12/3:<br />

i. Thermoplastic road marking material or paint in accordance with BS EN 1871<br />

ii. Permanent preformed road marking in accordance with BS EN 1790<br />

iii. Other materials as described in Appendix 12/3 to BS EN 1871<br />

The road marking shall be tested in road trials to the Roll over class of P5 in<br />

accordance with procedure stated in BS EN 1824 to demonstrate compliance with the<br />

performance requirements as stated below.<br />

The test report shall give particulars of the quality and quantity of the material,<br />

including drop on glass beads laid at the test site for future reference and comparison<br />

purposes should such a need arise.<br />

Road Markings shall have the following road performance as defined in BS EN 1436<br />

97


for the period of the functional life starting from the date of application or when the road<br />

is trafficked, whichever is later.<br />

The materials to be used shall be to the same mix, material quality, quantity and rate of<br />

application as used on the test site.<br />

Performance Requirements<br />

3<br />

.<br />

i<br />

The Total Wear Index, at any position in the works as selected by the<br />

Overseeing Organisation, shall not exceed 30 when assessed in accordance<br />

with the recommended test for determining wear/erosion of road markings.<br />

(See Appendix 12/3)<br />

ii<br />

White road marking shall have the following minimum standard of performance<br />

as defined in BS EN 1436 for a period of 2 years from the date of application<br />

Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />

Reference<br />

Colour Table 6 White x,y co-ordinates given<br />

Luminance Table 5 Class B2 0.30<br />

Skid Resistance Table 7 Class SI 45<br />

Retro-reflectivity Table 2 Classes Class R2 100<br />

of RL for dry<br />

markings<br />

Retro-reflectivity Table 3 Class RWO No requirement<br />

iii<br />

Yellow road marking shall have the following minimum standard of performance<br />

as defined in BS EN 1436 for a period of 2 years from the date of application.<br />

Property BSEN 1436<br />

Requirement Value<br />

Reference<br />

Colour Table 6 Yellow x,y co-ordinates<br />

Luminance Table 5 Class BI 0.20<br />

Skid Resistance Table 7 Class SI 45<br />

Retro-reflectivity Table 2 Classes of RL Class R0 No requirement<br />

for dry markings<br />

Retro reflectivity Table 3 Class RWO No requirement<br />

98


iv<br />

Unless otherwise specified all white markings shall be reflectorised by<br />

incorporation into the road marking material and to the wet surface of the<br />

marking of either solid glass beads to BSEN 1423 and BSEN 1424 or other<br />

suitable qualified materials.<br />

v<br />

Where there is a requirement for enhanced retro-reflectivity, products<br />

complying with the following retro-reflectivity performance shall be used.<br />

Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />

Reference<br />

Retro-reflectivity Table 2 Class R4 200<br />

vi Where there is a requirement for enhanced wet night visibility, products<br />

showing the following retro-reflectivity performance shall be used. (Note: It<br />

should be noted that a standard material is unlikely to satisfy this requirement.)<br />

Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />

Reference<br />

Retro-reflectivity Table 3 Class RW3 50<br />

vii<br />

Where there is a special requirement for enhanced skid resistance, products<br />

complying with the following skid resistance performance shall be used as<br />

directed by the Overseeing Organisation.<br />

Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />

Reference<br />

Skid Resistance Table 7 Class S2 50<br />

Skid Resistance Table 7 Class S3 55<br />

viii<br />

Where there is a special requirement for enhanced luminance, products<br />

complying with the following luminance requirements shall be used.<br />

Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />

Reference<br />

Luminance Table 5 Class B3 0.40<br />

ix<br />

Where there is a special requirement for enhanced retro-reflectivity for yellow<br />

products, products complying with the following retro-reflectivity requirements<br />

shall be used.<br />

Property BSEN 1436 Requirement Value<br />

Reference<br />

Retro-reflectivity Table 2 Class Rl Class R1 80<br />

99


For recommended procedures for the measurement of Luminance, Skid Resistance<br />

and Retro-reflectivity refer to Appendix 12/3.<br />

It should be noted that enhanced performance in one parameter might lead to poorer<br />

performance in other parameters. It is not possible to enhance performance in all<br />

parameters simultaneously.<br />

4.The width tolerances and thickness for screed, spray, preformed and extrusion white<br />

or yellow lines shall be in accordance with the Traffic Signs Regulations (Northern<br />

Ireland) 1997. With the exception of the road markings listed in Regulation 29 (2) of<br />

the Traffic Signs Regulations (Northern Ireland) in no case shall materials be laid<br />

more than 6mm thick. Unless otherwise specified, all white markings shall be<br />

reflectorised with glass beads in accordance with BS EN 1423 and 1424 by<br />

incorporation (apart from preformed markings) into the road marking mixture and onto<br />

the wet surface of the marking.<br />

5. The pavement shall be prepared in accordance with the following:<br />

i. Where the marking is to be applied on concrete carriageways, the transverse<br />

texturing shall be freed from all traces of curing compound by wire brushing<br />

or other approved means. Prior to the application of thermoplastic material a<br />

tack coat compatible with the road surface and the marking material shall be<br />

applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.<br />

ii.<br />

On surface dressed carriageways, all loose chippings where the marking is to<br />

be applied shall be removed prior to application.<br />

6. Road marking materials shall only be applied to surfaces that are clean and dry.<br />

Markings shall be free from raggedness at their edges and shall be laid by mechanical<br />

means to a regular alignment.<br />

Raised Rib Road Markings<br />

7. Raised Rib Road Markings shall be white lines, which are continuous over the<br />

sections where they are specified in Appendix 12/3. Where specified in Appendix<br />

12/3 gaps shall be provided for drainage purposes.<br />

8.Raised Rib Road Markings shall be in accordance with the Traffic Signs Regulations<br />

(Northern Ireland) 1997, including Diagrams 1012.2 and 1012.3, as appropriate.<br />

Spacing of the transverse raised ribs shall be 500mm or 250mm as specified in<br />

Appendix 12/3.<br />

9.Raised Rib Road markings shall not be used adjacent to hatched areas or central<br />

reserve crossings except on motorways.<br />

100


Sector Schemes<br />

10. The application of permanent road markings shall be in accordance with the<br />

Sector Scheme described in Appendix AS, incorporated within this Appendix 0/5.<br />

TEMPORARY ROAD MARKINGS<br />

11. Temporary road markings shall only be adopted with the prior approval of the<br />

Engineer. They shall either comply with sub-Clauses 1 to 6 of this Clause or if<br />

required to be removable, be constructed from a proprietary preformed road marking<br />

material complying with BS EN1790<br />

12. When temporary road markings are used on surfaces that will continue to be<br />

used by public traffic after their removal, any shadow trace remaining after their<br />

removal shall be permanently obliterated. Preformed materials shall not be used for<br />

this obliteration.<br />

13 Temporary road markings constructed from a proprietary preformed road marking<br />

material shall only be adopted in locations and on types of road surface as described<br />

in Appendix 12/3 and shall comply with any other requirement therein. The marking<br />

material shall be new and together with any primer shall be stored and installed in<br />

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and within the recommended shelf<br />

life. Preformed road markings shall only be applied to surfaces that are clean and dry.<br />

Upon removal they shall be disposed of off site and if any making good is necessary<br />

to the road surface it shall be satisfactorily carried out before the road is opened to the<br />

traffic.<br />

14 Only preformed road markings which have received type approval in accordance<br />

with the requirements of BS EN 1790 shall be incorporated into the works.<br />

ROAD MARKINGS ON POROUS ASPHALT SURFACING<br />

15. Spray Paint, thermoplastic applied by machine screed, spray or extrusion or<br />

performed road markings shall be used for carriageway markings on porous asphalt<br />

surfacing. Manual screeding shall not be permitted except for directional arrows and<br />

similar markings.<br />

REMOVAL OF ROAD MARKINGS<br />

16. The removal of road markings on surfaces that will continue to be used by traffic<br />

shall be undertaken in a manner that will avoid damage to the surface.<br />

The removal of temporary road markings shall comply with sub-Clauses 1212.12 and<br />

101


1212.13.<br />

For Bituminous surface courses, the removal of permanent road markings shall be by<br />

mechanical means or forced air abrasive (shot blasting) only. Hot Compressed Air<br />

(HCA) lance shall be permitted on other types of surface courses. In all cases the<br />

contractor shall submit details of the proposed method for the Overseeing<br />

Organisation’s consent. Advice on removal methods is given in sub-Clause NG<br />

1212.12.<br />

Masking of Road Markings<br />

17. When black masking materials are required to cover existing permanent road<br />

markings, they shall either comply with BS 7962 or have received written type<br />

approval from the<br />

Overseeing Organisation and if required to be removable, be<br />

constructed from a proprietary preformed removable black masking material.<br />

The total thickness of original and masking materials shall not exceed 6mm.<br />

MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES<br />

CLAUSE No.<br />

ALTERATIONS TO BE MADE<br />

508.8NI<br />

Gullies and Pipe Junctions<br />

Add to end of sub-Clause 508.8NI the following sentence<br />

The Contractor shall guarantee the materials and workmanship for a period<br />

not less than one year from the date when traffic was allowed over the<br />

adjusted cover or grating<br />

1101.1 NI Precast Concrete Kerbs, Channels, Edgings and Quadrants<br />

Delete “C6/8 or ST1” on lines 8 and 13 and substitute with “C8/10 or ST2”<br />

1507.31 Cable Installation<br />

Delete “or all pass as” in line 3 and substitute with “pass a”.<br />

APPENDIX F<br />

PUBLICATIONS<br />

REFERRED TO<br />

IN THE<br />

SPECIFICATION<br />

9. ACTS AND STATUTORY INSTRUMENTS<br />

(ix) Add “Construction (Use of Explosives) Regulations (Northern Ireland)” to<br />

list.<br />

(xv) Add “Wildlife (Northern Ireland) Order 1985” to list.<br />

102


APPENDIX AS<br />

QUALITY MANAGEMENT SCHEMES<br />

PART 1 (As Part 1 in Appendix A unamended)<br />

PART 2 (05/01): List of Accepted Quality Management Schemes<br />

The following is the list of accepted quality management schemes referred to in Clause 104 NI, for<br />

which accreditation is currently required by the Overseeing Organisation of Northern Ireland.<br />

Scheme 2:<br />

Scheme 2B:<br />

(05/04) Supply and Erection of Fences<br />

Vehicle Restraint Systems<br />

(05/04) (National Scheme applies)<br />

Certification<br />

Bodies:<br />

(05/04) Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates<br />

against the Sector Scheme Document (SSD) for the Supply, Installation and Repair of<br />

Vehicle Restraint Systems published by UKAS on behalf of the Vehicle Restraint<br />

Systems Sector Scheme Advisory Committee are listed in Table A/2.<br />

Specification:<br />

Vehicle Restraint Systems shall be in accordance with Series 400 of the Specification,<br />

the Drawings refered to in the Contract and BS 7669 Part 3. The scheme incorporates<br />

training for the use of Temporary Vertical Concrete Barriers (TVCB) and proprietary<br />

Temporary Steel Vehicle Restraint Systems.<br />

Notes 1. (05/04) This Scheme requires training on an approved course<br />

administered by the Lantra Awards (formerly the National Fencing<br />

Training Authority (NFTA)). All Vehicle Restraint Systems lead<br />

erectors are required to carry registration/skill cards indicating what<br />

types of fencing they have been trained to erect.<br />

2. Confirmation of the accreditation status of certification bodies should<br />

be checked with UKAS.<br />

3. (05/04) Copies of the SSD are available from UKAS Publications or on<br />

request from accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is<br />

registered. It can also be accessed from the UKAS web site (<br />

www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp )<br />

103


4. (05/04) A Register of Assessed Companies is available from, and<br />

maintained by, Lantra Awards (formerly NFTA) on behalf of the<br />

advisory committee. A small charge will be made for the document.<br />

Scheme 6:<br />

The Manufacture, Supply and Verification of Lighting Columns and Bracket Arms<br />

(National Scheme applies)<br />

Certification<br />

Bodies:<br />

(05/04) Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates<br />

against the Sector Scheme Document (SSD) for the Manufacture, Supply and<br />

Verification of Lighting Columns and Bracket Arms published by UKAS on behalf of the<br />

Lighting Column Sector Scheme Technical Advisory Committee are listed in Table A/2.<br />

Specification:<br />

(05/04) The manufacture, supply and verification of lighting columns and bracket arms<br />

shall comply with Series 1300 of the Specification, Standard BD 26 (DMRB 2.2.1) and<br />

the Technical Approval Scheme adopted by the Overseeing Organisation.<br />

Not<br />

e:<br />

1. (05/04) Copies of the SSD are available from UKAS Publications or on<br />

request from accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is<br />

registered. It can also be accessed from the UKAS web site<br />

(www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp ).<br />

Scheme 7:<br />

Application of Road Marking Materials and Road Studs to Road Surfaces<br />

(National Scheme applies)<br />

Certification<br />

Bodies:<br />

Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates against<br />

the Sector Scheme Document (SSD) for the Application of Road Marking Materials and<br />

Road Studs to Road Surfaces published by UKAS on behalf of the Road Marking<br />

Sector Scheme Technical Advisory Committee are listed in Table A/2.<br />

Specification:<br />

Road marking materials shall be in accordance with Series 1200 of the Specification<br />

and shall be manufactured to comply with all of the appropriate requirements of one of<br />

the following British Standards:<br />

BS EN<br />

1423<br />

BS EN<br />

1424<br />

Road marking materials – Drop on materials – Glass beads, antiskid<br />

aggregates and mixtures of the two.<br />

Road Marking Materials – Premix glass beads<br />

104


BS EN<br />

1436<br />

BS EN<br />

1463-1<br />

BS EN<br />

1463-2<br />

BS EN<br />

1790<br />

BS EN<br />

1824<br />

BS EN<br />

1871<br />

Road marking materials – Road marking performance for road users.<br />

Road marking materials – Retroreflecting road studs – Part 1, Initial<br />

performance.<br />

Road marking materials – Retroreflecting road studs – Part 2, Road test<br />

performance specifications.<br />

Road marking materials – Preformed road markings<br />

Road marking materials – Road trials<br />

Road marking materials – Physical properties<br />

Not<br />

es:<br />

1. (05/04) The scheme requires operatives to have successfully undergone a<br />

course of approved training currently managed by RSMA in conjunction<br />

with NERO and the Local Government National Training Organisation<br />

(fomerly Local Government Management Board) and/or have achieved<br />

NVQ level 2 in Road Marking. All road marking operatives are required to<br />

carry a registration/skill card indicating what types of marking they are<br />

qualified to apply.<br />

2. Confirmation of the accreditation status of certification bodies can be<br />

obtained from UKAS.<br />

3. (05/04) Copies of the SSD are available from UKAS Publications or on<br />

request from the accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is<br />

registered. It can also be accessed from the UKAS web site<br />

(www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp ).<br />

4. (05/04) The manufacture of road marking materials to BS EN 1423, BS EN<br />

1424, BS EN 1436, BS EN 1790 and BS EN 1824 is subject to product<br />

certification requirements (see Appendix B – Marked Schemes).<br />

Scheme 13A:<br />

Supply and Application of Surface Dressings to Road Surfaces<br />

(National Scheme applies)<br />

105


Certification<br />

Bodies:<br />

Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates against<br />

the Sector Scheme Document for the Supply and Application of Surface Dressings to<br />

Road Surfaces published by UKAS on behalf of the Sector Scheme Advisory<br />

Committee for Surface Dressing are listed in Table A/2.<br />

Specification:<br />

Surface Dressing shall be in accordance with Series 900 of the Specification and the<br />

Drawings referred to in the Contract.<br />

N<br />

ot<br />

e:<br />

(05/04) Copies of the SSD are available from UKAS Publications or on request<br />

from accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is registered. It may<br />

also be accessed from the UKAS web site<br />

(www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp)<br />

Scheme 14<br />

Production of Asphalt Mixes<br />

(National Scheme applies)<br />

Certification<br />

Bodies:<br />

Certification bodies which have been accredited by UKAS to issue certificates against<br />

the Sector Scheme Document (SSD) for the Production of Asphalt Mixes, published by<br />

UKAS on behalf of the Sector Scheme Advisory Committee for the Quality Assurance<br />

of the Production of Asphalt Mixes are listed in Table A/2.<br />

Specification:<br />

The supply of asphalt shall comply with the Specification for Highway Works, in<br />

particular Series 900 and the following British Standards.<br />

BS 594<br />

Hot rolled asphalt for roads and other paved areas.<br />

Part 1. Specification for constituent materials and asphalt mixtures.<br />

Part 2. Specification for the transport, laying and compaction of rolled<br />

asphalt.<br />

BS 598<br />

Sampling and examination of bituminous mixtures for roads and other<br />

paved areas<br />

Part 100 – Methods for sampling for analysis.<br />

Part 101 – Methods for preparatory treatment of samples for analysis.<br />

Part 102 – Analytical test methods.<br />

Part 103 – Method for the recovery of soluble bitumen for examination.<br />

106


BS<br />

4987<br />

(11/03) Coated macadam (asphalt concrete) for roads and other paved<br />

areas.<br />

BS<br />

4987-1<br />

BS<br />

4987-2<br />

Part 1. Specification for constituent materials and for mixtures.<br />

Part 2. Specification for transport, laying and compaction.<br />

Not<br />

e:<br />

(05/04) Copies of the SSD are available fromUKAS Publications or on request<br />

from the accredited certification bodies with whom the Supplier is registered. It<br />

may also be accessed from the UKAS web site<br />

(www.ukas.com/information_centre/publications.asp)<br />

Address of United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) from whom details of SSDs can<br />

be obtained:<br />

United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS)<br />

21-47 High Street<br />

Feltham<br />

Middlesex<br />

TW13 4UN<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 20 8917 8400<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 20 8917 8500<br />

Addresses of Certification Bodies:<br />

(11/03) BM TRADA Certification Limited<br />

Stocking Lane<br />

Hughenden Valley<br />

High Wycombe<br />

Buckinghamshire<br />

HP14 4NR<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 1494 569700<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 1494 565487<br />

E-Mail: enquiries@bmtrada.com<br />

107


British Standards Institution<br />

389 Chiswick High Road<br />

London<br />

W4 4AL<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 20 8996 9000<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 20 8996 7400<br />

E-Mail: info@bsi.org.uk<br />

(11/03) Bureau Veritas Quality International (BVQI) Ltd<br />

2 nd Floor<br />

Tower Bridge Court<br />

224-226 Tower Bridge Road<br />

LONDON<br />

SE1 2TX<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 020 7661 0700<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 020 7661 0787<br />

E-Mail: info@bvqi.com<br />

(11/03) European Quality Assurance (EQA) Ltd<br />

Navigation House<br />

48 Millgate<br />

Newark<br />

Nottinghamshire<br />

NG24 4TY<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 1636 611226<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 1636 611704<br />

E-Mail: eqaltd@aol.com<br />

ISOQAR Ltd<br />

First Floor<br />

West Point<br />

501 Chester Road<br />

Manchester<br />

M16 9HU<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 161 877 6914<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 161 877 6915<br />

E-Mail: enquiries@isoqar.com<br />

Hiramford<br />

108


(11/03) Lloyd’s Register Quality Assurance (LRQA) Ltd<br />

Middlemarch Office Village<br />

Siskin Drive<br />

Coventry<br />

CV3 4FJ<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 2476 88 2222<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 2476 63 9493<br />

E-Mail: enquiries@lrqa.co.uk<br />

National Quality Assurance (NQA) Ltd<br />

Warwick House<br />

Houghton Hall Park<br />

Houghton Regis<br />

Dunstable<br />

LU5 5ZX<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 1582 539 000<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 1582 539 000<br />

E-Mail: enquiries@nqa.com<br />

(11/03) Moody International Certification Ltd<br />

Salisbury House<br />

Stephenson’s Way<br />

The Wyvern Business Park<br />

DERBY<br />

DE21 6LY<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 8707 529001<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 1332 675020<br />

E-Mail: jeff@moodycert.co.uk<br />

(11/03) QA International Certification Ltd<br />

Suite 2-4<br />

Cleveland Hall<br />

Cleveland Street<br />

Darlington<br />

Co Durham<br />

DL1 2PE<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 1325 384272<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 1325 480980<br />

E-Mail: ukregister@aol.com<br />

109


(11/03) SGS United Kingdom Ltd<br />

SGS House<br />

217-221 London Road<br />

Camberley<br />

Surrey<br />

GU15 3EY<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 1276 691133<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 1276 691155<br />

E-Mail: ukenquiries@sgs.com<br />

UK Certification Authority for Reinforcing Steels (CARES)<br />

Pembroke House<br />

21 Pembroke Road<br />

Sevenoaks<br />

Kent<br />

TN13 1XR<br />

Telephone: +44 (0) 1732 450000<br />

Facsimile: +44 (0) 1732 455917<br />

E Mail: general@ukcares.com<br />

110


SERIES 100 – PRELIMINARIES<br />

APPENDIX 1/1: TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE PROJECT<br />

MANAGER<br />

The temporary accommodation and equipment for the Project Manager shall be as described below:<br />

Accommodation Required<br />

The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval an office layout based on the accommodation<br />

description and shall then provide and maintain to the satisfaction of the Project Manager for the sole<br />

use of the Supervisor and his staff an office building of not less than 15 square metres total floor area.<br />

The building shall have a five-lever mortice lock and four keys are to be provided. The entrance door<br />

must contain a weatherproof letterbox at least 300 mm wide x 100 mm deep.<br />

The building shall consist of the following accommodation.<br />

Description<br />

Area (sq. metres)<br />

Office 10<br />

Kitchen 3<br />

Room with toilet and wash hand basin 3<br />

Before erecting the offices the area to be used shall be cleared of all turf and vegetation, trimmed to falls<br />

and drained to prevent accumulation of surface water. A hard standing car park for at least 4 cars shall<br />

be provided adjacent to the office with a hard track to the highway and a hard path to the office<br />

entrances.<br />

Fittings and Furnishings<br />

A supply of pure (drinking) water and an electricity supply sufficient to operate the various items listed in<br />

the Appendix or otherwise required in the Contract at any time is to be provided.<br />

The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 must be complied with in all respects in the furnishing of the<br />

Office and at any other locations on site where applicable.<br />

The buildings shall be in a good state of repair with clean and sound floor coverings and shall be<br />

weatherproof to the Project Manager’s satisfaction. It shall be furnished and equipped as detailed in the<br />

schedule below.<br />

Duration<br />

For the duration of the Contract.<br />

111


Fittings and Furnishings of Accommodation<br />

1 3 Drawer. desk with at least one lockable drawer.<br />

2 One armchair suitable for the above desk.<br />

3 4 Desk chairs.<br />

4 6 m of shelving (minimum width 225 mm)<br />

5 4 No hat and coat pegs.<br />

6 Adequate electric heating units to achieve the minimum temperature required under the<br />

Workplace (Health Safety and Welfare) Regs 1992.<br />

7 Windows complying both in area and ability to open with the Building Standards Regulations 1981<br />

with blinds and fitted with security grilles.<br />

8 Artificial electric lighting to achieve a minimum of 500 lux measured at the horizontal tops of<br />

desks.<br />

9 Lavatory (3 m x 1 m) with<br />

1 No low flush W.C.<br />

1 No wash hand basin with hot and cold tap supply.<br />

1 No mirror (600 mm x 600 mm).<br />

1 No paper towel dispenser with towels.<br />

10 Telephone/fax/photocopier connected exclusively to STD.<br />

11 Laptop Hardware<br />

Dell Precision Mobile Workstation M6500 Essential with:<br />

• English Genuine Windows® 7 Professional (64Bit OS) with recovery DVD<br />

• One Intel® Core i7-840QM(1.86GHz,8MB,Quad Core,45W) Memory runs at 1333MHz<br />

• 320GB Serial ATA (7200RPM) HDD<br />

• 8GB 1333MHz DDR3 Dual Channel (2x4GB)<br />

• 8X DVD+/-RW Drive Tray Load with Optical Software Included<br />

• 1GB nVIDIA FX2800M (with 1GB dedicated memory)<br />

• 3Yr ProSupport and Next Business Day On-Site Service<br />

• 17in Widescreen WUXGA (1920x1200)<br />

• Carry Case<br />

Laptop Software<br />

• Microsoft Office 10 Professional<br />

• McAfee SaaS Endpoint Protection<br />

• Autodesk Autocad LT 2011<br />

Accessories<br />

• HP Officejet Pro K8600 Colour Ink-jet printer - 35 ppm - 250 sheets (A3)<br />

112


• High speed mobile internet connection via usb dongle if landline internet connection is<br />

not available.<br />

• 16gb USB flash drive<br />

• Optical wireless Logitech mouse<br />

• Wireless keyboard<br />

• Port replicator (Docking station)<br />

11 1 No. approved maximum and minimum thermometer graduated in degrees centigrade.<br />

12 Hot running water in kitchen and at hand basin near toilet.<br />

13 Electric cooker.<br />

14 Fridge<br />

15 Microwave cooker.<br />

16 10 No. mugs and spoons.<br />

17 3 No. carbon dioxide fire extinguishers mounted on wall brackets.<br />

18 1 No. first aid kit complying with the requirements of the Health and Safety (First Aid) Regulations<br />

1981 for 1 to 5 employees.<br />

19 2 No. hand towels, tea towels (to be cleaned regularly) also supply of soap, washing up liquid etc.<br />

20 1 No. square mouth shovel.<br />

21 1 No. fire resistant office safe/combination lock filing cabinet.<br />

Protective clothing shall be provided:<br />

1 Approved safety helmets, white - 6 No<br />

2 Water-resistant leather boots with steel toe caps - 2 pair<br />

3 Wellington Boots with steel toe caps - 2 pair<br />

4 Breathable Weatherproof Suits with fleece lining - 3 No<br />

5 High visibility safety waist coats – 6 No<br />

Survey equipment shall be provided:<br />

1 One Sokkia, or approved equal, total survey station, Set 4C, with reflector, tripods and detail pole<br />

2 One automatic level with telescopic tripod and push button compensator control<br />

3 One 5 m long levelling staff graduated in metres and centimetres<br />

4 Two 5 metre steel tapes graduated in metres and millimetres<br />

5 Two 30 metre long plastic tapes graded in metres and millimetres<br />

6 One 50 metre long plastic tape graded in metres and millimetres<br />

7 Six, 2 metre long steel tipped ranging rods<br />

8 One metre long spirit level and one plumb-bob complete with six metres of line<br />

9 Wooden survey pegs, wax crayons, spray paint and nails as required<br />

10 Canon IXUS 210 Digital camera with 16gb memory card and case<br />

11 Photographic printing paper<br />

12 No 16 oz claw hammer<br />

13 1 No 10 lb sledge hammer<br />

14 1 set of manhole cover lifting keys<br />

113


All the above survey equipment, office fittings and furniture shall be supplied for the sole use of the<br />

Project Managers Staff for the duration of the Contract but shall remain the property of the Contractor<br />

who shall maintain it and replace it if damaged. The Contractor shall maintain the survey instruments in<br />

adjustment.<br />

The total survey station and the automatic level will be supplied with calibration certificates to show that<br />

they have been recalibrated immediately prior to use on this contract.<br />

The Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations with regard to:<br />

1 Bunding of oil storage.<br />

2 Bunded area for fuelling of plant.<br />

3 Run-off from compound<br />

4 Chemical toilets<br />

5 Collecting and disposal of waste from site (i.e. netted skips)<br />

The Contractor shall comply with the Environmental Management Plan and develop this plan as<br />

required.<br />

114


APPENDIX 1/3:<br />

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR THE PROJECT MANAGER<br />

The Contractor shall supply two new mobile phones for the sole use of the Project Managers<br />

Representatives. The telephones shall be supplied with spare batteries, battery re-charging units and<br />

hands free kits. The telephones shall be provided for the duration of the contract.<br />

All rental and call charges to be paid for by the Contractor. The terms of the rental agreement for the<br />

telephones shall be acceptable to the Project Manager. The Contractor shall demonstrate the<br />

acceptability of the proposed phones and that coverage can be achieved across the full extent of the Site<br />

before they will be considered acceptable to the Project Manager.<br />

115


APPENDIX 1/4:<br />

WORKING AND FABRICATION DRAWINGS<br />

The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager detailed working drawings for the following elements:<br />

Series Description Required by:<br />

2500<br />

Contractor Designed<br />

Retaining Walls<br />

4 weeks before start of erection of structure on site; see<br />

also requirements set out in Appendices 1/10 & 6/10.<br />

Design calculations and certificate required.<br />

1700 and<br />

1800<br />

100<br />

Contractor Designed<br />

steps and ramps<br />

Traffic Management<br />

proposals<br />

4 weeks before start of construction of slopes on site;<br />

see also requirements set out in Appendices 1/10 & 6/10<br />

Design calculations and certificate required.<br />

4 weeks prior to commencement on site.<br />

Reference should be made to Appendices 1/17 & 1/18.<br />

400<br />

Pedestrian guard rails<br />

Safety Fences<br />

4 weeks before fabrication of rails<br />

4 weeks before installation of safety fence<br />

400 Road Restraint Systems<br />

4 weeks prior to commencement on site.<br />

Systems Approval documentation will be required for all<br />

required systems. Such documentation to be submitted<br />

with fabrication drawings.<br />

116


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR<br />

General<br />

1. The Contractor shall carry out testing in accordance with Table 1/5 in this Appendix.<br />

2. Tests comparable to those specified in this Appendix will be necessary for any equivalent work,<br />

goods or materials proposed by the Contractor (see Clause 105.4).<br />

3. (N) indicates that a UKAS (NAMAS) sampling and test report or certificate is required.<br />

4. Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix test certificates for work, goods on materials as<br />

scheduled under any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />

5. Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix tests for work, goods on materials as scheduled under<br />

any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />

6. All laboratory testing shall be carried out by a testing house which is independent of the<br />

Contractor and is not within the same group of companies as the Contractor.<br />

7. Special National Alterations of the Overseeing Departments of Scotland, Wales or Northern<br />

Ireland are to be regarded as part of the main Specification clauses for the purposes of testing.<br />

8. Cube strengths are not required for concrete complying with Clause 2602.<br />

9. The main specification for testing is the Specification for Highways Works. Testing under Series<br />

500 will also require testing as detailed in the Civil Engineering Specification for the Water<br />

Industry 6 th Edition June 2004.<br />

117


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Comments<br />

Series 300<br />

306 Permanent fencing Quality management<br />

Concrete components Cover to reinforcement 1 per consignment<br />

(maximum 1 per 100<br />

components) (BS1722)<br />

scheme applies<br />

308 Gates and stiles Quality management<br />

Reinforced concrete post Cover to reinforcement 1 per consignment<br />

(maximum 1 per 100<br />

components<br />

(BS 3470)<br />

scheme applies<br />

308 &<br />

311<br />

Preservation of timber<br />

Full sapwood<br />

penetration<br />

As required in sub-<br />

Clause 311.2(v)<br />

Required for each<br />

batch<br />

Quality management<br />

scheme applies<br />

118


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Comments<br />

Series 400<br />

402 Welding Welding procedures<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

Welder qualifications<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

Production testing<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

(Every seven years) Required Quality management<br />

As required in sub-<br />

Clause 402.6 (iii)<br />

As required in sub-<br />

Clause 402.6 (iv)<br />

Welded joints Destructive testing To SHW sub-Clause<br />

403 Anchorages and attachment<br />

systems for use in drilled holes<br />

Ultimate tensile load<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

402.6(v) and 402.6(vi)<br />

404 Anchorages in drilled holes Loading test on site As required in Appendix<br />

Post foundations<br />

Required<br />

406 Vehicle parapets Required (BS<br />

407 Anchorages and attachment<br />

systems for use in drilled holes<br />

Ultimate tensile load<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

409 Vehicle parapet posts Production testing as<br />

specified in BS 6779-1<br />

1998 (AMD No 14290,<br />

21 March 2003)<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

410 Anchorages in drilled holes On-site tensile load test As required in<br />

Appendix 4/1<br />

4/1<br />

6779-1 1998<br />

(Amd. No.14290<br />

21 March 2003))<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

scheme applies<br />

For details see NG<br />

402(N)<br />

To provide well attested<br />

and documented<br />

evidence, to SHW sub-<br />

Clause 403.15<br />

Quality management<br />

scheme applies<br />

To provide well attested<br />

and<br />

documented evidence<br />

Certification in<br />

accordance with Clause<br />

409 is required<br />

119


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test<br />

Certificate<br />

Comments<br />

Series 500<br />

501 Pipes for drainage and service ducts Product certification<br />

scheme applies<br />

Vitrified Clay ` Required for<br />

pipes not quality<br />

Concrete-<br />

PC/SRC<br />

Concrete<br />

Prestressed<br />

Iron- cast<br />

Not<br />

exceeding<br />

900 mm dia<br />

marked by an<br />

UKAS or<br />

equivalaent<br />

accredited body<br />

listed in Appendix<br />

B<br />

Iron- ductile<br />

PVC-U<br />

GRP<br />

Plastics, see Table 5/1<br />

Corrugated Steel Manufacturers test Required<br />

Corrugated<br />

steel bitumen<br />

protection<br />

Not<br />

exceeding<br />

900 mm<br />

dia<br />

(AASHTO)<br />

Other materials Required BBA certification (or<br />

equivalent) applies<br />

503 Pipe Bedding Grading and fines<br />

content<br />

Water-soluble sulphate<br />

(WS) content (N)<br />

Oxidisable sulfides<br />

(OS) content and toal<br />

potential sulphate<br />

(TPS) content (N)<br />

Resistance to<br />

fragmentation (N)<br />

1 per week Required<br />

5 per source<br />

5 per source<br />

1 per source<br />

120


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause<br />

Work, Goods or<br />

Material<br />

Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test<br />

Certificate<br />

Comments<br />

Series 500 (continued)<br />

505 Filter medium backfill Plastic index (N) 1 per source Required<br />

Resistance to fragmentation (N) 1 per source<br />

Water-soluble sulphate (WS) content 5 per course<br />

(N)<br />

Oxidisable sulfides (OS) content and 5 per source<br />

total potential sulphate (TPA) content<br />

(N)<br />

Grading and fines content<br />

1 per week<br />

Permeability (N)<br />

1 per source<br />

506 Sealing existing<br />

drains<br />

Concrete<br />

Grout<br />

507 Chambers<br />

Precast concrete<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme<br />

Corrugated<br />

galvanized steel<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests) Required Product certification<br />

scheme<br />

Manhole steps<br />

Steel fitments<br />

Covers, grates<br />

and frames<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme applies<br />

Cover bolts<br />

Quality management<br />

scheme applies<br />

508 Gullies and pipe<br />

junction<br />

Product certification<br />

applies<br />

Precast concrete<br />

Clay<br />

Cast iron and<br />

steel<br />

509 Watertightness of<br />

joints<br />

Air test<br />

Pressure test<br />

All pipelines with<br />

watertight joints<br />

All watermains<br />

Required Specification for the<br />

Water Industry Section 7<br />

121


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 500 (continued)<br />

512 Backfill to pipe bays Grading 1 per 50 tonnes (min of Required<br />

3)<br />

Water-soluble sulphate<br />

(WS) content (N)<br />

Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />

content and total<br />

potential sulfate (TPA)<br />

content (N)<br />

5 per source<br />

5 per source<br />

Minimum to allow for<br />

natural variability of<br />

sulphur compounds<br />

513 Permeable backing to earth<br />

retaining structures<br />

Precast hollow concrete<br />

blocks<br />

Plastic index (N) 1 per source Required<br />

Water-soluble sulphate 5 per source Required<br />

(WS) content (N)<br />

Oxidisable sulfides (OS) 5 per source<br />

content and total<br />

potential sulphate (TPS)<br />

content (N)<br />

Resistance to<br />

1 per source<br />

fragmentation (N)<br />

Grading<br />

1 per 200 tonnes (min<br />

of 3)<br />

Permeability (N)<br />

1 per source<br />

(Manufacturer’s test)<br />

Required<br />

514 Fin Drains Manufacturer’s test Required BAA Certification (or<br />

equivalent) applies<br />

515 Narrow filter drains Manufacturer’s test Required BAA Certification (or<br />

Geotextile, pipes and<br />

fittings<br />

equivalent) applies<br />

Granular fill Plastic index (N) 1 per source<br />

Resistance to<br />

fragmentation (N)<br />

Water-soluble sulphate<br />

5 per source<br />

(WS) content (N)<br />

Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />

5 per source<br />

content and total<br />

potential sulphate (TPS)<br />

content (N)<br />

Grading and fines<br />

1 per week (Min of 3)<br />

contents<br />

Permeability (N)<br />

1 per source<br />

516 Combine drainage and kerb<br />

Load test<br />

A minimum of 1 test<br />

Required<br />

Certification that the<br />

systems<br />

and not less than 1 test<br />

systems comply with<br />

per 1000 m for each<br />

Clause 516 is required<br />

type and source<br />

122


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Frequency of<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 500 (continued)<br />

517 Linear drainage systems Load test A minimum of 1 test and<br />

not less than 1 test per<br />

100 m for each type and<br />

Required<br />

Certification that the<br />

systems comply with<br />

Clause 517 is required<br />

source<br />

518 Thermoplastic structured wall<br />

pipes and fittings<br />

(Manufacturer’s test) Required BAA Certification (or<br />

equivalent) applies<br />

123


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Series 600<br />

601, Acceptable material<br />

631 to Class General Description<br />

637, 1 General granular fill Grading/uniformity<br />

Twice a week<br />

640<br />

coefficient<br />

mc/MCV (N)<br />

2 per 1000 m 3 up to<br />

max of 5 per day<br />

SMC of chalk (N)<br />

Twice a week<br />

1C only Resistance to fragmentation Weekly<br />

(N)<br />

2 General cohesive fill Grading Twice a week<br />

mc/MCV/PL Undrained 2 per 1000 m 3 up to<br />

shear strength (N)<br />

max of 5 per day<br />

3 General Chalk fill mc (N) 2 per 1000 m 3 up to<br />

max of 5 per day<br />

4 Landscape fill Grading/mc/MCV (N) Daily<br />

5 Topsoil Grading Daily<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Required<br />

Comments<br />

6 Selected granular fill Grading/uniformity<br />

coefficient<br />

1 per 400 tonnes<br />

PL/LL(N)<br />

Resistance to fragmentation<br />

(N)<br />

Daily<br />

Weekly for on-site<br />

material*<br />

SMC (N)<br />

omc/mc, mc or MCV (N)<br />

Weekly<br />

1 per 400 tonnes<br />

Organic matter/ water<br />

soluble sulfate (WS) (N)<br />

Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />

and total potential sulphate<br />

(TPS) content (N)<br />

pH/ chloride ion contents<br />

(N)<br />

Resistivety (N)<br />

Undrained and drained<br />

shear parameters<br />

Weekly<br />

Weekly<br />

Weekly<br />

6F4<br />

and<br />

6F5<br />

Size designation and overall<br />

grading catogory<br />

Maximum fines and<br />

oversize catogories<br />

Volume stability of blast<br />

furnace slag<br />

Volume stability of steel<br />

(BOF and EAF) slag<br />

Other aggregate<br />

requirements<br />

1 per week<br />

1 per week<br />

6 monthly<br />

6 monthly<br />

Annex C of BS EN<br />

13242<br />

124


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Comments<br />

Series 600 ( Continued)<br />

Laboratory dry density and<br />

optimum water content<br />

7 Selected cohesive fill Grading/ mc/MCV/ bulk<br />

Daily<br />

Required<br />

density (N)<br />

SMC of chalk (N)<br />

Twice a week<br />

PL/LL(N)<br />

Daily<br />

Organic matter/ water<br />

Twice a week or daily<br />

soluble sulfate (WS) (N)<br />

where sulphates are<br />

expected<br />

Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />

Twice a week or daily<br />

and total potential sulphate<br />

where sulphates are<br />

(TPS) content (N)<br />

expected<br />

pH/ chloride ion contents<br />

Weekly<br />

(N)<br />

Resistivety (N)<br />

[As Required]<br />

Undrained and drained<br />

[As Required]<br />

shear parameters<br />

Permeability (N)<br />

[As Required]<br />

8 Miscellaneous fill mc/MCV (N) Daily<br />

9 Stabilised materials Pulverisation 1 per lane width per<br />

mc/MCV/PL (N)<br />

Bearing ratio (N)<br />

200 m length<br />

Pulvarised ash Chemical analysis 1 per consignment<br />

Furnace bottom ash Grading 1 per 300 tonnes<br />

Fill adjecent to cementatious<br />

Water-soluble sulphate<br />

1 per 400 tonnes or per<br />

materials or metalic items<br />

(WS) content, oxidisable<br />

location if less than 400<br />

sulfides (OS) and total<br />

tonnes<br />

potential sulphate (TPS)<br />

content (N)<br />

Earthworks material beneath<br />

surface of a road or paved<br />

central<br />

reserve<br />

Frost heave (N)<br />

Required<br />

(i) Off site source<br />

1 every four months*<br />

(ii) On site source<br />

As required<br />

125


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 600 (continued)<br />

609<br />

621<br />

Geotextiles Tensile load 1 per 400 square<br />

Permeability<br />

Pore size<br />

metres<br />

Required<br />

612 Compaction of fills Required<br />

Method compaction Field dry density (N) As required<br />

End product compaction<br />

614 Cement stabilisation to form<br />

capping<br />

Optimum mc (2.5 kg<br />

rammer/vibrating<br />

hammer method) (N)<br />

Field dry density (N)<br />

Rate of spread of cement<br />

Each class or sub class<br />

of material*<br />

1 per 400 tonnes<br />

1 per 500 square<br />

meters of cement<br />

spread<br />

Required<br />

615<br />

641<br />

643<br />

622<br />

638<br />

639<br />

Lime stabilisation to form capping Rate of spread of lime 1 per 500 square<br />

meters of lime spread<br />

Earthworks for reinforced soil and<br />

anchored earth structures<br />

Available lime content<br />

Redox potential<br />

Each source of lime<br />

weekly during the<br />

stabilisation operation<br />

5 locations withinthe<br />

affected area<br />

Drainage layers Grading 1 per 400 tonnes<br />

Chemical Analysis<br />

Required<br />

Reinforcing elements Coeff. Of friction Each type of element<br />

with each type of fill<br />

Anchor elements<br />

Adhesion<br />

624 Ground anchorages Proof loading As required in Appendix<br />

6/10<br />

Required<br />

626 Gabions Required<br />

Fill Grading 1 per 400 tonnes<br />

Geomesh<br />

PVC coated wire<br />

642 Earthworks materials for<br />

corrugated steel buried<br />

structures<br />

10% fine values (N) Each class or sub class<br />

Constrained soil<br />

modulus (M)<br />

of material<br />

1 per 400 square<br />

metres<br />

3 on each side<br />

ofeach structure<br />

Required<br />

(ASTM G23)<br />

Required<br />

126


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Comments<br />

Series 800<br />

801<br />

General requirements for unbound<br />

Water-soluble sulphate<br />

1 per 400 tonnes or<br />

Required<br />

803<br />

mixtures for adjacent to cement bound<br />

(WS) content (N)<br />

per location if less than<br />

804<br />

materials, concrete pavements,<br />

400 tonnes<br />

805<br />

806<br />

structures or products<br />

Oxidisable sulfides (OS)<br />

content and total<br />

1 per 400 tonnes or<br />

per location if less than<br />

potential sulphate (TPA)<br />

400 tonnes<br />

content (N)<br />

Unbound mixture beneath surface of a<br />

Frost heave (N)<br />

1 per source<br />

road or paved central reserve<br />

Grading and fines<br />

1 per week<br />

content<br />

Plastic index (N)<br />

Resistance to<br />

6 monthly<br />

fragmentation (N)<br />

Resistance to wear<br />

micro-Deval test<br />

Resistance to freezing<br />

1 per source<br />

and thawing<br />

(magnesium sulphate<br />

soundness) (N)<br />

Water absorption (N)<br />

Volume stability of blast<br />

6 monthly<br />

furnace slags<br />

Volume stability of steel<br />

6 monthly<br />

(BOF and EAF) slags<br />

CBR (N)<br />

1 per sources and then<br />

monthly<br />

OMC/mc (N)<br />

Density (N)<br />

Water absorption (N)<br />

821,<br />

822,<br />

823,<br />

830,<br />

831,<br />

832,<br />

834,<br />

835,<br />

840<br />

Cement and other<br />

Hydraulically Bound Mixtures<br />

(HBM)<br />

Cement and other<br />

Hydraulically Bound<br />

Mixtures<br />

(HBM)<br />

Coefficient of linear<br />

expansion<br />

Tests for laboratory<br />

mixture design<br />

Tests specified in<br />

Table 8/14 and<br />

Table 8/15<br />

Tests for laboratory<br />

mixture design<br />

Required<br />

127


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Frequency of<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 900<br />

901<br />

925<br />

937<br />

938<br />

943<br />

Aggregates for bituminous materials Required National quality<br />

management sector<br />

schemes apply<br />

Resistance to<br />

fragmentation (hardness)<br />

Resistance to freezing and<br />

thawing (durability<br />

Cleanness<br />

Resistance to<br />

Monthly<br />

fragmentation (N)<br />

Soundness (N)<br />

1 per source<br />

Water absorption (N)<br />

Sieve test (mass Monthly<br />

passing 0.063 mm<br />

sieve) (N)<br />

Washing and sieving<br />

method to be used<br />

Shape Flakiness index (N) Monthly<br />

Blastfurnace slag Bulk density (N) 1 per 500 tonnes<br />

Soundness (N)<br />

Once every 4 months<br />

Dicalcium silicate 1 per 500 tonnes<br />

disintegration (N)<br />

Iron disintegration (N)<br />

Steel slag Bulk density 1 per 500 tonnes Required<br />

Volume stability (N) 1 per 500 tonnes<br />

Coarse aggregate for Resistance to polishing 1 per source<br />

surface courses<br />

(PSV) (N)<br />

Resistance to surface 1 per source<br />

abrasion (AAV) (N)<br />

Binders for bituminous materials Penetration (N)<br />

Softening point (N)<br />

1 per 750 tonnes<br />

1 per 750 tonnes<br />

Required National quality<br />

management section<br />

schemes apply.<br />

Modified binders should<br />

have a BBA HAPAS<br />

Roads and Bridges<br />

Certificate. In the event<br />

that no such<br />

Certificates have been<br />

issued, then in the<br />

interim, only modified<br />

binders undergoing<br />

BBA assessment<br />

should be considered<br />

for approval by the<br />

Project Manager.<br />

128


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 900 (Continued)<br />

903 to<br />

907,<br />

909 to<br />

912,<br />

914,<br />

916,<br />

925,<br />

926,<br />

929,<br />

937,<br />

938,<br />

942,<br />

943,<br />

946 to<br />

948<br />

Bituminous mixtures Grading (N) For Audit Test purpose<br />

929 Base and Binder Course<br />

Asphalt Concrete (Design<br />

Mixtures)<br />

Binder Content (N)<br />

Permanent Works -<br />

In situ air void<br />

content (N)<br />

Permanent Works -<br />

Refusal air void<br />

content (N)<br />

Permanent Works -<br />

Deformation<br />

resistance<br />

only<br />

Required<br />

National Highway Sector<br />

Schemes apply.<br />

Deformation<br />

resistance (design)<br />

Stiffness (design)<br />

930 EME 2 Permanent Works -<br />

In situ air void<br />

content (N)<br />

Richness modulus<br />

(design)<br />

Duriez (design)<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

The test certificate is the<br />

CE Mark for the mixture<br />

The test certificate is the<br />

CE Mark for the mixture<br />

Deformation<br />

Resistance (design)<br />

Stiffness (design)<br />

911 Hot Rolled Asphalt surface<br />

course (Design Mixtures)<br />

Design Binder<br />

content<br />

1 per source Required The test certificate is the<br />

CE Mark for the mixture<br />

915 Coated chippings for<br />

application to Hot Rolled<br />

Asphalt Surfacings<br />

Hot sand test (N) 1 per source National Highway Sector<br />

Schemes apply.<br />

Rate of spread (N)<br />

129


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 900 (Continued)<br />

921 Surface macrotexture Volumetric Patch (N) Required<br />

924 High friction surfaces Quality control checks As required in sub-<br />

Aggregate<br />

937 Stone mastic asphalt<br />

(SMA) binder course and<br />

regulating course<br />

System coverage<br />

Resistance to polishing<br />

(PSV) (N)<br />

Permanent Works - In<br />

situ air void content (N)<br />

Clause 924.5<br />

As required in sub-<br />

Clause 924.6<br />

1 per source and as<br />

required for coated<br />

chippings in sub-Clause<br />

915.3<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

BBA HAOAS Roads and<br />

Bridges certification (or<br />

equivalent) applies<br />

Permanent Works -<br />

Deformation resistance<br />

Binder drainage test<br />

(design)<br />

Required<br />

The test certificate is the<br />

CE Mark for the mixture<br />

Deformation resistance<br />

(design)<br />

942 Thin surface course<br />

systems<br />

943 Hot Rolled Asphalt<br />

surface course and binder<br />

course (performancerelated<br />

design mixtures)<br />

General properties Required The test certificate is in<br />

the form of a BBA<br />

HAPAS Certificate<br />

Permanent Works -<br />

In situ air void content<br />

(N)<br />

Permanent Works -<br />

Deformation resistance<br />

Required<br />

Deformation resistance<br />

(design)<br />

Required<br />

The test certificate is the<br />

CE Mark for the mixture<br />

918 Slurry surfacing<br />

incorporating microsurfacing<br />

Binder<br />

Modified binders should<br />

have a BBA HAPAS<br />

Roads and Bridges<br />

Certificate. In the event<br />

that no such Certificates<br />

have been issued, then<br />

in the interim, only<br />

modified<br />

binders undergoing BBA<br />

assessment should be<br />

considered for approval<br />

by the Overseeing<br />

Organisation.<br />

Product Identification<br />

Per product per<br />

source<br />

Required<br />

Tests are expected to be<br />

repeated every two years<br />

130


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 900 (Continued)<br />

Vialit cohesion<br />

Per product per<br />

source<br />

Required<br />

Tests are expected to be<br />

repeated every two years<br />

Rate of spread For each machine Required Not more than 6 weeks<br />

prior to start of work<br />

Penetration at 25oC<br />

and 5oC (N)<br />

Every manufactured<br />

batch<br />

Manufacturer’s QA test<br />

results may be submitted<br />

Aggregates Flakiness index (N) 1 per source Required<br />

Resistance to<br />

polishing (AAV) (N)<br />

Source approval<br />

Required<br />

Resistance to surface<br />

abrasion (AAV) (N)<br />

Source approval<br />

Required<br />

Grading (N) 1 per 200 tonnes Required<br />

System<br />

TAIT or BBA/<br />

HAPAS<br />

Required<br />

920 Bond coats, tack coats and other<br />

bituminous sprays<br />

Binder Product identification 1 per product per<br />

source<br />

Required<br />

Tests are expected to be<br />

repeated every two years<br />

Vialit cohesion<br />

1 per product per<br />

source<br />

Required<br />

Tests are expected to be<br />

repeated every two years<br />

Accuracy of spread<br />

1 for each binder and<br />

sprayer per month<br />

Required<br />

Not more than 6 weeks<br />

prior to start of work and<br />

one per month<br />

Rate of spread<br />

1 per week<br />

Penetration at 25ºC and<br />

5ºC (N)<br />

Every manufactured<br />

batch<br />

Manufacturer’s QA test<br />

results may be<br />

submitted.<br />

131


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 900 (Continued)<br />

919<br />

922 Surface Dressing National quality<br />

management sector<br />

scheme applies<br />

Binder<br />

Chippings<br />

Product Identification<br />

Vialit cohesion (N)<br />

Accuracy of spread<br />

Rate of spread<br />

Penetration at 25ºC and<br />

5ºC (N)<br />

Resistance to (PSV)<br />

polishing (N)<br />

Resistance to abrasion<br />

(AAV) (N)<br />

1 per product per<br />

source<br />

1 per product per<br />

source<br />

1 for each binder<br />

sprayer per week<br />

Every 1000 linear<br />

metres initially<br />

Every batch<br />

Source approval<br />

Source approval<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Grading (N) 1 per 200 tonnes Required<br />

Modified binders should<br />

have a BBA HAPAS<br />

Roads and Bridges<br />

Certificate. In the event<br />

that no such Certificates<br />

have been issued, then<br />

in the interim, only<br />

modified<br />

binders undergoing BBA<br />

assessment should be<br />

considered for approval<br />

by the Overseeing<br />

Organisation.<br />

Tests are expected to be<br />

repeated every two years<br />

Tests are expected to be<br />

repeated every two years<br />

Not more than 6 weeks<br />

prior to start of work and<br />

one per week<br />

Frequency to be reduced<br />

to daily after 3<br />

satisfactory results, but<br />

not less than 1 test per<br />

site<br />

For cut back binders as<br />

supplied, manufacturer’s<br />

QA viscosity test results<br />

may be submitted.<br />

Binder content (N) 1 per 200 tonnes Required Coated chippings only<br />

Flakiness index (N) 1 per 200 tonnes Required<br />

Accuracy of spread (N)<br />

Rate of spread<br />

1 for each chipping<br />

spreader for every<br />

change of chipping size<br />

of source<br />

Every 500 linear metres<br />

initially<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

System TAIT or BBA/HAPAS Required<br />

Rollers Spray bars working Before work starts and<br />

daily during works<br />

Initial test not more than<br />

6 week prior to start of<br />

work<br />

Frequency to be reduced<br />

to daily after 3<br />

satisfactory results, but<br />

not less than 1 test per<br />

lane per site<br />

950 Depressions BBA HAPAS Roads and<br />

Bridges certification (or<br />

equivalent) applies<br />

132


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 1000<br />

1001<br />

1030<br />

1044<br />

Cement Required Quality management and<br />

product certification<br />

schemes apply<br />

Portland cement CEM 1<br />

Tests and test<br />

certificates are required<br />

Portland blastfurnace<br />

cement<br />

Blastfurnace cement<br />

CEM 111/A<br />

Portland pfa cement<br />

CEM 11/B-V<br />

Pozzolanic cement CEM<br />

Required (BS 6610)<br />

IV/A<br />

Portland cement with<br />

microsilica<br />

Required<br />

BBA Roads and Bridges<br />

Certificate required for<br />

microsilica<br />

Pulverised-fuel ash<br />

Tests and test<br />

Ground granulated blast furnace<br />

slag<br />

Admixtures<br />

certificates are required.<br />

Product certification<br />

schemes apply to pfa<br />

Mixing Water Sulfate content (N) Monthly<br />

and slag<br />

Aggregates<br />

Resistance to freezing<br />

and thawing –<br />

magnesium sulphate<br />

soundness (N)<br />

1 per source Required<br />

Water absorption (N)<br />

Flakiness index [N)<br />

Shell content (N)<br />

Resistance to<br />

fragmentation (N)<br />

Resistance to abrasion<br />

(AAV) (N)<br />

Grading and fines<br />

content (N)<br />

Chloride content (N)<br />

Total sulphur (TS) and<br />

acid-soluble sulphate<br />

(AS) content (N)<br />

Monthly*<br />

1 per source*<br />

6 monthly<br />

1 per source*<br />

1 per week per source* Required<br />

Weekly or as otherwise<br />

agreed (1 per source for<br />

CBM Aggregate)<br />

Every 6 months<br />

133


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of<br />

Series 1000 (Continued)<br />

Flint coarse aggregate<br />

containing white flints<br />

Sand (ie fine aggregate)<br />

Water absorption (N)<br />

Acid-soluble material<br />

(N)<br />

Testing<br />

3 per source<br />

thereafter weekly<br />

Monthly*<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Required<br />

Comments<br />

Not required for CBM<br />

Aggregate<br />

Blastfurnace slag Bulk density (N) Every 6 months<br />

Every 6 months<br />

Dicalcium silicate<br />

disintegration (N)<br />

Every 6 months<br />

Iron disintegration (N)<br />

Total sulfur (TS) and<br />

acid-soluble sulfate<br />

(AS) content (N)<br />

Every 6 months<br />

Pulverised-fuel ash<br />

Required<br />

(BS 3892-2)<br />

1002<br />

1003<br />

1004<br />

1044<br />

Pavement concrete<br />

Air content test (N)<br />

Density (N)<br />

Strength (N)<br />

As required in<br />

Table 10/10<br />

As required in<br />

Table 10/10<br />

As required in<br />

Table 10/10<br />

Required<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme applies<br />

1005 Consistence (Workability)<br />

Degree of<br />

Compactability<br />

(Compaction Index)<br />

(N)<br />

Vebe (N)<br />

As required in<br />

Table 10/10<br />

Required<br />

Slump (N)<br />

1011<br />

1012<br />

Dowel bars<br />

Tie bars<br />

Required<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme applies<br />

Dowel bars and<br />

Load test<br />

1 per arrangement*<br />

supporting cradles<br />

Sheathed dowel bars Bond stress 4 bars<br />

Cranked tie bars Bend test<br />

4 bars*<br />

(coated)<br />

Salt fog cabinet<br />

4 bars*<br />

1015 Joint filler board Weathering test 3 per source Required Normally undertaken by<br />

Compression and 4 per source<br />

manufacturer<br />

recovery<br />

Extrusion<br />

1 per source<br />

Cork filled board Immersion in water 2 per source<br />

Immersion in acid 2 per source<br />

134


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Series 1000 (Continued)<br />

1016<br />

1017<br />

1026<br />

1044<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Applied sealants Initial Penetration 1 per 1000 m<br />

Compression seals<br />

Self expanding cork seal<br />

Resilience<br />

Compression set<br />

Immersion in oil<br />

Tests specified in Clause<br />

1017<br />

Surface macrotexture BS EN 13036-1<br />

Volumetric Patch<br />

Technique (N)<br />

or 1 per day<br />

1 per 1000 m<br />

or 1 per day<br />

1 per type of seal<br />

1 per type of seal<br />

1 per type of seal Require<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Required<br />

(BS EN 14188-1,<br />

BS 2499-2,<br />

BS 5212-1,<br />

BS 5212-2)<br />

(BS EN 13880-2,<br />

BS EN 13880-3,<br />

and BS 4254)<br />

1 per day (set of 10) Required<br />

1027 Aluminised curing compound Efficiency index 1 per source Required<br />

1030 Wet lean concrete Density As required in Table<br />

Cube strength (N)<br />

10/9<br />

Required<br />

(ASTM D2628)<br />

(BS 2752)<br />

(BS 4443-4,<br />

Method 10 and<br />

BS EN ISO 2440)<br />

(BS EN ISO 1856)<br />

(BS 903: Part A16<br />

or BS ISO 1817)<br />

Required<br />

1043 Foamed Concrete Cube strength (N) 2 cubers per 12 m3 Required<br />

Comments<br />

135


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Comments<br />

SERIES 1100<br />

*1101 Precast concrete kerbs,<br />

channels, edgings and quadrants<br />

Bending strength Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />

units of each product<br />

(BS EN 1340)<br />

1104 Precast concrete flags Bending strength Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />

Bedding<br />

Granular material<br />

Mortar<br />

m 2 of each product (BS<br />

EN 1339)<br />

1107 Concrete block paving Compressive strength Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />

1108 Clay pavers<br />

Bending strength<br />

Skid resistance<br />

m 2 of each product (BS<br />

EN 1338)<br />

Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />

m2 of each product<br />

(BS EN 1344)<br />

Minimum of 8 per 1000<br />

m2 of each product<br />

(BS EN 1344)<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

Required<br />

136


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test<br />

Frequency of<br />

Testing<br />

Test Certificate<br />

Comments<br />

Series 1200<br />

1202 Permanent traffic signs Required Quality management<br />

scheme applies.<br />

Certification that the<br />

traffic sign is capable of<br />

passing the test in BS<br />

873 : Part 1 is required<br />

1207 Anchorage in drilled holes to Loading test on site<br />

supports of traffic signs<br />

1210 Holding down bolts and<br />

anchorages to bases of<br />

permanent bollards<br />

Required<br />

Certification that the<br />

holding down bolts and<br />

anchorages are capable<br />

of complying with the<br />

performance<br />

requirements of BS 873 :<br />

Part 3 is required<br />

1212 Road Markings National quality<br />

Tests specified in BS EN<br />

Required<br />

management sector<br />

1824<br />

scheme applies.<br />

Procedures are given in<br />

BS EN 1824<br />

Glass Beads Arsenic trioxide<br />

One per contract and/ Required<br />

content, Lead<br />

content and<br />

Antimony content (N)<br />

or<br />

per specific source of<br />

supply<br />

1214 Permanent traffic cones and<br />

traffic cylinders<br />

Required<br />

Certification that<br />

permanent traffic cones<br />

and cylinders have been<br />

tested and comply with<br />

BS EN 13422 is<br />

required<br />

Tests specified in<br />

BS 873: Part 8<br />

2 of each size<br />

And category/type<br />

Flat traffic delineators Required Certification that FTD’s<br />

have been tested and<br />

comply with Clause 1214<br />

is required<br />

Tests specified in<br />

Clause 1214<br />

Other traffic delineators<br />

Tests specified in<br />

Appendix 12/4<br />

Certification that the<br />

delineators have been<br />

tested and comply with<br />

Clause 1214 is required<br />

Tests specified in<br />

Appendix 12/4<br />

137


Temporary cones, cylinders,<br />

FTD’s and other delineators<br />

Required<br />

Certification that at least<br />

1 in 500 of any batch of<br />

cones, cylinders, TDF’s<br />

and other delineators to<br />

be used in the<br />

Temporary works have<br />

passed the tests in<br />

Clause 1214 as<br />

appropriate is required<br />

138


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 1300<br />

1305 Anchorages for use in drilled<br />

Tensile load<br />

Required<br />

To provide well attested<br />

holes<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

and documented<br />

evidence<br />

1306 Anchorages in drilled holes to<br />

Loading test on site<br />

columns and masts with flange<br />

plates<br />

1310 Welding Welding procedures<br />

Every seven years<br />

Quality management<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

scheme applies<br />

Welder qualification<br />

(Sub-Clauses 1310.1<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

and 1310.2 (7.13))<br />

Production testing<br />

(Sub-Clauses 1310.1<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

and 1310.2 (7.14))<br />

Welded joints<br />

Destructive testing<br />

1313 GFRP laminates Loss on ignition 1 per 50 production<br />

columns<br />

Colour fastness<br />

1 per batch<br />

Electric strength<br />

Water absorption<br />

Impact strength<br />

1314 Brackets for laminated GFRP<br />

lighting columns<br />

Required<br />

Polyurethane foam Bulk density 1 per batch<br />

Surface hardness<br />

Apparent bulk density 2 per batch<br />

Impact strength<br />

Flexural stress<br />

139


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 1400<br />

1421 Cable<br />

1424 Lighting Units Tests specified in<br />

Clause 1424<br />

Networks<br />

Tests specified in<br />

Clause 1424<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme applies<br />

Each unit Required Product certification<br />

scheme applies<br />

Certification that the<br />

installation complies with<br />

BS 7671 (the IEE Wiring<br />

Regulations) is required<br />

Each network Required Certification that the<br />

installation complies with<br />

BS 7671 (the IEE Wiring<br />

Regulations) is required<br />

140


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 1600<br />

1601 Soil samples<br />

In situ soil tests<br />

Required<br />

1602<br />

to<br />

1606<br />

1610<br />

to<br />

1615<br />

Concrete<br />

Grout<br />

Reinforcement<br />

Prestressing<br />

Steelwork<br />

Welding<br />

Protection against corrosion<br />

Required<br />

1608 Integrity Testing Sonic Echo Every pile Required<br />

141


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 1700<br />

1702<br />

1704<br />

Cement types as stated in sub-<br />

Clause 1702.1<br />

Required<br />

Certificate to be provided<br />

monthly * for each type<br />

of cement.<br />

Quality management and<br />

product certification<br />

schemes apply<br />

Cements (all types) Chloride content Monthly Tests to be carried out by<br />

Pulverised-fuel ash Sulfate content Monthly<br />

the manufacturer and<br />

Ground granulated blastfurnace<br />

slag<br />

Acid-soluble alkali<br />

content<br />

Daily (PC)<br />

Weekly (pfa ggbs)<br />

results included on the<br />

test certificates required<br />

above.<br />

Aggregates<br />

Grading and fines<br />

content<br />

Shell content (N)<br />

1 per week (per source)<br />

Monthly<br />

Results of routine control<br />

tests from the factory<br />

production control<br />

Flakiness index (N) Monthly<br />

system operated by the<br />

Resistance to<br />

Every 6 months<br />

producer to be provided<br />

fragmentation (N)<br />

Drying shrinkage (N) 1 per 5 years<br />

– see Annex H of BS EN<br />

12620<br />

Chloride content (N) 1 per week or as<br />

otherwise agreed<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme applies<br />

Sulfate content (N) Yearly<br />

Blasfurnace slag Bulk density (N) Every 6 months<br />

Stability (N)<br />

Every 6 months<br />

Sulfur content (N) Every 6 months<br />

142


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

1702<br />

Water<br />

Tests specified in BS EN<br />

1704<br />

1008<br />

Monthly<br />

continu<br />

Chloride content<br />

Monthly<br />

ed<br />

Sulfate content<br />

Weekly<br />

Acid-soluble alkali<br />

content<br />

Admixtures Chloride content 1 per consignment Required<br />

(BS 934-2)<br />

Sulfate content<br />

Acid-soluble alkali<br />

content<br />

1 per consignment<br />

1 per consignment<br />

Required<br />

1707 Concrete Cube strength (N) Prestressed concretetwo<br />

cubes from 12 m³ or<br />

2 batches whichever<br />

represents the lesser<br />

volume<br />

Reinforced concrete –<br />

four cubes from 24 m³ or<br />

4 batches whichever<br />

represents the lesser<br />

volume but minimum of 4<br />

for every day concrete is<br />

delivered to site<br />

Mass concrete-two<br />

cubes from 50m³ or 50<br />

batches whichever<br />

represents the lesser<br />

volume<br />

Additional cubes for<br />

special purposes<br />

Required<br />

Contractor to cast and<br />

test sufficient additional<br />

cubes to demonstrate<br />

cube strength before<br />

transfer<br />

Cube strength-identity<br />

2 cubes from each of two<br />

testing as described in<br />

samples of each batch<br />

Appendix 17/4 (N)<br />

Density<br />

Modulus of elasticity<br />

Fresh concrete<br />

Consistence (slump or<br />

Each batch<br />

Required<br />

compacting factor or<br />

Vebe) (N)<br />

Air content<br />

Each batch<br />

Cement content<br />

Water/cement ratio<br />

1709 Silane Required for each<br />

delivery<br />

Refractive Index<br />

Three samples<br />

Certification that the<br />

silane complies with<br />

Clause 1709 is required<br />

Trial panels, where<br />

required in the Contract<br />

143


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

1710 Concrete packing<br />

Mortar packing<br />

Epoxy resin bonding agent<br />

Precast concrete<br />

Manufactured off Site<br />

1712 Reinforcement<br />

Cube strength<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

Contractor to make<br />

available records of tests<br />

by the manufacturer<br />

Steel bars<br />

Required<br />

(BS 4449)<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme applies<br />

Steel wire<br />

Required<br />

(BS 4482)<br />

Steel fabric<br />

Required<br />

(BS 4483)<br />

Stainless steel<br />

Required<br />

(BS 6744)<br />

1713 Fabricated reinforcement Required Certification that<br />

fabricated reinforcement<br />

complies with the routine<br />

inspection/testing<br />

requirements of BS 8666<br />

is required if the<br />

fabrication is not covered<br />

by a product certification<br />

scheme listed in<br />

Appendix B<br />

1716 Reinforcement jointing systems Permanent elongation<br />

Characteristic strength<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

Required for each<br />

type of connection<br />

BBA Roads and Bridges<br />

certificate or CARES<br />

certificate of product<br />

assessment or fully<br />

equivalent scheme apply<br />

144


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

1717 Reinforcement metal arc welding Welding procedure<br />

approval (BS 7123)<br />

Welder approval<br />

(BS 7123)<br />

As required in BS 7123<br />

Tests should be carried<br />

out by an independent<br />

testing body specified in<br />

BS 8666<br />

1718 Prestressing tendons Product certification<br />

scheme apply<br />

Steel wire<br />

Steel bar<br />

Seven- wire strand<br />

Prestressing steel<br />

Proof load<br />

(all types)<br />

Breaking load<br />

Elongation<br />

Ductility<br />

Relaxation<br />

Modulus of elasticity<br />

Super strand to BS 5896 0.1% proof load<br />

or other than lowest Breaking load<br />

strength 3-7 mm dia<br />

wires to BS 5896<br />

1724 Post-tensioning anchorages Tests in accordance<br />

with BS EN 13391<br />

(Manufacturer’s tests)<br />

Each reel<br />

Required<br />

(BS 5896)<br />

Required<br />

(BS 4486)<br />

Required<br />

(BS 5896)<br />

Required<br />

(BS EN 13391)<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme<br />

applies<br />

1726 Stainless steel bar Required<br />

(BS 6744)<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme<br />

applies<br />

1727 Inspection and testing of<br />

structures and components<br />

145


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 1900<br />

1910 Metal spray coatings Tensile test specified<br />

in BS EN 22063<br />

Stability value<br />

Grid test specified in<br />

BS EN 22063<br />

1911<br />

1911SE<br />

Paints<br />

‘A’ and ‘B’ Samples<br />

specific gravity<br />

Colour match<br />

Composition<br />

Application<br />

characteristics<br />

146


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 2000<br />

2003 Permitted waterproofing systems Registration and BBA<br />

Roads and Bridges<br />

Agreement certification<br />

apply<br />

Additional bituminous protection Tests specified in<br />

BS 594 : Part 1<br />

1 per 15 tonnes Sampling to comply with<br />

BS 594 : Part 1<br />

Stability value<br />

Test specified in<br />

BS 596 : Part 107<br />

2004 Tar Tests specified in<br />

BS 76<br />

Cut back bitumen<br />

Tests specified in<br />

BS 3690 : Part 1<br />

1 per 15 tonnes<br />

1 per source Sampling to comply with<br />

BS 76<br />

1 per source Sampling to comply with<br />

BS 3690 : Part 1<br />

147


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 2400<br />

2401 Masonry cement Required<br />

(BS EN 413-1)<br />

Quality management<br />

scheme applies<br />

Chloride content Monthly Required Test to be carried out by<br />

2402 Sand Required per<br />

2403 Water Tests specified in<br />

consignment<br />

(BS EN 13139)<br />

the manufacturer and<br />

results included on the<br />

test certificate<br />

Chloride content Monthly Test to be carried out by<br />

BS EN 1008<br />

2404 Mortar admixtures Required<br />

(BS EN 934-3)<br />

2405 Lime Required<br />

(BS EN 459-1)<br />

2406 Bricks<br />

the manufacturer and<br />

results included on the<br />

test certificate<br />

Clay<br />

(Soluble salt content<br />

Efflorescence<br />

Compressive strength<br />

Water absorption Initial<br />

rate of suction )<br />

(BS 3921/TRL Report<br />

447)<br />

Calcium silicate Required (BS 187)<br />

2407 Blocks<br />

Concrete<br />

Required<br />

(BS 6073-1/BS EN<br />

772-2)<br />

2410<br />

2411<br />

Concrete<br />

Stainless steel<br />

Wire/fabric<br />

Bars<br />

Ready mixed mortars<br />

Mortars<br />

Tests specified in<br />

Appendix A1 of<br />

BS EN 10521-1<br />

1 set of tests per mix<br />

Required<br />

(BS 6073 :Part 1)<br />

Required<br />

(BS EN 10088-1)<br />

Required<br />

(BS 6744)<br />

Required<br />

(BS 4721)<br />

148


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 2500<br />

2501<br />

Materials for corrugated steel<br />

buried structures exceeding<br />

900 mm clear span or internal<br />

diameter<br />

Type approval applies<br />

Steel components<br />

Zinc coating<br />

Protective coating<br />

Paved invert system<br />

2502 Materials for reinforcing<br />

elements, prefabricated facing<br />

and capping units, and<br />

washers<br />

Carbon steel strip<br />

Required as<br />

appropriate to the<br />

standard or<br />

specification listed<br />

in the type<br />

approval<br />

Certificate<br />

Required<br />

(BS 1449: Part 1.1<br />

or BS EN 10025-1<br />

and<br />

BS EN 10025-2)<br />

BBA Roads and Bridges<br />

Certification applies<br />

BBA Roads and Bridges<br />

Certification applies<br />

Silicon content and<br />

mechanical properties to<br />

be stated on the<br />

certificate<br />

Stainless steel strip<br />

Required<br />

(BS EN 10029,<br />

10048, 10051,<br />

10258 and 10259)<br />

Mechanical properties to<br />

be stated on the<br />

certificate<br />

Reinforcing bar for anchor<br />

elements<br />

Required<br />

(BS 4449)<br />

Tests scheduled under<br />

Clauses 1717 and 1909<br />

are required for welding<br />

and galvanizing of<br />

anchor<br />

elements<br />

Materials for fasteners<br />

Stainless steel<br />

Required<br />

(BS EN 10088-1)<br />

(BS EN ISO<br />

3506-1 and 3506-<br />

2)<br />

Bolts, screws and nuts<br />

Required<br />

(BS EN ISO 898,<br />

4016, 4018, 4034)<br />

Tests scheduled under<br />

Clause 1909 are required<br />

for hot dip galvanizing<br />

149


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 2500<br />

2503 Materials for pocket type<br />

reinforced brickwork<br />

retaining wall structures<br />

Clay bricks<br />

(Soluble salt content<br />

Efflorescence<br />

Compressive strength<br />

Water absorption<br />

Initial rate of suction)<br />

(BS 3921/TRL<br />

Report 447) (N)<br />

1 set of tests pertype<br />

of brick<br />

2504<br />

Environmental barriers<br />

Timber<br />

Quality management<br />

scheme applies<br />

Concrete<br />

Brickwork<br />

Other Materials<br />

Barriers Sound absorption As required in<br />

Appendix 25/4<br />

Sound insulation<br />

2505<br />

2506<br />

Post foundations Loading test on site As required in<br />

Appendix 25/4<br />

Drainage structures/buried rigid pipes for drainage structures<br />

Pipes for drains and culverts having diameters or clear span exceeding 900 mm<br />

Vitrified clay<br />

Product certification<br />

scheme<br />

Concrete PC/SRC (Manufacturer’s test) See sub-Clause 2506.28<br />

Iron<br />

Corrugated steel (Manufacturer’s test) Type Approval Certificate<br />

and BBA Roads and<br />

Bridges Certificate apply<br />

150


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 2600<br />

2601 Bedding mortar<br />

materials<br />

Required for each<br />

batch<br />

Certification in<br />

accordance with Clause<br />

2601 is required<br />

Bedding mortar Flow cone test Each batch †<br />

Flow between glass plates<br />

Laboratory tests<br />

Compressive strength<br />

Expansion test<br />

Water absorption<br />

Elastic stability<br />

Flow cone test<br />

Compressive strength<br />

1 per source<br />

Each load<br />

Site control tests<br />

2604 Plastic coating to<br />

fencing<br />

posts, gates and<br />

ancillaries<br />

Required<br />

(BS 1722: Part 16)<br />

applicator is<br />

required<br />

Certification by powder<br />

manufacturer and coating<br />

2607 Granolithic concrete Testing to be in<br />

accordance with Clauses<br />

1702, 1703, 1707 and<br />

1710<br />

151


APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONTINUED)<br />

Clause Work, Goods or Materials Test Frequency of Testing Test Certificate Comments<br />

Series 3000<br />

3001 General Inspection Reports as<br />

required in Appendix 30/1<br />

3005 Grass seeding,<br />

Rate of spread of fertilizer<br />

1 per 1000 square<br />

Wildflower seeding and<br />

metres<br />

turfing<br />

Rate of spread of seeding<br />

1 per 1000 square<br />

††<br />

metres<br />

Chemical analysis of fertilizer<br />

1 per source<br />

Grass seed germination and purity<br />

1 per source and mix<br />

Required prior to<br />

†<br />

(Official Seed Testing Station<br />

variety<br />

sowing<br />

tests)<br />

1 Unless otherwise stated above, all sampling and testing in this Appendix shall be by the<br />

Contractor.<br />

2 Tests comparable to those specified in this Appendix will be necessary for any equivalent work,<br />

goods or materials proposed by the Contractor (See sub-Clause 105.4).<br />

3 (11/03) (N) indicates that a UKAS or equivalent accredited laboratory sampling and test report or<br />

certificate is required.<br />

4 Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix tests for work, goods or materials as scheduled under<br />

any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />

5 Cube strength tests are not required for concrete complying with Clause 2602.<br />

6 Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix test certificates for work, goods or materials as<br />

scheduled under any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />

152


APPENDIX 1/6: SUPPLY AND DELIVERY OF SAMPLES TO THE PROJECT MANAGER<br />

Clause<br />

Sample Description<br />

Frequency of<br />

Delivery Location Comments<br />

No. or<br />

Sampling<br />

Series<br />

300<br />

Stained Timber Boarding<br />

One sample, at<br />

Project<br />

Provide all relevant<br />

commencement of<br />

Manager’s Site<br />

technical data sheets<br />

contract.<br />

Office<br />

associated with<br />

products.<br />

300<br />

Powder coated, galvanised<br />

One sample<br />

On site<br />

Sample length of fence<br />

steel railings panel<br />

1.85m high Semi Temporary<br />

Fencing to Japanese<br />

Knotweed areas<br />

400 Galvanised steel guard rail One sample On site Sample length of<br />

completed guard rail<br />

500 Various types of pipe One sample, at Project Site Office<br />

bedding,<br />

commencement of<br />

surround and backfill contract.<br />

600 Imported Fill Class 2 and 6 On site<br />

1100 Sample length of concrete One sample On site Sample length of path<br />

path<br />

2500 Reinforced Earth Retaining<br />

wall modular blockwork units<br />

and reinforcement grid.<br />

Gabions Retaining wall cage<br />

and facing stone<br />

One sample On site Sample of filled gabion<br />

with<br />

Cage, with<br />

facing<br />

2400 Rendered blockwork One sample On site Sample panel of<br />

rendered blockwork<br />

Notes:<br />

1 Samples comparable to those specified in this Appendix will be necessary for any equivalent work,<br />

goods or materials proposed by the Contractor (See sub-Clause 105.6).<br />

2 Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix samples of work, goods or materials as scheduled under any<br />

one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.<br />

3 Unless otherwise scheduled under Clause 2602 samples of concrete complying with that Clause are not<br />

required.<br />

4 (N) indicates UKAS or equivalent laboratory accreditation required for sampling.<br />

153


APPENDIX 1/7: SITE EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS ON USE<br />

1.7.1 Extent of the Site<br />

The extent of the site is detailed on the drawings, in addition to the site boundary, the site will<br />

have areas where Japanese knotweed is present. Areas outside the boundaries indicated that are<br />

needed for the Contractor to comply with the requirements of Appendix 1/17, including advance<br />

warning signs, shall not be used by the Contractor without the prior written approval of the owner<br />

and/or tenant and the Project Manager. A copy of any agreement with owner and/or tenant is to<br />

be given to the Project Manager & <strong>Council</strong> prior to the use of such an area.<br />

1.7.2 Japanese Knotweed On site<br />

A Japanese knotweed survey and management plan have been completed for the site.<br />

The Japanese knotweed has been identified on the site and its location marked on the<br />

drawings.<br />

Under Schedule 9 of the Wildlife Order (NI) 1985, it is an offence to plant or cause it to grow in the<br />

wild. It places a duty of care to prevent the further spread to adjacent land, for example, if the<br />

canes or rhizomes where cut / excavated and removed from the site, resulting in its further<br />

spread, which could happen in the proposed phase development of this site.<br />

It is currently subject to a control programme, to eradicate it from the site. If the<br />

Japanese knotweed spreads, as a result of the Phase 3 construction stage, by the<br />

contractor or their subcontractors, the appointed contractor will be liable for the costs<br />

associated with controlling any new infestations on the site, until it is eradicated.<br />

1.7.3 Japanese Knotweed management plan<br />

Fence off Japanese knotweed<br />

All identified Japanese knotweed stands, should be fenced off immediately (refer to<br />

Drawing GA/03), to reduce the risk of vehicles spreading the plant. As the rhizomes can<br />

extend up to 7 m from the parent plant, the fencing should incorporate a 10 m buffer<br />

zone. Signage should be erected along the length of the buffer zone fence, informing<br />

the public and contractors that this is an exclusion zone.<br />

Use of wheel wash<br />

All plant and machinery used on site during the restoration works, or which comes into<br />

contact with soils on site, should go through a wheel wash on entering and exiting the<br />

site.<br />

154


1.7.4 Excavation and sealing of isolated Japanese Knotweed Areas<br />

Isolated areas of Japanese knotweed shall be excavated out at the start of the works to<br />

facilitate construction of the works. All excavated materials from these areas will be<br />

disposed of on site within the fenced off areas of Japanese Knotweed.<br />

1.7.5 Limitations on the Use of Site<br />

1.7.5.1 The Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations with regard to:<br />

• Bunding of oil storage.<br />

• Bunded area for fuelling of plant.<br />

• Run-off from compound<br />

• Chemical toilets<br />

• Collecting and disposal of waste from site (i.e. netted skips, no burning of any materials on<br />

site, etc)<br />

1.7.5.2 In addition, the Contractor shall make provision for carrying out work, outside the site as required<br />

under the Contract, for example Temporary Traffic Management (Appendix 1/17), including<br />

internal roads within cemetery necessary for the installation, maintenance and removal of<br />

advance signs, cones and road markings, surface street lighting and the like.<br />

1.7.5.3 The site should be used solely for the construction and maintenance of the Works.<br />

1.7.5.4 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the Special Requirements in relation to Statutory Bodies and<br />

others listed in the Conditions of Contract.<br />

1.7.5.5 The Contractor shall not use an area of land with a temporary access for any purpose other than that<br />

for which the right was granted.<br />

1.7.5.6 Prior to the commencement of the Works the Contractor together with the Project Manager and<br />

<strong>Council</strong> Staff shall carry out a joint inspection of the site and existing cemetery access roads and<br />

paths and all actionable defects shall be recorded.<br />

155


APPENDIX 1/7: SITE EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS ON USE (CONTINUED)<br />

1.7.5.7 The Contractor shall ensure that all areas of land, which have been temporarily occupied, are<br />

reinstated to the satisfaction of the affected landowner, occupier and the relevant Authorities. The<br />

Contractor shall supply a written confirmation from each landowner to his office.<br />

1.7.5.8 Vehicular and pedestrian access must be maintained at all times to all areas of the cemetery<br />

outside the Contract site area.<br />

1.7.5.9 The Contractor shall make provision for carrying out work around areas where Japanese<br />

knotweed is present , as shown on drawings as per extent of site details, as access in the<br />

proximately to these areas will be limited.<br />

156


APPENDIX 1/8: OPERATIVES FOR THE PROJECT MANAGER<br />

1.8.1 The Contractor shall allow for an unskilled labourer to be available for the use of the Engineer to<br />

allow him to carry out his duties.<br />

157


APPENDIX 1/9: CONTROL OF NOISE AND VIBRATION<br />

1.9.1 The Contractor's attention is drawn to the Special Requirements in relation to noise control as appended<br />

to the Conditions of Contract and to item 1.9.4 and to ‘Quiet Times’ referred to Appendix 1/13 below.<br />

1.9.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for deciding whether to seek the Local Authorities formal consent to<br />

his proposed methods of work and the steps he proposes in order to minimise noise.<br />

1.9.3 The Contractor shall also comply with the general recommendations set out in BS 5228 Code of Practice<br />

for Noise Control on Construction and Open Sites.<br />

1.9.4 The normal working hours shall be Monday to Friday between 0800 hours and 1800 hours, with no<br />

working on Sundays, public and/or bank holidays. Exceptionally, consent for work outside normal<br />

working hours may be given after any necessary consultation. Seven days notice is required from the<br />

Contractor when seeking such consent.<br />

1.9.5 Mitigation Measures for Construction Works<br />

BS5228 includes a number of guidelines and recommendation, which are considered appropriate, and of<br />

good working practice for all construction contracts. These are summarised below.<br />

General Measures<br />

The contractor should take note of the control measures for relevant plant listed in BS5228 and apply the<br />

appropriate measures where practicable, including temporary screening or enclosure of noisy plant,<br />

control of “on times” for noisy plant, and positioning of plant as far as possible from noise sensitive<br />

locations and properties. Also:<br />

• use of good, well maintained plant and where possible new plant manufactured under recent EC<br />

guidelines for manufacturers.<br />

• Substitution of unsuitable plant.<br />

• Maintenance of silencers and moving components.<br />

Screening<br />

At locations where extensive earthworks, for example, might result in an exceeding of EHO limits, the<br />

contractor should endeavour to sequence operations such that spoil mounds are located in positions<br />

where near sited dwellings are adequately screened from ongoing excavations. Some static machinery<br />

may require occasional screening. Such measures can be best assessed during the contract by<br />

monitoring.<br />

158


APPENDIX 1/9:<br />

CONTROL OF NOISE AND VIBRATION (Continued)<br />

Monitoring<br />

Given the limited impact it would not be appropriate to require regular noise monitoring of the site.<br />

However occasional measurement of noise levels generated using a Type 2 or better sound level meter<br />

should be conducted to check on the continuing impact of the works.<br />

Responsible Person<br />

It is often recommended that the appropriate party should appoint or delegate a responsible person who<br />

will be present on site and who will be willing to answer an act upon queries from the local public.<br />

159


APPENDIX 1/10(A): STRUCTURES TO BE DESIGNED BY THE CONTRACTOR<br />

The earth retaining structures shown in outline in the drawings 073030/GA/14 to 21 and in elevation on<br />

drawings 073030/GA/22 and 23 shall be designed and constructed by the contractor.<br />

The retaining walls shall have a natural looking grey colour finish such as Acheson and Glover Anchor<br />

Landmark Basalt blocks or equal and approved.<br />

The gabion cages shall be faced with Donegal Sandstone, in dry random rubble coursing.<br />

The front face of the crib walls shall be designed and constructed to contain pockets of top soil in which<br />

plants can take root over the whole front face of the wall.<br />

The retaining wall system selected for each section shall not take up an extent of land take that will<br />

cause a reduction in the area and dimensions shown on the drawings for any of the other facilities that<br />

make up the works shown on the drawings including roads, graveplots, paths, headstone foundations,<br />

buildings, access areas, planting areas and landscape areas and existing areas that are to be<br />

maintained. Where the selected retaining wall system is located adjacent to a graveplot or planting aarea<br />

the contractor must demonstrate that graves can be dug adjacent to the wall without compromising the<br />

stability and safety of the wall or the excavation.<br />

(1) Gabion Retaining Wall<br />

Gabion Retaining Wall - see Drawing No. 073030/GA/12, to 23 and 33, layout and details of gabion<br />

retaining wall structure and associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />

The Contractor’s designer for the gabion retaining wall will be required to provide a certificate from his<br />

insurer indicating that he has a minimum of £3,000,000.00 Professional Indemnity Insurance cover in<br />

respect of the design of this gabion retaining wall.<br />

The Contractor and his designer will be required to enter into a collateral warranty of the Employer’s<br />

choosing) with the Employer in regard to the design of the works.<br />

Further details of design requirements and specifications are given in Appendix 6/10.<br />

(2) Reinforced Earth Retaining Walls<br />

Reinforced Earth Retaining Block Walls - see Drawing No. 073030/GA/12, to 23 and 33 for location,<br />

layout and details of reinforced earth retaining walls and associated works encompassed by the<br />

“Designated Outline”<br />

The Contractor’s designer for the reinforced earth retaining walls will be required to provide a certificate<br />

from his insurer indicating that he has a minimum of £3,000,000.00 Professional Indemnity Insurance<br />

cover in respect of the design of the reinforced slopes.<br />

160


The Contractor and his designer will be required to enter into a collateral warranty (of the Employer’s<br />

choosing) with the Employer in regard to the design of the works.<br />

Further details of design requirements and specifications are given in Appendix 25/2<br />

(3) Crib Retaining Walls<br />

Crib Retaining Wall - see Drawing No. 073030/GA/12, to 23 and 33. for location, layout and details of<br />

Crib retaining wall structure and associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />

The front face of the crib walls shall be designed and constructed to contain pockets of top soil in which<br />

plants can take root over the whole front face of the wall.<br />

The Contractor’s designer for the crib walls wall will be required to provide a certificate from his insurer<br />

indicating that he has a minimum of £3,000,000.00 professional indemnity insurance cover in respect of<br />

the design of this gabion retaining wall.<br />

The Contractor and his designer will be required to enter into a collateral warranty (of the Employer’s<br />

choosing) with the Employer in regard to the design of the works.<br />

Further details of design requirements and specifications are given in Appendix 6/10<br />

161


APPENDIX 1/11: STRUCTURES TO BE DESIGNED BY THE CONTRACTOR<br />

The structural elements and other features to be designed by the Contractor are as listed below<br />

Concrete Stairs and Steps<br />

The stairs shall be of cast in situ or precast concrete construction. The contractor shall be responsible for<br />

the design of the steps including the foundations.<br />

The steps shall be designed and constructed to comply with BS 5395-1:2010 Code of Practice for the<br />

design of Stairs with Straight Stairs and Winders.<br />

Minimum requirements for the stairs are shown in drawing no. 073030/GA/34.<br />

Ramps<br />

Ramps shall comply with the requirements fo BS 8300:2009 Design of Buildings and their approaches to<br />

meet the needs of disabled people. The ramps shall be of cast in situ or precast concrete construction.<br />

The contractor shall be responsible for the design of the ramps including the foundations.<br />

Minimum requirements for the ramps are shown in drawing no. 073030/GA/34.<br />

162


APPENDIX 1/12: SETTING OUT AND EXISTING GROUND LEVELS<br />

1.12.1 The locations of known points to be used for setting out purposes will be identified on site.<br />

1.12.2 The Contractor should note that the levels indicated on the Drawings are to Belfast Ordnance Datum. The<br />

Contractor shall set up a bench mark on site in agreement with the Project Manager.<br />

1.12.3 All contractors are advised to visit the site during the tender period (i.e. by appointment with the Employer)<br />

to fully acquaint themselves with the layout/topography of the site, and any restrictions with regard to<br />

ingress/egress to the site and restrictions within working area of the site.<br />

1.12.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for setting out all work and no kerbs, concrete, or bituminous material<br />

shall be laid until the Contractor has satisfied himself that the finished surface shall have sufficient falls to<br />

prevent water from ponding. The setting out may be checked by the Project Manager and any defect shall<br />

be rectified at the Contractor’s expense.<br />

163


APPENDIX 1/13: PROGRAMME OF WORKS<br />

1 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager three copies of a Construction Programme in<br />

the form of a bar chart approved by the Project Manager after the acceptance of the Tender and<br />

before he commences work on Site. It shall show the level of detail appropriate to each stage of the<br />

Works and all activities and restraints each of which shall be given a short title. All events shall be<br />

numbered and annotated with earliest and latest event dates.<br />

At the time of submission of the programme the contractor shall also provide a mass-haul diagram<br />

showing his intended earthworks movements and locations<br />

2 It shall cover all activities and delivery to Site of materials. No work shall start until the programme<br />

has been approved by the Project Manager.<br />

2 The Contractor shall record progress on the programme fortnightly in a manner approved by the<br />

Project Manager and submit the marked up programme to the Project managers representative<br />

for approval prior to site progress meeting along with a detailed site progress report.<br />

4 The programme shall be re-drawn on the instructions of the Project Manager should any<br />

circumstances arise which substantially alter the existing programme. Three copies of any<br />

revised programme shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval.<br />

5 The approval of any programme by the Project Manager will neither effect the Contract Date of<br />

completion nor relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities to complete the Works by this date.<br />

6 The Contractor’s programme shall take into account the following constraints:<br />

• Constructing 1.85m high fencing around areas with Japanese knotweed as shown on the<br />

drawings before any other works can start.<br />

• Excavating out the area of Japanese knotweed indicated on the drawing and its disposal in<br />

a hoarded area<br />

• Keeping all existing cemetery footpaths and roads outside the site extent open at all times.<br />

• Maintaining access within the existing cemetery site at all times for <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong><br />

staff, as necessary<br />

• All public, bank and trade holidays.<br />

• Restrictions on site working hours, including ‘Quite Times’ on site during burials, see 7<br />

below for further details.<br />

• Traffic safety and management including notice requirements.<br />

• All other statutory notification periods<br />

• Work to privately and publicly owned services and supplies<br />

• Trials, tests and demonstrations prior to work items.<br />

• Compliance with technical approval procedures in relation to structures designed by the<br />

164


Contractor,<br />

• including awaiting approvals, resubmissions and modifications.<br />

• Restrictions on site access in the proximately of areas with Japanese Knotweed as<br />

detailed in Appendix 1/7.<br />

• Submission by the Contractor of Road Restraint Systems for acceptance, including<br />

awaiting acceptance and resubmission.<br />

7 The Contractor may be require to cease all noisy operations while burials are being undertaken at<br />

the cemetery (i.e. operations generating noise levels in excess of 60dB). The Contractor shall<br />

keep accurate records of any such ‘Quite Times’ and have these countered signed by <strong>Council</strong><br />

staff who are attendant at the burials. Payment for any such ‘Quite Times’ will not be paid without<br />

evidence of such countered signed records.<br />

8 The level of detail shown on the programme should be not less than the following:<br />

LEVEL 1: Within 21 days after acceptance of Tender and any subsequent revision.<br />

- Site Setup<br />

- Bulk Earthworks<br />

- Foundations<br />

- Roads Works<br />

- Concrete Paths<br />

- Fencing, guard rails<br />

- Production of all fabrication drawings<br />

- Retaining Structures<br />

- Reinforced concrete structures<br />

- Masonry works<br />

- Safety Fences<br />

- Topsoiling & Seeding<br />

- Finishes<br />

- Site drainage<br />

- M&E Services<br />

- Traffic Management Measures<br />

LEVEL 2: At least four weeks before the commencement of any item of work:<br />

For each structure:<br />

- Earthworks<br />

• Foundations<br />

• Concrete works<br />

• Masonry<br />

- Road works<br />

165


• As for Level 1 but intervals not exceeding 200 m and including lighting, signing,<br />

soiling and seeding, road marking, cabling, etc.<br />

- All public alterations or additions to privately and publicly owned services and supplies.<br />

LEVEL 3:<br />

Any further breakdown of items and other details as may be required.<br />

166


APPENDIX 1/14: MONTHLY STATEMENTS<br />

The payment applications submitted to the <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> in accordance with the Conditions of<br />

Contract by the Contractor shall, whenever dealing with matters covered by the Bills of Quantities, be set<br />

out under Part and Section headings similar to those in the Bills of Quantities and shall separately<br />

identify each item and specify quantity, unit, rate and value. Items not described in Bills of Quantities but<br />

appropriate for inclusion as measured work shall be shown at the end of the relevant section or under<br />

section headings as appropriate indicating quantity, unit rate and value. In respect of all other matters<br />

referred to in the Conditions of Contract the Contractor shall separately show in the statement quantities,<br />

units and rates of goods and/or materials and also details of any other matters to which he considers<br />

himself entitled. The Contractor shall allow the <strong>Council</strong> to inspect<br />

invoices for goods or materials included in the statement as may be required.<br />

167


APPENDIX 1/16: PRIVATELY AND PUBLICLY OWNED SERVICES AND SUPPLIES<br />

1 The Contractor shall, before commencing operations on the site give notice to the <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong><br />

<strong>Council</strong>, NIE, DOE and BT, Virgin Media, Water Service, Roads Service – Street lighting, etc and<br />

obtain information as to any electric power cables, water mains, sewers, and telephone cables<br />

which may be under, or over, or adjacent to the site. The Contractor shall also, before<br />

commencing operations on site, obtain any further information that the Employer may have in this<br />

connection. He shall observe such regulations and precautions as are required to avoid damage<br />

to the services and injury to workmen, members of the public or <strong>Council</strong> staff.<br />

2 The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Statutory Undertakers and others concerned,<br />

for the co-ordination of his work with all work which needs to be done by them or their Contractors<br />

concurrently with the Works. Compliance with the statutory periods of notice does not relieve the<br />

Contractor of his obligations<br />

3 Private services to individual properties, buildings, offices, etc have not been shown on the<br />

Drawings. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Statutory Undertakers, <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong><br />

<strong>Council</strong> and others concerned for the phasing of all necessary disconnections and diversion of<br />

private services affected by the Works.<br />

4 Disconnected services shall be removed by the Contractor only with the prior consent of the<br />

Authority concerned.<br />

5 The names and addresses of the authorities serving in the locality are listed below.<br />

BT<br />

NI Water<br />

(Water Mains, Sewers)<br />

DOE(NI), Roads<br />

Service(Road Drainage<br />

& Street Lighting)<br />

NIE<br />

BT Exchange, Irish Street,<br />

T 02871 34 8623<br />

Waterside, Londonderry, BT47 F 028 7134 1087<br />

3SH<br />

1a Belt Road, Altnagelvin,<br />

T 02871 312221<br />

Londonderry<br />

F 02871310330<br />

Londonderry Section Office T 02871321600<br />

NIE Local Office<br />

168


APPENDIX 1/16: PRIVATELY AND PUBLICLY OWNED SERVICES AND SUPPLIES (CONTINUED)<br />

6 Services and Supplies Affected by the Works<br />

Service<br />

Authority/Owner<br />

NI Water<br />

Description Requirements Group<br />

Foul & Connection of new foul and storm drainage A<br />

storm system to existing combined sewers.<br />

drainage<br />

Protection during the works.<br />

A<br />

NI Water Water mains Connection of new water main to existing<br />

water main.<br />

A<br />

Protection during the works.<br />

A<br />

NIE<br />

Electricity<br />

Connection of new buildings to existing<br />

A<br />

supply<br />

electricity supply.<br />

Protection during the works.<br />

A<br />

Key :-<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

E<br />

Work expected to be completed before the commencement of the Works.<br />

Work required after commencement of the Works which does not require prior work by<br />

the Contractor.<br />

Work required after commencement of the Works which does require prior work by the<br />

Contractor.<br />

Work expected to be in progress at the commencement of the Works.<br />

Work to be wholly undertaken by the Contractor<br />

169


APPENDIX 1/17:<br />

TRAFFIC SAFETY AND MANAGEMENT<br />

1. Traffic safety and management requirements<br />

1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for traffic safety and management and associated work both<br />

within and beyond the site extents, as described in Clause 117NI and Clause 104NI (Appendix A:<br />

Scheme 12A), of the Specification for Highway Works and Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual,<br />

and Code of Practice for ‘Safety at Street Works and Road Works’ and the following: -<br />

1.2 The Contractor shall submit his proposals, inclusive of risk assessment and method statements<br />

for traffic safety and management to the Project Manager & <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> not less than 4<br />

weeks before the Contractor wishes to implement them. The Contractor shall organise a meeting<br />

with the Project Manager & <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> to discuss his proposals; this meeting shall take<br />

place not less than 2 weeks before the Contractor wishes to implement his proposals. The<br />

Contractor shall take all comments of the Project Manager & <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> on board and<br />

amend his plans, as appropriate. No works on site shall commence until the traffic<br />

management proposals have been submitted and discussed with the Project Manager &<br />

<strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong>. The agreed proposals shall then be fully implemented.<br />

1.3 The Contractor shall ensure that delays to the Cemetery users are kept to a minimum at all times.<br />

1.4 The Project Manager or the Supervisor may stop any works not properly signed in accordance<br />

with Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual or Code of Practice for ‘Safety at Street Works and<br />

Road Works’ and all the costs and expense thereby incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.<br />

1.5 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager & <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> with an After Hours<br />

Emergency contact telephone number.<br />

1.6 The Contractor is responsible for traffic safety and management and associated work including<br />

design and the following:<br />

(i.)<br />

Details of phasing of the works.<br />

(ii.)<br />

Drawings showing traffic management details including as appropriate:-<br />

a. Position of traffic signs, maintenance and inspection cones etc.<br />

b. Width of lanes.<br />

c. Working area.<br />

d. Safety zones.<br />

e. Advance traffic signing of approaches to work.<br />

f. Crossover(s)<br />

g. Running lanes for emergency vehicles.<br />

h. Pedestrian facilities<br />

i. Site access/egress and haul routes if required (See Appendix 1/19)<br />

k. Any further information, which is considered appropriate.<br />

170


1.7 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the need to assess the risks and develop and operate safe<br />

working practices when vehicles and plant are reversing on Site, whether or not they are on part<br />

of the highway. Rule 129 of The Highway Code 1993 is relevant but the Contractor’s practices<br />

and procedures should take account of the different conditions, which will obtain on Site.<br />

The responsibilities of the Traffic Safety and Control Officer and of his nominated deputy shall<br />

also include the following matters:<br />

(1) Monitoring, with the assistance of sufficient mobile personnel and of sufficient other<br />

suitable and appropriate aids, the flow of traffic within the area and within the period<br />

defined for the operation of the vehicle recovery service;<br />

(2) (11/08) Ensuring that, within 5 minutes of notification of the occurrence of an incident,<br />

as defined below, resulting in stationary vehicle(s) on a highway open to the public,<br />

the incident is reported to the vehicle recovery service;<br />

(3) Recording and logging all incidents and all movements of recovery vehicles and,<br />

when called, all movements of the emergency services. For the purposes of this<br />

Appendix, an “incident” is defined as a shed load, vehicle breakdown, vehicle<br />

abandonment or traffic accident, whether or not the latter involves personal injury.<br />

2. Maintenance requirements<br />

2.1 The Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance of all roads (including crossovers) both<br />

within and beyond the site extents as described in Appendix 1/7.The Contractor will be required to<br />

give access to the <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> to carry out any necessary duties.<br />

3. Notice requirements<br />

3.1 Notice required by the <strong>Council</strong> in order to arrange for:<br />

(i) amending or making traffic orders: 4 weeks<br />

(ii) authorising of non-prescribed signs: 4 weeks<br />

(iii) authorising temporary traffic arrangements: 2 weeks<br />

(iv) moving signs to be compatible with the state of the Works: 1 week<br />

171


4. Highways, Private Roads and other ways affected by the Works<br />

Description Predicted<br />

24 hr<br />

AADT<br />

Speed<br />

Limit<br />

(mph)<br />

Type(s) of<br />

Traffic<br />

Control<br />

Special<br />

Facilities<br />

Whether to be kept<br />

open or closed<br />

Cemetery<br />

NA<br />

5 Mph<br />

None<br />

To Be Kept Open At<br />

Roads<br />

All Times<br />

To Be Kept Open At<br />

Public<br />

Unknown<br />

30mph<br />

All Times<br />

Roads<br />

Highways including footpaths, cycle tracks and bridleways, described above are one responsible :<br />

Authority Department of the Regional Development for (NI), Roads Service, Northern<br />

Division<br />

Address County Hall, Castlerock Road, COLERAINE, BT42 1QG<br />

Tel No 028 70341300<br />

5. Driver information signs at roadworks<br />

5.1 The Contractor shall provide adequate advance warning information signs prior to the<br />

implementation or amendment of any traffic management arrangements. All signing proposals<br />

shall be subject to approval by the RSTS, Coleraine.<br />

6. Additional requirements<br />

General<br />

6.1 Cones to be used at tapers and longitudinally on the Lonemoor Road should have a minimum<br />

height of 1000 mm.<br />

6.2 All signs, which will be required to remain in place overnight, shall have retro-reflective faces in<br />

accordance with BS EN 1463-2:2000.<br />

6.3 Road danger lamps (Steady State) shall comply with BS 3143 and shall be used throughout the<br />

scheme. Where the Contractor chooses to use flashing lamps they shall comply with BS 3143<br />

except that the flashing rate for these lamps shall be within the range 120 -150 flashes per<br />

minute. The minimum luminous intensity of the lamps shall be 0.5 candela for steady lamps, 1.0<br />

candela for ripple lamps at their peak and 1.5 candela for flashing lamps at their peak<br />

6.4 The Contractor shall keep clean and legible at all times all traffic signs, road markings, lamps,<br />

barriers and traffic control signals and he shall position, reposition, cover or remove them as<br />

necessitated by the progress of the Works. The Contractor shall inspect the Site Traffic TM<br />

172


(signage and coning) a minimum of 3 times a day to ensure legible and a written record of the<br />

daily inspection route shall be mentioned throughout the duration of the Contract.<br />

6.5 The delivery, erection and removal of signs, lamps, cones etc shall be undertaken by trained<br />

competent operatives who shall wear approved reflective clothing. Details of relevant<br />

qualifications and training received by the Contractor’s Traffic Management Staff must be<br />

submitted for review at the time of submission (refer to Section 1.2 above).<br />

7.6 All site vehicles shall be fitted with roof mounted flashing or rotating lamps. Hazard-warning lights<br />

will not be a permitted alternative.<br />

7.7 All Employees and Sub-Contractors shall at all times whilst on the site wear approved reflective<br />

or fluorescent clothing.<br />

7.9 The Contractor shall not commence any work, which affects the public, or cemetery, roads until all<br />

traffic safety measures necessitated by the work are fully operational.<br />

7.12 The Contractor shall when preparing his traffic management submission, consider the information<br />

contained in the following documents:<br />

• TA 23/99 Short Duration stops on Trunk Roads (including motorways) for Inspection<br />

purposes – traffic hazards,<br />

• TA 6/80 Traffic Signs and Safety Measures for Minor Works on Minor Roads,<br />

• TD 14/83 Amd No 1July 1984 Signing for Traffic Management at Certain Major Road<br />

Work Sites,<br />

• TRMM/9/85 Trunk Road Management and Maintenance Notices & Traffic Management if<br />

Roadworks (other than Contraflow) on the Departments Motorways and all purpose<br />

Trunk Roads.<br />

173


APPENDIX 1/18: TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS OF TRAFFIC<br />

1 Short term temporary traffic diversions will not be permitted on the Lonemoor Road but may be<br />

acceptable within the Cemetery subject to <strong>Council</strong> approval, normal notice period outlined above<br />

will apply.<br />

APPENDIX 1/21: INFORMATION BOARDS<br />

174


APPENDIX 1/23: RISKS TO HEALTH & SAFETY FROM MATERIALS AND SUBSTANCES<br />

1 Restrictions In Relation To Traffic Management Measures<br />

a. Refer to Appendix 1/17.<br />

2 Restrictions In Relation To Working Practices<br />

a. Refer to Appendix 1/9 and 1/17.<br />

3 Measures To Be Taken To Protect Members Of The Public<br />

a. Refer to Appendix 1/17 and Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note HSG151 -<br />

Protecting the public.<br />

4 Monitoring to be undertaken by Contractor<br />

Substances Hazardous To Health<br />

In this Clause “substance hazardous to health” has the same meaning as in:<br />

a. Regulation 2 of the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations (Northern<br />

Ireland) 2003 (COSHH(NI)).<br />

b. Regulation 2 of the Control of Lead at Work Regulations (Northern Ireland) 2003<br />

(CLAW(NI)).<br />

c. Regulation 2 of the Control of Asbestos at Work Regulations (Northern Ireland) 2007<br />

(CAW(NI)).<br />

d. A substance hazardous to health shall only be used or generated in or about the Works<br />

where specified in the Contract or with the consent of the Project Manager.<br />

e. Where any substance hazardous to health is so used or generated the Contractor shall<br />

provide the Project Manager:<br />

i<br />

a copy of the assessment of the risks created by the use of that substance as<br />

required by Regulation 6 of the COSHH(NI) Regulations, Regulation 4 of the<br />

CLAW(NI) Regulations or Regulation 5 of the CAW(NI) Regulations as appropriate;<br />

and<br />

ii<br />

details of the measures to be taken to prevent or adequately control the exposure<br />

of those working with or those who may be affected by the substance as required<br />

by Regulation 7 of the COSHH(NI) Regulations, Regulations 5-16 of the CLAW(NI)<br />

Regulations or Regulations 7-18 of the CAW(NI) Regulations as appropriate.<br />

175


iii<br />

the information required in (i) and (ii) above shall be provided to the Project<br />

Manager at least 14 days prior to the use of or incorporation into the Works of<br />

substances hazardous to health or where appropriate at the<br />

commencement of the Works where this is less than 14 days.<br />

iv<br />

In addition to anything required to be done by the Contractor by or under the<br />

Conditions of Contract or any relevant legislation, the Contractor shall implement<br />

the requirements described in Appendix 1/23 to prevent, control or monitor<br />

exposure of members of the public to any substance hazardous to health used or<br />

generated in or about the Works.<br />

f. If the Contractor proposes to use or generate any substance hazardous to health which has not<br />

been specified in the Contract, or proposes under the Clause 104 to substitute for goods or<br />

material so specified equivalent alternative goods or material which is classified as a substance<br />

hazardous to health then. The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager of the measures he<br />

proposes to take to assess the risks to the health of members of the public and to monitor and<br />

prevent or control any such risk.<br />

g. The Contractor shall, in relation to work with any substance hazardous to health, advise the<br />

Project Manager the information, instruction, training and supervision to be provided for the<br />

Contractor’s employees and any other person with reason to enter the area in which the hazard<br />

exists, and the provisions to be made for monitoring their health.<br />

h. Where the measures referred to in sub-Clause e(ii) of this Clause necessitate the use of<br />

protective clothing or other safety apparatus the Contractor shall:<br />

i. provide the Project Manager and his staff with sufficient suitable items of such protective clothing<br />

and other safety apparatus so far as they are not otherwise supplied under Appendix 1/1;<br />

ii<br />

arrange for the proper storage, maintenance and, if necessary, regular testing and<br />

replacement of the items provided to the Project Manager and his staff; and<br />

iii<br />

arrange for appropriate training or instruction for the Project Manager and his staff in the<br />

use of such items.<br />

176


APPENDIX 1/24 : QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM<br />

1. QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM<br />

The Contractor shall institute a quality management system generally complying with BE EN ISO 9002<br />

1994 incorporating as a minimum the following aspects:<br />

a. Objectives<br />

b. Organisation & Staff Responsibilities Organisation Chart<br />

Staff profiles and responsibilities Delegation<br />

Lines of Command and Communication<br />

b. Works Procedures Administrative Procedures<br />

Control of Documents<br />

Control of subContractors<br />

Lists of Methods Statements<br />

Ordering and monitoring materials<br />

Control of Temporary Works<br />

Control of Temporary Traffic Management<br />

Liaison with third parties including police<br />

Liaison with service authorities<br />

Liaison with Landowners and Local Communities<br />

Dealing with complaints<br />

QA audits and responsibilities<br />

Non-Conformances<br />

Pollution Control<br />

Environmental Management (Refer to Section 2)<br />

Supervision of construction<br />

c. Method Statements For every construction procedure<br />

d. Check Lists For every construction procedure<br />

e. Inspection and Testing Materials Records<br />

Materials Testing<br />

Inspection Plans<br />

f. Quality review Quality Review<br />

Quality Audits<br />

Quality Records<br />

g. Health and Safety Control<br />

Audits<br />

The quality management system shall be described in a Quality Plan that shall be submitted to the<br />

Engineer (refer to Section 3 of this Appendix).<br />

177


Method Statements and Check Lists must be prepared for every construction operation and submitted to<br />

the Engineer for comment no later than 10 days prior to commencement of any associated work or activity.<br />

Hold points must be identified to allow for checking and material testing at appropriate points. Where<br />

required hold points must be inserted to allow the Engineers representative to check materials and the<br />

Works. Work may not proceed until the Engineers Representative has given his consent to proceed.<br />

The Contractor must identify an individual to act as resident Quality Manager on site. This need not be a<br />

full time appointment but adequate time must be allowed for his activities. Independent Audits covering<br />

Quality and Health and Safety from their office based staff are to take place at monthly intervals as a<br />

minimum.<br />

2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM<br />

The Contractor shall institute and maintain, during the construction of the Works and environmental<br />

management system. This shall define the responsibilities, practices and procedures provided for<br />

environmental management and shall form part of the Quality Management Plan as detailed in this<br />

Appendix 1/24 of the Specification.<br />

It shall be developed to avoid wherever possible environmental accidents and pollution to encourage<br />

reduced consumption of resources, to restrict the production of waste and to promote good relationships<br />

with the relevant authorities. Commitments made regarding mitigation, their implementation and<br />

subsequent monitoring shall be recorded.<br />

Notwithstanding any other requirements of the Contract, the Environmental Management System shall:<br />

a. Include site specific Method Statements for all operations where there is a risk of<br />

environmental damage. These shall show how the proposed methods of construction<br />

shall restrict impacts on the environment, and how contingency plans and emergency<br />

procedures shall limit damage caused by accidents, spillage or any other unforeseen<br />

events. The Method Statements shall include notification procedures to the relevant<br />

authorities;<br />

b. Ensure that the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details of the Environmental<br />

Management System and Method Statements for approval in advance of the<br />

construction of the Works. The Works shall not be commenced without such approval<br />

having being obtained in writing from the Engineer.<br />

c. The Contractor will liaise with the local community during the Contract. This shall<br />

include providing information about activities likely to give rise to nuisance, and a<br />

telephone number for complaints to be registered. A log of all complaints and follow up<br />

actions shall be kept and made available for inspection by the Engineer.<br />

3 SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION TO PROJECT MANAGER<br />

178


The Quality Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval not later than 21 days after the<br />

Contract date.<br />

179


APPENDIX 2/1: LIST OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES TO BE DEMOLISHED<br />

LOCATION DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. REQUIREMENTS<br />

Hard<br />

Standing<br />

Areas on<br />

Site<br />

Demolition of existing hard standing<br />

area and associated access i.e<br />

access step and concrete wall<br />

See Drawing No.<br />

073030/GA/02<br />

Removal structures,<br />

including sub-structure<br />

walls, concrete floor slabs<br />

and foundations. All debris<br />

to be taken to tip off site.<br />

2.1.1 All tenderers are advised to visit the site during the tender period (i.e. by appointment with the<br />

Employer) to fully acquaint themselves with the layout/topography of the site, the form and<br />

content of the existing structures to be demolished and any restrictions with regard to<br />

ingress/egress to the site and restrictions within working areas.<br />

2.1.2 All existing structures are to be examined prior to demolition to establish their structural form. The<br />

contractor shall ensure that demolition of the existing structures is carried out in a planned and<br />

controlled sequence to avoid any uncontrolled collapse of the structures.<br />

2.1.3 Consideration must be given to <strong>Council</strong> personnel and members of the public working/living<br />

adjacent to structures to be demolished.<br />

2.1.4 A carefully planned method of removing existing masonry, concrete, etc must be enforced on site.<br />

2.1.5 The Principal Contractor is required to ensure that large sections of concrete, masonry, cladding,<br />

etc will not fall freely to the ground by employing a safe system of work.<br />

2.1.6 Damping down of structures to be demolished should be undertaken during demolition<br />

operations. Controlled demolition operations and dust monitoring to be carried out.<br />

2.1.7 Prior to works commencing; the Contractor is to carry out a careful survey to ensure that the<br />

demolition/site clearance operations will not cause harm to persons, or property, from harmful<br />

materials being spilled, or dispersed.<br />

2.1.8 The ground conditions and the presence of any contaminated soil has not been established. The<br />

Principal Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that contaminated ground is identified and<br />

treated in an appropriate manner to safeguard site operatives, members of the public and <strong>Council</strong><br />

staff. The Project Manager shall be notified should any contaminated ground, or suspected<br />

contaminated ground, be uncovered on site. No suspected contaminated material will removed off<br />

site until permission to do so has been given by the Project Manager.<br />

180


APPENDIX 2/2: FILLING OF TRENCHES AND PIPES.<br />

1. EXISTING TRENCHES MORE THAN ONE METRE FROM EXISTING BOUNDARY WALLS:<br />

Where the bottom of an existing drainage trench is below a critical level, (defined below) remove<br />

existing trench fill and backfill with grade 15 N/mm 2 concrete surround, the top of the concrete<br />

being not lower than the critical level. For the purpose of this clause the critical level is D mm<br />

lower than level of foundation bottom, D mm being equal to the horizontal distance of the near<br />

side of the trench from the wall, minus 150 mm. The Project Manager is to be informed by the<br />

Contractor in advance of trench excavation if this situation arises. The Contractor to allow in his<br />

rates for all temporary works and sequencing of the works to ensure that new, or any adjacent<br />

exiting foundation, are not undermined by these works (see also contract drawings for further<br />

details).<br />

2. EXISTING ABANDONED PIPES:<br />

Where existing pipes are uncovered on site or are abandoned due to the new works, existing<br />

pipes should be removed entirely back to their nearest manhole still in use unless noted otherwise<br />

by the Project Manager on site. The Project Manager shall be notified about any uncovered pipes<br />

prior to any works being carried out to them.<br />

APPENDIX 2/4 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING<br />

1. The use of explosives and/or blasting shall not be allowed on site under any circumstances.<br />

APPENDIX 2/5: HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.<br />

1. See appendix 1/23, special requirements in relation to hazards and other relevant sections of<br />

contract documents.<br />

181


APPENDIX 3/1: FENCING, GATES AND STILES<br />

1. General<br />

All permanent and temporary fencing shall comply with Series 300 of the Specification for<br />

Highways Works unless otherwise stated in this Appendix.<br />

2. Temporary Fencing<br />

At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall erect Temporary Fencing around the<br />

full site boundary, as indicated on the Contract Drawings and shall mainatain the fencing in place<br />

for the duration of the contract. The type of fencing to be used is weldmesh panel fencing. Posts<br />

shall be 38mm od steel tubing 2000mm long set in precast concrete feet 720*230*150 high at<br />

3500mm centres or embedded in the ground as required for stability. Panels shall be weldmesh<br />

75x300 appertures with 4.8mm dia wire and shall be 3500mm long and 2000mm high above<br />

ground level. The panels shall be securely welded to the posts and the posts shall be interlinked<br />

by two number fencing couplers. Gates shall be of the same specification and shall be integral<br />

with the fencing. All metal sections of the fence shall be hot dipped galvanised.<br />

3. Semi Permanent Fencing Around Japanese Knotweed Areas<br />

At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall erect Semi Temporary Fencing<br />

around all the areas where Japanese Knotweed has been identified, as indicated on the Contract<br />

Drawings. The type of fencing shall be NK Fencing Ibex Eco Weldmesh panel system or<br />

approved equivalent. It shall have an installed height of 1.85m using 1850mm high x 3006mm<br />

wide, 4 No reinforcing beams, 200 x 50mm mesh size, 5mm diameter horizontal wires, 5mm<br />

diameter vertical wires having 22mm protruding panels. The posts shall be 60 x 40mm RHS<br />

intermediate fence posts. Maximum centres of posts: 3.050m. Set posts in hole 300 x 300 x 700<br />

deep completely filled with 20N concrete. The panels shall be fixed to the posts with 4 No NK<br />

Clamp Type 009 using twin M8 tamper-resistant bolts. The posts and fence shall be galvanized to<br />

BS EN ISO1461:2009<br />

4. Permanent Fencing<br />

Details of the locations and extent of the permanent fencing to be provided in this Contract are<br />

shown on the drawings.<br />

4.1 Railings<br />

Manufacturer: To be confirmed/manufactured by Main Contractor<br />

Drawing References: 83473 - 01, 02, 03, 04 & 05<br />

Railing Height above ground level: 1400 mm (although with a 50mm curved top to<br />

each post makes the overall height 1450mm)<br />

Material: Galvanised Mild Steel. All materials to be polyester powder coated Colour<br />

Black RAL 9005.<br />

182


Posts: 60 x10mm thick at top reaching 125 x 10mm thick at the base 1900mm long<br />

approximately – as shown on the drawings, solid galvanised mild steel posts complete<br />

with rounded top and welded base plate 50 x 200 x 10mm thick to key into concrete<br />

foundation. Posts pre-drilled to accommodate 6 Nr. 20mm diameter solid horizontal<br />

bars. Posts set in 450 x 450 x 610mm deep mass concrete surround (although there<br />

will be an element of Contractor Designed solution for the foundations of posts linked to<br />

the Contractor Designed Retaining Walls. Posts at 1.0m centres.<br />

Straining posts: Posts as above, but complete with a 6 Nr double sets of circular<br />

receiving lugs welded to each post to receive 6 Nr 20mm diameter horizontals each<br />

side. Straining Posts set in an additional concrete foundation of 550 x 550 x 610 mm<br />

deep mass concrete surround. Posts at 4.0m centres.<br />

End Posts: As above with only 6 Nr single circular receiving lugs as shown on the<br />

drawings<br />

Horizontal Rails: 6 Nr 20 mm diameter solid galvanised mild steel rails.<br />

Method of setting posts: In concrete as described above and as shown on the drawings<br />

or as Contractor Designed i.e. set in concrete pipe work set in concrete as the retaining<br />

wall is constructed to accommodate posts after site measurements.<br />

Other requirements: No sharp edges on either posts or rails. Rails to be parallel to<br />

ground level and not stepped. Allow for all radii and curves on site.<br />

4. Timber Panel Fencing<br />

All as per Contract Drawings and relevant British Standards for Fencing.<br />

183


APPENDIX 4/1 ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN)<br />

1 Location<br />

1.1 Road Restraint Systems – Safety Barriers<br />

New road restraint systems – safety barriers and their associated terminal sections and<br />

anchorages - are required for this project. Details of the location of all new safety barriers to be<br />

installed on site as part of the permanent works are shown on the Contract Drawings. Details of<br />

the performance containment class and working width requirements are detailed in Schedule to<br />

this Appendix. All new road restraint systems installed on site shall conform to the requirements<br />

of DEM 55/03, the IRRRS (Interim Requirements for Road Restraint Systems, Revision 1)<br />

document and BS EN 1317. Only systems that have current Systems Approval with the<br />

Highways Agency will be permitted to be used on this Contract.<br />

1.2 Pedestrian Restraint Systems<br />

The location for pedestrian parapets and pedestrian guardrails are shown on the Contract<br />

Drawings<br />

2 Other Details:<br />

2.1 Safety Barriers, Terminals, Transitions and Crash Cushions<br />

• Requirements for safety barriers, terminals and transitions are as per the requirements of<br />

Clauses 401, 402 and 403.<br />

• Requirements for crash cushions are as per the requirements of Clauses 401 and 403.<br />

2.2 Vehicle Parapets Including Anchorages and Attachment Systems<br />

• Requirements for vehicle parapets are as per the requirements of Clauses 401 and 406.<br />

2.3 Pedestrian Restraint Systems<br />

• Requirements for pedestrian parapets and pedestrian guardrails - see also Table C.1 of<br />

BS 7818<br />

184


APPENDIX 4/1 ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN)(Continued)<br />

3 Testing<br />

All testing of restraint systems to be as per required with reference to Appendix 1/5, and comply<br />

with clauses within Series 400 of the SHW<br />

3.1 Destructive Testing<br />

• Provision of copies of certified reports of destructive tests and for supply of test<br />

Components should be forwarded to the Project Manager.<br />

3.2 Site Testing on Post Foundations<br />

• Requirements for site load tests on safety barrier, terminal, transition and crash cushion<br />

postfoundations are per the requirement of Clause 404.<br />

3.3 Inspection and Testing of Vehicle Parapet Posts<br />

• Requirements for inspection are as per the requirements of Clause 409.<br />

• Requirements for static testing of posts are as per the requirements of Clause 409.<br />

3.4 Site Testing on Anchorages in Drilled Holes<br />

• On site testing of anchorages in drilled hole to be as per clause 404 and 410 is the SHW.<br />

4 Schedule of Road Restraint Systems (Vehicle)<br />

See the tables on the following pages.<br />

For details of the Pedestrian Restraint System please see the Contract Drawings.<br />

185


APPENDIX 4/1 ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN) (Cont’d)<br />

Schedule of Road Restraint Systems (Vehicle and Pedestrian):<br />

Location<br />

Type of Road<br />

Restraint System<br />

(Preferred)<br />

Containment<br />

Performance<br />

Class<br />

Drawing<br />

Reference<br />

Road 1 verges Single Sided N2 GA/12 & GA/13<br />

(precise alignment<br />

t.b.c. on site)<br />

Minimum<br />

Set-back (m)<br />

Maximum Working<br />

Width<br />

Other<br />

Requirements<br />

or Comments<br />

0.6 W2; 0.8 m ASI A<br />

186


APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD<br />

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD<br />

ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />

The Contractor shall submit the following supporting information demonstrating compliance with BS EN<br />

1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 and DD ENV 1317-4:2002 to the Project Manager for acceptance:<br />

EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDISATION (CEN) COMPLIANCE<br />

Initial submission documents to be supplied for consideration of initial type test are as follows:<br />

1. Test report in accordance with BS EN 1317-1, clause 8 (and including any additional test data<br />

required under BS EN 1317-3, clauses 7.3 and 7.4 and DD ENV 1317-4:2002, clauses 7.3 and 7.4)<br />

2. Video/high speed film of test annotated showing date, test number and performance class.<br />

3. Still photographs of complete installation including anchorage points.<br />

4. Still photographs of vehicle before and after impact.<br />

5. Full drawings of tested items.<br />

6. Certification from the manufacturer that the item tested complies with drawings supplied.<br />

7. Certificate from test house accredited in accordance with the requirements of Series 400 (MCHW<br />

1.400).<br />

Additional information, which will be required on acceptance of initial type test prior to installation.<br />

8. Manufacturer’s specification.<br />

9. Installation drawings.<br />

10. Manufacturer’s installation instructions including foundation requirements and test methods to verify<br />

their performance.<br />

11. Manufacturer’s repair and maintenance manual.<br />

12. Certificate of compliance with the Quality Management Scheme 1 for the Manufacture of Fencing<br />

Components. 2<br />

13. Compliance with the Quality Management Sector Scheme 2 – Supply and Installation of Fences:<br />

(i) Section Scheme 2B for Vehicle Restraint Systems. 2<br />

14. Certificate of compliance for the Quality Managements Section Scheme 5 for the Fabrication and<br />

Installation of Bridge Parapets and Cradle Anchorages. 3 :<br />

(i) Section Scheme 5A for The Manufacture of Parapets for Road Restraint Systems; and<br />

(ii) Sector Scheme 5B for The Installation of Parapets for Road Restraint Systems.<br />

15. Nominal loads (direct forces, moments and co-existent shears) to be transferred from the parapet<br />

to the structure or foundation. 2&3<br />

Notes:<br />

1. All documents, which are not in English, will have to be translated. If they are in a language other<br />

than French or German the promoter will be required to supply a full translation.<br />

2. Items 12 and 13 are required for safety barrier systems and transitions.<br />

3. Items 14 and 15 are required for vehicle parapets.<br />

187


APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD RESTRAINT<br />

SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />

(CONTINUED)<br />

Sheet 1 of 4<br />

SUBMISSION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />

TYPE OF VEHICLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM:<br />

CONTAINMENT PERFORMANCE CLASS/PERFORMANCE LEVEL/PERFORMANCE CLASS (*):<br />

TEST REPORT NUMBER: (Test of )<br />

TEST NUMBER: TEST DATE: (*) delete as appropriate<br />

COMPANY NAME:<br />

CONTACT:<br />

ADDRESS:<br />

Tel:/Fax:/E-mail:<br />

PRODUCT NAME:<br />

Initial submission documents to be supplied for consideration of Initial Type Test (ITT)<br />

Item Comment Item Received<br />

(Y or N) Date requested<br />

1 Test report In accordance with BS EN 1317-1, clause 8 (and including any additional test data -<br />

required under BS EN 1317-3, clause 7.3 and 7.4 and DD ENV 1317-4:2002, clause<br />

7.3 and 7.4)<br />

2 Video/high speed film Of test coverage as specified in relevant part of BS EN 1317 or DD ENV 1317-<br />

4:2002.<br />

Annotated showing date, test number and performance class.<br />

3 Still photographs Of complete installation including anchorage points.<br />

4 Still photographs Of vehicle before and after impact.<br />

5 Drawings Fully detailed drawings of tested item.<br />

6 Certification from the Confirming that the item tested complies with drawings supplied.<br />

manufacturer<br />

7 Confirmation from test<br />

house<br />

That the test conforms to the relevant requirements of BS EN 1317-1 (and including<br />

any additional test data required under BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 and DD ENV<br />

1317-4:2002)<br />

Additional information, which will be required on acceptance of initial type test prior to installation<br />

8 System specification Manufacturer’s specification<br />

9 Installation details Manufacturer’s drawings<br />

10 Installation procedures Manufacturer’s installation instructions<br />

11 Maintenance Manual Manufacturer’s inspection, repair and maintenance instructions<br />

12 Certificate of compliance With the Quality Management Scheme 1 for Manufacture of Fencing Components. 2<br />

13 Certificate of compliance With the Sector Scheme 2B for the Supply and Installation of Fences Vehicle<br />

Restraint Systems. 2<br />

14 Certificate of compliance With the Quality Management Schemes 5 for the Fabrication and Installation of<br />

Bridge Parapets and Cradle Anchorages 3 .<br />

(i) Sector Scheme 5A for The Manufacture of Parapets for Road Restraint<br />

Systems; and<br />

(ii) Sector Scheme 5B for The Installation of Parapets for Road Restraint<br />

Systems.<br />

15 Support loads Nominal loads (direct loads, bending moments and shear forces) that have to be<br />

transferred from the vehicle restraint system to the support structure or foundation. 2<br />

Notes:<br />

1 All documents, which are not in English , will have to be translated. If they are in a language other than French or German the promoter will be require to supply a full<br />

translation.<br />

2 Items 12 and 13 are required for safety barrier systems and transition.<br />

3 Items 14 and 15 are required for vehicle parapets<br />

Signature:<br />

Name:<br />

Date:<br />

188


APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD RESTRAINT<br />

SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />

(CONTINUED)<br />

Sheet 2 of 4<br />

SUBMISSION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2 AND DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />

TYPE OF VEHICLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM: Safety Barrier, Vehicle Parapet or Transition (*)<br />

CONTAINMENT PERFORMANCE CLASS/ LEVEL (*):<br />

TEST REPORT NUMBER: (Test of )<br />

Test Type: (Primary/Complementary Test) (*)<br />

TEST NUMBER: TEST DATE: (*) delete as appropriate<br />

COMPANY NAME:<br />

CONTACT:<br />

ADDRESS:<br />

Tel:/Fax:/E-mail:<br />

PRODUCT NAME:<br />

Specified Actual Satisfactory<br />

Compliance<br />

(Yes or No)<br />

BS EN 1317- Vehicle Details Impact Conditions<br />

1 Table 1<br />

Total vehicle mass (kg)<br />

Speed (kmh)<br />

Angle (degrees)<br />

………(±….)<br />

………(0, +7%)<br />

………(-1, +1.5)<br />

Centre of Gravity<br />

Vertical height (m)<br />

Longitudinal height (m)<br />

Lateral (m)<br />

………(± 10%)<br />

………(± 10%)<br />

± ………..<br />

Model<br />

N/A<br />

BS EN Vehicle Restraint<br />

1317-2 System (VRS)<br />

clause 4.2 Behaviour<br />

BS EN 1317- Vehicle<br />

2<br />

Behaviour<br />

clause 4.3<br />

BS EN 1317- Installation<br />

2,<br />

clause 5.3.2<br />

BS EN 1317-<br />

2.<br />

Severity<br />

clause 4.4 Indicies<br />

BS EN<br />

1317-2, Photographic<br />

clause 5.6 coverage<br />

Figure 3<br />

Drawings<br />

1) the VRS shall contain and redirect the vehicle without breakage of principal<br />

longitudinal elements of the system<br />

2) No major part of the VRS shall become totally detached or present an undue<br />

hazard to other traffic, pedestrians or personnel in a work zone.<br />

3) Elements of the VRS shall not penetrate the passenger compartment of the<br />

vehicle. Deformations of, or intrusions into the passenger compartment that can<br />

cause serious injuries are not permitted.<br />

4) Ground anchorages and fixings shall perform according to the design of the VRS<br />

1) The centre of gravity (CG) of the vehicle shall not cross the centreline of the<br />

deformed system.<br />

2) The vehicle shall remain upright during and after impact, although moderate rolling,<br />

pitching and yawing are acceptable.<br />

3) The vehicle shall leave the VRS after impact, so that the wheel track does not<br />

cross a line parallel to the initial traffic face of the VRS, at a distance A (2.2 m) plus<br />

vehicle width +16% of the length of the vehicle within a distance B (10 m) from the<br />

final intersection (break) of wheel track with the initial traffic face of the VRS.<br />

1) The length of the VRS shall be sufficient to demonstrate the full performance<br />

characteristics of the system.<br />

2) If the VRS has to develop tension, end anchorages shall be provided in<br />

accordance with the VRS specification. Post foundation shall meet the design<br />

specification.<br />

Specified<br />

Actual<br />

THIV Limit 33 km/h<br />

THIV ………. km/h<br />

PHD Limit 20 g<br />

PHD ………. g<br />

ASI Limit 1.4<br />

ASI ……….<br />

1) Photographic coverage shall be sufficient to clearly describe behaviour and vehicle<br />

motion during and after impact.<br />

2) High speed cameras shall be operated at a minimum of 200 frames per second<br />

and stills.<br />

3) As recommended in clause 5.6 and Figure 4<br />

Drawing included<br />

N/A = Not Applicable<br />

FULLY COMPLIES WITH STANDARD: BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />

Signature:<br />

Name:<br />

Date:<br />

189


APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD RESTRAINT<br />

SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />

(CONTINUED)<br />

Sheet 3 of 4<br />

SUBMISSION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH BS EN 1317-1 AND BS EN 1317-3<br />

TYPE OF VEHICLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM: Crush Cushion (R) or Non-redirective (NR) (*)<br />

TEST REPORT NUMBER: TEST TYPE: (Primary/Complementary Test) (*)<br />

PERFORMANCE LEVEL: VELOCITY CLASS: (Test of )<br />

TEST NUMBER: TEST DATE: (*) delete as appropriate<br />

COMPANY NAME:<br />

CONTACT:<br />

ADDRESS:<br />

Tel:/Fax:/E-mail:<br />

PRODUCT NAME:<br />

Specified Actual Satisfactory<br />

Compliance<br />

(Yes or No)<br />

BS EN 1317- Vehicle Details Impact Conditions<br />

1 Table 1<br />

Total vehicle mass (kg)<br />

Speed (kmh)<br />

Angle (degrees)<br />

………(±….)<br />

………(0, +7%)<br />

………(-1, +1.5)<br />

Centre of Gravity<br />

Vertical height (m)<br />

Longitudinal height (m)<br />

Lateral (m)<br />

………(± 10%)<br />

………(± 10%)<br />

± ………..<br />

Model<br />

N/A<br />

BS EN 1317-<br />

3, clause 6.2<br />

Crash Cushion<br />

Behaviour<br />

1) Elements of the crash cushion shall not penetrate the passenger compartment of<br />

the vehicle. Deformations of, or intrusions into, the passenger compartment that<br />

could cause serious injuries are not permitted.<br />

2) No major element of the crash cushion, having a solid mass greater than or equal<br />

to 2.0 kg, shall become totally detached, unless this is required by the working of the<br />

crash cushion. No major element of the crash cushion shall impede the path of<br />

adjacent traffic. The final position of the detached element shall be considered to<br />

determine the displacement classification.<br />

BS EN<br />

1317-3<br />

clause 6.3<br />

Vehicle<br />

Behaviour<br />

1) The vehicle shall remain upright during and after the collision although yawing and<br />

moderate rolling and pitching are acceptable. The post-impact trajectory of the test<br />

vehicle shall be controlled by means of the exit box shown in Figure 2 and specified<br />

as detailed in Tables 11 and 12.<br />

BS EN 1317-<br />

3<br />

Installation 1) The installation of the crash cushion for the test shall comply with the structural<br />

design details and the on-road system details as given in the design specification.<br />

Clause 7.3.2<br />

BS EN<br />

1317-3<br />

clause 5.4<br />

Table4<br />

Impact Severity<br />

Levels<br />

Specified<br />

Level A : THIV ≤ 44 km/h (Tests 1, 2 & 3)<br />

THIV ≤ 33 km/h (Tests 4 and 5)<br />

ASI ≤ 1.0<br />

Level B : THIV ≤ 44 km/h (Tests 1, 2 & 3)<br />

HIV ≤ 33 km/h (Tests 4 and 5)<br />

ASI ≤ 1.4<br />

Levels A & B : PHD ≤ 20g<br />

Actual<br />

BS EN 1317-<br />

3, clause<br />

7.4.7, Figure<br />

8<br />

Photographic<br />

coverage<br />

1) High speed cameras and/or high speed video cameras shall be operated at<br />

minimum of 200 frames per second.<br />

2) Stills<br />

3) As recommended in clause 7.4.7 and Figure 8.<br />

Drawings Drawing included<br />

FULLY COMPLIES WITH STANDARD: BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-3<br />

Signature:<br />

Date:<br />

Name:<br />

N/A = Not Applicable<br />

190


APPENDIX 4/2: INFORMATION REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE OF ROAD RESTRAINT<br />

SYSTEMS TO BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4 : 2002<br />

(CONTINUED)<br />

Sheet 4 of 4<br />

SUBMISSION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH BS EN 1317-1, BS EN 1317-2, BS EN 1317-3 AND DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />

TYPE OF VEHICLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM:<br />

Terminal<br />

PERFORMANCE CLASS: (Test of )<br />

Test Type: (Primary/Complementary Test) (*)<br />

TEST TYPE NUMBERl<br />

TEST NUMBER: TEST DATE: (*) delete as appropriate<br />

COMPANY NAME:<br />

CONTACT:<br />

ADDRESS:<br />

Tel:/Fax:/E-mail:<br />

PRODUCT NAME:<br />

Specified Actual Satisfactory<br />

Compliance<br />

(Yes or No)<br />

BS EN 1317- Vehicle Details Impact Conditions<br />

1, Table 1,<br />

DD ENV<br />

1317-4:2002,<br />

Total vehicle mass (kg)<br />

Speed (kmh)<br />

Angle (degrees)<br />

………(±….)<br />

………(0, +7%)<br />

………(-1, +1.5)<br />

clauses 7.4<br />

and 7.5<br />

Centre of Gravity<br />

Vertical height (m)<br />

Longitudinal height (m)<br />

Lateral (m)<br />

………(± 10%)<br />

………(± 10%)<br />

± ………..<br />

Model<br />

N/A<br />

DD ENV<br />

1317-4:2002,<br />

clauses 5.4<br />

and 5.5.2<br />

Terminal<br />

Behaviour<br />

1) Elements of the terminal shall not penetrate the passenger compartment of the<br />

vehicle. Deformations of, or intrusions into, the passenger compartment that could<br />

cause serious injuries are not permitted.<br />

2) No major part of the terminal shall become totally detached and come to rest<br />

outside the permanent lateral displacement zones defined in clause 5.4.<br />

3) Anchorages and fixings shall perform to the terminal design specifications and<br />

other specified requirements as listed in the test report.<br />

DD ENV<br />

1317-4:2002,<br />

clause 5.5.3<br />

Vehicle<br />

Behaviour<br />

1) The vehicle shall not overturn, although rolling, yawing and moderate pitching may<br />

be accepted. For the performance class P1 rolling onto a side may be accepted.<br />

2) The exit box values for the specified test are as defined in Figures 5.6 and 7 (as<br />

appropriate)<br />

DD ENV<br />

1317-4:<br />

Installation 1) The terminal shall conform to the structural design details and with the system<br />

installation details as given in the design specification of the manufacturer.<br />

2002,<br />

clause 7.3.2<br />

DD ENV Impact Severity Specified<br />

Actual<br />

1317-4:<br />

2002, clause<br />

5.5.4 and<br />

Table 5<br />

Classes<br />

Level A : THIV ≤ 44 km/h (Tests 1, 2 & 3)<br />

THIV ≤ 33 km/h (Tests 4 and 5)<br />

ASI ≤ 1.0<br />

Level B : THIV ≤ 44 km/h (Tests 1, 2 & 3)<br />

HIV ≤ 33 km/h (Tests 4 and 5)<br />

ASI ≤ 1.4<br />

Levels A & B : PHD ≤ 20g<br />

DD ENV<br />

1317-4:<br />

2002, clause<br />

7.7 and<br />

Figure 7<br />

Photographic<br />

coverage<br />

1) Photographic coverage shall be sufficient to describe clearly terminal and vehicle<br />

motion during and after impact.<br />

2) High speed cameras and/or high speed video cameras at a minimum of 200 framer<br />

per second.<br />

3) Stills<br />

Drawings Drawing included<br />

`<br />

FULLY COMPLIES WITH STANDARD: BS EN 1317-1, DD ENV 1317-4:2002<br />

Signature:<br />

Date:<br />

Name:<br />

N/A = Not Applicable<br />

191


APPENDIX 5/1: DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS<br />

1 Layout of drainage of amenities and roads shall be constructed as shown on contract drawings.<br />

The connection of new drainage systems to the existing combined drainage system to be agreed<br />

on site, with Project Manager.<br />

2 Drainage gullies and chambers shall be constructed and detailed as shown on the contract<br />

drawings.<br />

3 The bedding detail to foul and storm drainage is to be Type S as shown on Drawing No. F1,<br />

MCDHW, Volume 3, “Highway Construction Details”. All bedding materials to SHW Clause 503.3.<br />

Where the drain crosses under a carriageway, the backfill above the pipe bedding is to be well<br />

compacted Type 3 material, and comply with any other requirements set down by DRD Roads<br />

Service, or with C20/20 mass concrete as indicated on Drawing No. 073030/GA/35, pending on the<br />

depth of cover to the crown of the pipe.<br />

4 The bedding detail to filter drains to be Type L as shown on Drawing No. F2, MCDHW, Volume 3,<br />

“Highway Construction Details”. All filter material to be Type A. Were the filter drain crosses under a<br />

carriageway, the filter materials are to be substituted by well compacted Type 3 material.<br />

5 Joints to surface water and foul drains shall be watertight. Ridged joints shall not be used.<br />

6 Chamber sizes are indicated on the contract drawings and all in accordance with Standard<br />

Drawings Section 1, Series F of Volume 3 of the Manual for Contracts Documents for Highway<br />

Works.<br />

7 Gully gratings and frames shall be ductile iron to BS EN 124 Group 3.<br />

8 Saddles may be used for gully connections to the filter drains to Cause 508.7.<br />

9 All new road gully chambers shall be trapped, and shall comply with Highway Construction Detail<br />

Drawing No. F13 and Clause 508 of the Specification.<br />

10 Drainage to Structures<br />

The drainage to be provided behind the new contractor designed gabion walls, reinforced earth<br />

walls and crib walls will form part of the contractor’s design but should not comprise less than a 150<br />

mm diameter (minimum) uPVC rigid walled perforated pipes.<br />

11 Testing and cleaning of all foul and storm water drains to comply with clause 509 and as described<br />

listed in Appendix 1/5. Chambers on the foul and storm drainage shall be tested for water-tightness.<br />

All carriers, foul, storm drains to be surveyed by CCTV and copy of survey to be forwarded the<br />

Project manager for approval, before the drainage is brought into use<br />

192


APPENDIX 5/1: DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS (Continued)<br />

12 Chamber covers and frames shall be to BS EN124 Group 4. Gully gratings and frames shall be<br />

ductile iron to BS EN 124 Group 3. Where existing chambers are being retained, the cover level<br />

and frame shall be raised or lowered to ensure the cover is flush with finished road or surrounding<br />

surface levels.<br />

193


APPENDIX 5/2:<br />

SERVICE DUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />

1 Details of the typical duct construction are shown on Drawing No. I2, MCDHW, Volume 3, “Highway<br />

Construction Details”. Details for duct chamber as show on Contract drawings Drawing No.<br />

073030/GA/25.<br />

2 The location, size and type of the service ducts are detailed on the Contract Drawings.<br />

3 Bedding material should be Quarry dust in footways; In-situ concrete mix ST2 (Class E) in<br />

carriageway crossings.<br />

4 Backfilling of Service Ducts in proposed carriageway and footway, shall be Type 3 Clause 850NI<br />

from duct surround to formation level. Service Ducts in existing carriageway backfill shall be<br />

Concrete ST2 from duct surround to basecourse level; In-situ concrete mix ST2 (Class E) in<br />

carriageway crossings<br />

5. Colour coding of ducts is to be in accordance with Health and Safety Executive booklet HS(G)47<br />

6. Location of the existing public services, based on Statutory Bodies record information, is shown on<br />

the Services drawings<br />

194


APPENDIX 5/7 TERMOPLASTIC STRUCTURAL WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS<br />

The Contractor shall provide the following information, in accordance with sub-Clause 518.2 for the range<br />

of pipes and fittings (To be verified by the Certification body – see sub-Clause 518.15):<br />

a. Technical Drawings showing dimensions and tolerances including sealing rings and weight per<br />

metre, together with properties, as specified in sub-Clauses 518.3 and 518.5.<br />

b. material specification, as required in sub-Clause 518.2:<br />

Table 1: Un-plasticised Polyvinyl Chloride<br />

Property Test Method Reference Specification<br />

Tensile Properties BS EN ISO 6259<br />

BS EN ISO 527-1<br />

Vicat BS EN 727<br />

Longitudinal revision BS EN 743<br />

K-value BS EN 922<br />

PVC Content BS EN 1905<br />

Density<br />

BS EN ISO 1183-3, ISO<br />

4451<br />

Heat Revision ISO 12091<br />

Effects of heat<br />

(injection moulded<br />

fittings only)<br />

BS EN 763<br />

Table 2: Polyethylene (PE)<br />

Property Test Method Reference Specification<br />

Tensile Properties BS EN ISO 6259<br />

BS EN ISO 527-1<br />

Oxygen induction<br />

time<br />

BS EN 728<br />

Melt Flow Rate BS EN ISO 1133<br />

Density<br />

BS EN ISO 1183-3, ISO<br />

4451<br />

Heat Revision ISO 12091<br />

Effects of heat<br />

(injection moulded<br />

fittings only)<br />

BS EN 763<br />

195


APPENDIX 5/7 THERMOPLASTIC STRUCTURAL WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS (CONTINUED)<br />

Table 3: Polyethylene (PP)<br />

Property Test Method Reference Specification<br />

Tensile Properties BS EN ISO 6259<br />

BS EN ISO 527-1<br />

Oxygen induction<br />

time<br />

BS EN 728<br />

Melt Flow Rate BS EN ISO 1133<br />

Density<br />

BS EN ISO 1183-3, ISO<br />

4451<br />

Heat Revision ISO 12091<br />

Effects of heat<br />

(injection moulded<br />

fittings only)<br />

BS EN 763<br />

196


APPENDIX 6/1 : REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCEPTABILITY AND TESTING OF EARTHWORKS<br />

MATERIALS<br />

IF AT ANY STAGE DURING EARTHWORK OPERATIONS THE CONTRACTOR THINKS HE MAY HAVE<br />

DISTURBED A MARKED, OR UNMARKED GRAVE, HE SHALL CEASE WORK IN THAT AREA<br />

IMMEDIATELY AND NOTIFY THE COUNCIL & PROJECT MANAGER FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTION.<br />

Requirements for acceptability and testing of earthworks materials are set out below separately for site won<br />

excavated fill material and Imported Fill Materials<br />

Site Won Fill Material<br />

Fill materials shall be site excavated glacial till material.<br />

The acceptability of the material shall be determined by the Project Manager by way of inspection and based<br />

on the results of tests carried out in accordance with Appendix 5.1<br />

A copy of the site investigation is included in Section D.<br />

Imported Material<br />

1 Cohesive fill material for grave plot areas.<br />

The following fill materials, referenced to Table 6/1 of Series 600 of the Specification, shall be imported<br />

for use in the works in grave areas.<br />

Class 2A<br />

Class 2B<br />

Class 2C<br />

Class 2D<br />

Wet Cohesive Material<br />

Dry cohesive Material<br />

Stony cohesive material and<br />

Silty Cohesive material<br />

The acceptable limits for these material are given in Table A6/1.1 below<br />

2 Selected Granular Fill Material for Roads and Structures<br />

The following materials reference to Table 6/1 of Series 600 of the specification shall be imported for<br />

use in the works in areas below roads and adjacent to structures<br />

Class 6N<br />

Class 6F2<br />

Selected Granular Fill: To be used as fill to structures.<br />

Selected Granular Fill: Capping<br />

197


Table A6/1.1: Acceptable Material Properties Imported Cohesive Material<br />

Class<br />

General<br />

Typical Use<br />

Permitted Constituents (All Subject<br />

Material required for Acceptability (In Addition to Requirements on<br />

Compaction<br />

Class<br />

Material<br />

to Requirements of Clause 601 ad<br />

Use of Fill Materials in Clause 601 and testing in Clause 631)<br />

Requirements in<br />

Description<br />

Appendix 6/1)<br />

Clause 612<br />

Property (See<br />

exceptions in<br />

Previous Column)<br />

Defined and<br />

Tested in<br />

Accordance with:<br />

Acceptable Limits<br />

Within:<br />

Lower Upper<br />

2 A - Wet cohesive<br />

General Fill<br />

Any material, or combination of<br />

(i) grading BS 1377: Part 2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/4 Method 1<br />

2 A -<br />

material<br />

materials, other than chalk.<br />

(ii) plastic limit (PL) BS 1377: Part 2 - -<br />

except for materials<br />

with liquid limit<br />

greater than 50,<br />

(iii) mc BS 1377: Part 2 PL -4% 25<br />

determined by<br />

BS1377: Part 2, only<br />

(iv) MCV Clause 632 7.5 12<br />

deadweight tamping<br />

(v) Undrained shear<br />

strength of<br />

remoulded material<br />

Clause 633 30 35kpa<br />

or vibratory tamping<br />

rollers or grid rollers<br />

shall be used.<br />

2 B - Dry cohesive<br />

General Fill<br />

Any material, or combination of<br />

(i) grading BS 1377: Part 2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/4 Method 2 2 B -<br />

material<br />

materials, other than chalk.<br />

(ii) plastic limit (PL) BS 1377: Part 2 - -<br />

(iii) mc BS 1377: Part 2 15% PL -4%<br />

(iv) MCV Clause 632 7.5 12<br />

(v) Undrained shear<br />

strength of<br />

remoulded material<br />

Clause 633 30 35<br />

198


Table A6/1.1 (Continued): Acceptable Material Properties Imported Cohesive Material<br />

Class<br />

General<br />

Typical Use<br />

Permitted Constituents (All Subject<br />

Material required for Acceptability (In Addition to Requirements on<br />

Compaction<br />

Class<br />

Material<br />

to Requirements of Clause 601 ad<br />

Use of Fill Materials in Clause 601 and testing in Clause 631)<br />

Requirements in<br />

Description<br />

Appendix 6/1)<br />

Clause 612<br />

Property (See<br />

Defined and<br />

Acceptable Limits<br />

exceptions in Previous<br />

Tested in<br />

Within:<br />

Column)<br />

Accordance<br />

with:<br />

Lower<br />

Upper<br />

2 C - Stony<br />

General Fill<br />

Any material, or combination of<br />

(i) grading BS 1377: Part 2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/4 Method 1<br />

2 C -<br />

cohesive<br />

materials, other than chalk.<br />

except for materials<br />

material<br />

(ii) plastic limit (PL) BS 1377: Part 2 - -<br />

with liquid limit<br />

greater than 50,<br />

determined by<br />

(iii) mc BS 1377: Part 2 15 25<br />

BS1377: Part 2, only<br />

deadweight tamping<br />

(iv) MCV Clause 632 7.5 -<br />

or vibratory tamping<br />

rollers or grid rollers<br />

(v) Undrained shear<br />

Clause 633 30 -<br />

shall be used.<br />

strength of remoulded<br />

material<br />

2 D - Silty cohesive<br />

General Fill<br />

Any material, or combination of<br />

(i) grading BS 1377: Part 2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/2 Tab 6/4 Method 2 2 D -<br />

material<br />

materials, other than chalk.<br />

(iii) mc BS 1377: Part 2 15 25<br />

(iv) MCV Class 632 7.5 12<br />

(v) Undrained shear<br />

strength of remoulded<br />

material<br />

Class 633 30 35<br />

199


APPENDIX 6/2: REQUIREMENTS FOR DEALING WITH CLASS U1B AND CLASS U2<br />

UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS<br />

1 Class U1B and U2 materials are not expected to be present within the boundary of the scheme but any<br />

U2 material uncovered on site to be taken to approved tip off site.<br />

200


APPENDIX 6/3: REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATION, DEPOSITION, COMPACTION (OTHER THAN<br />

DYNAMIC COMPACTION) ETC.<br />

1 The Contractor is to provide a detailed earth works management plan which will be submitted to the<br />

Department. The Management plan is to include method of run-off from the work areas and details of<br />

mitigation measures against pollution of watercourses before any work commences on site.<br />

2 Earthworks requirements are shown on the following drawings: 073030/GA/14 -21<br />

3 Blasting is not permitted as an alternative to normal excavation methods.<br />

4 Cutting Faces<br />

i. All fill material used to backfill behind the new contractor designed gabion wall and<br />

reinforced earth slopes to consist of clean well graded granular stone, to Designer’s<br />

specification.<br />

ii.<br />

Contractor shall take all necessary measures to ensure that excavations are kept stable and<br />

free from water. Contractor to include for these provisions in his rates as indicated in the<br />

preamble to Bill of Quantities.<br />

iii.<br />

Contractor to be responsible for all costs associated with excavating and back filling to any<br />

over dig due to battered excavations, etc being greater than the net volume required for the<br />

permanent works.<br />

iv.<br />

Slopes in rock cuttings where blocky material is present to be prepared by trimming to form<br />

a stepped, stable face. Closely jointed area to be carried out incrementally as the face is<br />

prepared. Widely jointed areas to be pressure tested with air to remove loose materials.<br />

v. Toe drains shall be installed at the base of the cuttings for collection of run off.<br />

vi.<br />

All cut off drains alongside cuttings shall be completed prior to commencement of any<br />

adjacent earthworks excavations.<br />

vii.<br />

All trimming shall be carried out incrementally.<br />

201


5 Embankment Construction<br />

I. Where the embankments are to be constructed against ground sloping at greater than 1<br />

vertical to 10 horizontal the natural ground shall be stripped of vegetation, topsoil, organic<br />

and very soft material and benched.<br />

II.<br />

Benching shall be carried out incrementally during construction of embankment to avoid<br />

deterioration of the formation. The individual bench height should be constructed to suit the<br />

layer thickness being used, but should not exceed 1000mm.<br />

ii.<br />

Cut bench surfaces shall be proof rolled before placement of any new material on the<br />

benched surface to method compaction.<br />

iii.<br />

Embankment faces shall be trimmed incrementally as construction proceeds.<br />

6 Compaction<br />

I. The degree and method of compaction of any general fill and selected granular fill material<br />

shall be as per table 6/1 and 6/4 of the Specification, Volume 1, Series 600<br />

II.<br />

Testing by means of in situ density tests to BS 1377: Part 9: 1990 shall be carried out as<br />

directed by the Project Manager.<br />

III.<br />

Slope and drainage in cuttings shall ensure that groundwater is depressed at a minimum of<br />

600 mm below formation level. In general the drainage shall consist of toe drains and cut off<br />

drains.<br />

IV.<br />

Counter fort drainage may be required if seepage occurs from the cutting faces.<br />

202


APPENDIX 6/5: GEOTEXTILES USED TO SEPARATE EARTHWORKS MATERIALS<br />

6.5.1 Geotextiles shall be placed as separation between filler materials for cut off drains, French drains and<br />

intercepting ditches and excavated fill areas.<br />

6.5.2 All geotextiles shall be thermally bonded, woven or non-woven synthetic fibres that comply with the<br />

required physical and mechanical properties.<br />

6.5.3 Design life shall be 120 years.<br />

6.5.4 Testing of samples of the geotextiles will be required as directed by the Project Manager.<br />

6.5.5 All testing shall comply with manufacturers recommendations.<br />

6.5.6 Laying, lapping and bonding of geotextiles shall be in accordance with manufacturers<br />

recommendations, a minimum lap of 500mm shall apply.<br />

6.5.7 The geotextiles used shall have the following physical properties.<br />

Geolon PP<br />

Tensile Strenght - 0.2kN minimum<br />

Static puncture resistance - 8kN<br />

Permeability - 25 l/m²/sec<br />

Pore Size (090) - 300 micron<br />

203


APPENDIX 6/6: FILL TO STRUCTURES & FILL ABOVE STRUCTURAL FOUNDATIONS.<br />

6.6.1 See Contract Drawings for details of fill to roads, structures and structural foundations.<br />

6.6.2 Only Class 6F2 material shall be used for fill to structures and structural foundations.<br />

204


APPENDIX 6/7: SUB-FORMATION & CAPPING AND PREPARATION AND SURFACE TREATMENT<br />

OF FORMATION<br />

1 The depth of capping to be provided in areas of new road construction is subject to in situ CBR<br />

testing. These tests shall be carried out by an independent and approved testing laboratory.<br />

2 Capping materials shall be 6F2 in accordance with Table 6/1. Naturally occurring gravels will not<br />

normally be permitted even if they comply with Specification requirements.<br />

3 Capping in cuttings and on embankments shall be constructed in accordance with SHW, Clause<br />

613, 11(i) and 613.12 (i) respectively.<br />

4 The use of Sub-formation or Formation by construction plant shall have a minimum protection layer<br />

of 400 mm.<br />

5 Sub-formation shall have the same shaping requirements as formation as shown on the cross<br />

section drawings.<br />

205


APPENDIX 6/8:<br />

TOPSOILING<br />

1 Height limit of topsoil stockpiles permitted: 2.0 metres.<br />

2 The requirements of Clause 618.3 are substituted by the following:<br />

TOPSOIL SPREAD<br />

The Contractor shall re-spread approved topsoil stripped from the site to the specified depths in the<br />

areas as indicated in the contract (i.e. minimum depth of 200mm). Topsoil shall be re-spread, as far as<br />

possible, in the same general area from where it was originally stripped.<br />

SOILING: METHOD OF WORKING<br />

i. Soil shall not be transported during periods of wet weather.<br />

ii. At no time should lorries/dump trucks importing soil travel over reinstated soil, however, in case where soil<br />

transportation, unavoidably involves crossing undisturbed or previously restored land, running is to be<br />

concentrated on clearly defined tracks and to be ripped and reinstated on completion. Soiling should<br />

proceed by depositing heaps of soil at the edge of the areas to be spread by a back-actor, working from<br />

adjacent areas to the specified depth. The soil shall be lightly consolidated but not compacted, in layers not<br />

exceeding 300mm. The Contractor must provide for the temporary construction and reinstatement of haul<br />

roads.<br />

iii. If, in the opinion of the Project Manager any soil has become unsuitable due to contamination or<br />

compaction during site operations, the Contractor will be requested to remove it at his own expense.<br />

All work shall be carried out at the appropriate season and under suitable weather and ground<br />

conditions. Soil movements will only be carried out when the soil is in a suitably dry condition, normally<br />

between the months of May and September.<br />

Accordingly, soil movements will be subject to the following conditions:<br />

a. Soil operations may only commence upon the approval of the Project Manager once soil<br />

conditions have been assessed.<br />

b. No soil operations will take place during rain or in the presence of standing water, unless the<br />

Project Manager permits in writing.<br />

c. Restarting work after a temporary suspension due to rain will normally depend on drying of the<br />

soil from the surface.<br />

3 All areas to be soiled are as shown on the drawings.<br />

4 Soiling depths are indicated on Drawings (i.e. minimum depth of 200mm).<br />

206


5 Rock cutting areas are to be left trimmed and cleared to the satisfaction of the Project Manager with<br />

natural bedding planes exposed if possible. No exposed clawed surfaces will be acceptable. Slopes of<br />

very blocky or cobbly nature are to be protected by geogrid mesh as agreed with the Project Manager.<br />

6 Topsoil Class 5A arising from site and subsoil arising from site which conforms with Economy Grade<br />

topsoil in accordance with BS 3882: 1994 shall be stockpiled for re-use in separate storage piles.<br />

Where possible, storage piles should be short and wide rather than long and thin in order to minimise<br />

repeated running over the soil. Soil storage piles should be on reasonable level, well drained land and<br />

should not be allowed to become waterlogged. Soil storage piles should be kept weed-free by<br />

applications of total, or appropriately selective, herbicides with particular emphasis given during the<br />

growing season to prevent weeds seeding.<br />

7 Existing soiling depths shall be agreed prior to and during excavation<br />

8 The topsoil stripping operations are subject to archaeological surveillance. These operations shall be<br />

carried out using backactor excavators with toothless buckets. Each machine shall be supervised by an<br />

archaeologist who shall confirm clearance or otherwise of the stripped area. No excavation, other then<br />

topsoil stripping, shall be carried out until the site has been cleared of archaeology and instructions to<br />

this effect issued by the Project Manager.<br />

207


APPENDIX 6/9: EARTHWORK ENVIRONMENTAL BUNDS, LANDSCAPE AREAS, STRENGTHENED<br />

EMBANKMENTS<br />

1 Details of earthwork environmental Bunds and strengthening of embankments to be included as part of<br />

contractors designed element of the works in relation to Gabion wall design. Drawings to be provided<br />

by contractor showing locations and details of construction to be approved by Project Manager. All<br />

details should comply with Clauses 619, 621 an 622 of Volume 1 of Specification for Highway Works<br />

208


APPENDIX 6/10: GROUND ANCHORAGES, CRIB WALLING AND GABIONS<br />

All earth retaining walls shall have a natural stone looking finish as Acheson and Glovers Anchor<br />

Landmark Basalt and gabion cages shall be faced with Donegal Sandstone, in dry random rubble<br />

coursing.<br />

The earth retaining structures shown in outline in the drawings 073030/GA/14 to 21 and GA/33 and in<br />

elevation on drawings 073030/GA/22 and 23 shall be designed and constructed by the contractor.<br />

The retaining wall system selected for each section shall not take up an extent of land take that will cause<br />

a reduction in the area and dimensions shown on the drawings for any of the other facilities that make up<br />

the works shown on the drawings including roads, graveplots, paths, headstone foundation, buildings,<br />

access areas, planting areas and landscape areas and existing areas that are to be maintained. Where the<br />

selected retaining wall system is located adjacent to a graveplot or planting area the contractor must<br />

demonstrate that graves can be dug immediately behind and in front of the wall without compromising the<br />

stability and safety of the wall or the excavation.<br />

Gabion Retaining Wall<br />

Gabion Retaining Wall - see Drawing Nos. 073030/GA/33 for location, details of gabion retaining wall<br />

structure and associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />

Gabions shall comply with Clause 626 of the Specification and Appendix 6/10 of the Specification.<br />

Design for gabion retaining wall structure shall comply with all the relevant design guides and advice notes<br />

in the Highway Agency’s, Design Manual For Roads And Bridges DB2/05 Technical approval of Highway<br />

Structure, BD 30/87 - Backfilled Retaining Walls. Minimum unfactored design live load surcharge to the<br />

back of retaining wall is 15 kN/m 2 .<br />

Crib Retaining Walls<br />

Crib Retaining Wall - see Drawing Nos. 073030/GA/33 for details of crib retaining wall structure and<br />

associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />

Crib walls shall comply with Clause 625 of the Specification and Appendix 6/10 of the Specification.<br />

Design for crib walls retaining wall structure shall comply with all the relevant design guides and advice<br />

notes in the Highway Agency’s, Design Manual For Roads And Bridges DB2/05 Technical approval of<br />

Highway Structure, BD 30/87 - Backfilled Retaining Walls and BD 68/97 Crib Retaing Walls and Guidance<br />

Note BA 68/97 Crib Retaing Walls. Minimum unfactored design live load surcharge to the back of retaining<br />

wall is 15 kN/m 2 .<br />

209


APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS<br />

1. New Carriageway Construction<br />

All surfacing materials to be used in new access roads, car parks and resurfacing of existing roads<br />

shall comply with the details given in this Appendix.<br />

2. Permitted Pavement Options – Schedule 1<br />

Schedule 1: Permitted Pavement Options<br />

Drawing Ref. Area General<br />

Requirements<br />

Permitted Pavement<br />

Option<br />

073030/GA/01,<br />

All New Access Road and<br />

Schedule 2A<br />

A1<br />

02 & 04<br />

Car Park Construction<br />

incl. resurfacing of<br />

existing roads<br />

3. General Requirements – Schedule 2<br />

Schedule 2A: General Requirements – All New Road Construction<br />

Grid for checking surface levels of pavement courses (Clause Longitudinal<br />

702.4).<br />

dimensions<br />

10 m<br />

Transverse<br />

2 m<br />

dimension<br />

Surface regularity (Clause 702NI.5, Table 7/2NI) Road Category A<br />

Interval for measurement of longitudinal regularity (Clause 702.7)<br />

10 m<br />

Interval for measurement of transverse regularity (Clause 702.8)<br />

3 m<br />

Coated Chippings (Clause 915.2 & 915.3)<br />

Nominal Size:<br />

Minimum PSV<br />

Maximum AAV<br />

14/20 mm<br />

60<br />

16<br />

210


APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS (CONTINUED)<br />

4. Permitted Construction Materials – Schedule 3<br />

Pavement Option A1<br />

Pavement<br />

Layer<br />

Surface<br />

Course<br />

Base<br />

Course<br />

Material Ref.<br />

Thickness (mm)<br />

SCA1 - Rolled Asphalt Surface Course or SMA 40<br />

BCA1 - Dense Macadam Base Course 60<br />

Sub- Base SBA1 - Granular Sub-base material Type 3 150<br />

Road-base SBA1 - Granular Road base material Type 3<br />

(Provisional, to be confirmed by Project Manager on site<br />

upon reduced dig for new roads and carparks)<br />

450<br />

Total<br />

700<br />

Thickness<br />

Capping If required To be confirmed<br />

5. General Requirements For Construction Materials– Schedule 4<br />

Schedule 4: (11/04) General requirements Construction Materials<br />

Clause Requirement<br />

801.2 unbound mixtures shall not be deposited as described as per sub-Clause 801.2<br />

801.3 unbound mixtures shall not be deposited as described as per sub-Clause 801.3<br />

801.7 Materials to comply with 801.7<br />

802.4 Unbound Materials up to 225 mm compacted thickness to be spread in two layers<br />

802.14 N/A<br />

901.2 and<br />

Requirement as per sub-Clause 901.2 and 942.5<br />

942.5<br />

901.19 Requirement as per sub-Clause 901.19<br />

901.28 Requirement as per sub-Clause 901.28<br />

1001.2 N/A<br />

1004.7 N/A<br />

1028 N/A<br />

1033.10 N/A<br />

211


APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS (CONTINUED)<br />

6. Requirements For Construction Materials – Schedule 5<br />

(Details to be confirmed)<br />

Schedule 5: Requirements for Construction Materials<br />

Material<br />

Ref.<br />

Clause Description Requirement<br />

803 Type 1 mixture As per clause 803<br />

BA2,<br />

805<br />

BA3<br />

SBA1,<br />

805<br />

SBA2<br />

BA1 903<br />

BCA1,<br />

BCA2, 906<br />

BCA3<br />

SCA1 910<br />

Type 3 (Open Graded)<br />

Unbound Mixture<br />

Type 3 (Open Graded)<br />

Unbound Mixture<br />

Dense macadam Base<br />

Course<br />

Dense Macadam<br />

Binder course<br />

Rolled asphalt surface<br />

course (Recipe mix)<br />

As per Clause 805<br />

As per Clause 805<br />

Type: DBM50, to Clause 929<br />

Weather conditions: as per sub-Clauses<br />

945.1 and 945.2<br />

BS4987.2003: Clause 5.<br />

Binder Penetration: 50<br />

Type:<br />

DBM50<br />

Grading Range: 0/20<br />

Weather conditions: as per sub-Clauses<br />

945.1 and 945.2<br />

BS 4987.2005: Clause 6.5<br />

Minimum Delivery Temp: as per sub-Clauses<br />

945.3 and 945.4<br />

Thickness:<br />

45 mm<br />

Maximum wind speed: as per sub-Clauses<br />

945.3 and 945.4<br />

Minimum Air Temp: as per sub-Clauses<br />

945.3 and 945.4<br />

BS 594-1:2005, Table 6, Column 6/5, Schedule<br />

1B<br />

Binder:<br />

as per 50 Pen<br />

Coarse Aggregate %: 30%<br />

Aggregate Types: Crushed Rock<br />

Coated Chippings size: 14/20mm<br />

Minimum Declared PSV: 60<br />

Maximum AAV: 16<br />

212


BS 4987.2005: Clause 7.4<br />

SCA2,<br />

SCA3<br />

912<br />

Close Graded<br />

macadam surface<br />

Course<br />

Aggregate size: as per Table 26<br />

Traffic Category: B<br />

Minimum Declared PSV: 60<br />

Maximum AAV: 16<br />

Binder Penetration: as per Table 28<br />

213


APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS (CONTINUED)<br />

7. Thin Surface Course Systems ; Information To Be Provided By The Contractor – Schedule 6<br />

[Note to the Contractor: Complete one sheet per system or variant of system that may be used]<br />

The Contractor shall provide the following information with his tender:<br />

(i)<br />

A copy of the British Board of Agreement HAPAS Roads and Bridges Certificate or<br />

Certificates for the thin surface course systems that are proposed for use in the works,<br />

together with a copy of the Installation Method Statement associated with each<br />

Certificate.<br />

(ii)<br />

For any Certificate that covers several variants of one thin surface course system,<br />

proposed variant or variants of the system to be used in the Works<br />

(iii)<br />

If requested, or if the thin surface course system is not produced under a Sector<br />

Scheme, the proposed component materials to be used in the thin surface course<br />

system and their proportions for each proposed system<br />

(iv)<br />

Proposed sources or sources of coarse aggregate together with statement of<br />

properties including polished stone value, ten per cent fines value, aggregate abrasion<br />

value and flakiness index<br />

(v)<br />

If regulating material is to used, evidence of its deformation resistance either<br />

independently or in combination with the thin surface course system<br />

214


APPENDIX 7/2: EXCAVATION AND REINSTATEMENT OF EXISTING SURFACES.<br />

1. Any existing surfaces disturbed by the works shall be reinstated to match existing to the<br />

satisfaction of the Project Manager. See also Contract Drawings.<br />

2. Any excavation and reinstatement of existing public roads shall comply with all requirements set<br />

down by <strong>Derry</strong> <strong>City</strong> <strong>Council</strong> for the reinstatement of openings in roads.<br />

3. All excavations not permanently reinstated at the end of the working day and subject to<br />

trafficking shall be temporarily reinstated the same day in proprietary bituminous bound<br />

material. Details of proposed proprietary products to be forwarded to the Project Manager for<br />

approval.<br />

215


APPENDIX 7/4: BOND COATS, TACK COATS AND OTHER BITUMINOUS SPRAYS<br />

Sheet 1: Tack Coat (Clause 920) of the SHW<br />

1 Location<br />

The application of bond, tack or other bituminous sprays shall be as directed in the Contract<br />

drawings or where specified by the Supervisor on site.<br />

2 Site Specific Limitations<br />

The Contractor shall refer to Appendix 1/13 to assess site limitations<br />

3 Type of Material<br />

Tack Coat shall be bitumen emulsion complying with Class A1-40 or K1-40 of BS 434: Part 1and<br />

applied as specified in Section 4.5 of BS 5948: Part 2 1993.<br />

The Contractor must complete Binder Data Sheets as Contained in the Manual of Contract<br />

Documents for Highways Works, Volume 2 Notes for Guidance on Specifications for Highway<br />

Works NG 700, Appendix 7/4 (Sheet 2)<br />

4 Surface Preparation<br />

All areas to receive tack coat must be free from all loose material and standing water. All surfaces<br />

to receive Hot Roller Asphalt wearing course shall be prepared in accordance with the<br />

requirements of BS EN 13108-4: 2006. All surfaces to receive Macadam wearing course shall be<br />

prepared in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 13108-1: 2006.<br />

5 Masking of Street Furniture<br />

Street furniture, ironworks and drop kerbs shall be masked as per clause 920.6 of the SHW.<br />

6 Rate of Spread<br />

Rate of spread shall conform to the requirements of BS 434: Part 2: 2006 (0.45 – 0.55 lt/m2)<br />

7 Type of Blinding Material<br />

Blinding materials permitted in sub clause 13 of Clause 920, Series 900 shall not be used on site.<br />

216


APPENDIX 7/4 : BOND COATS, TACK COATS AND OTHER BITUMINOUS SPRAYS (CONTINUED)<br />

Sheet 2: Information to be provided by the contractor<br />

The Contractor shall provide the following information with his tender, or prior to the commencement of the<br />

work:<br />

1 The product or products he proposes to use together with their data sheets, product identification<br />

data, cohesivity data as specified. A suitable Sheet for the provision of binder data is attached to<br />

this Appendix, other layouts are permitted but all the required data should be supplied<br />

3 For each product, a copy of the BS EN ISO 9001 certificate showing the name of the manufacturer,<br />

the name of the certification body and the reference number and date of the certificate.<br />

4 The spraying equipment proposed, and a test certificate.<br />

5 The source or sources of blinding material proposed.<br />

6 Contingency plans in the event of any breakdown.<br />

7 The results of any other tests or other data the Contractor considers would assist the Project<br />

Manager in assessing the technical merit of the treatment such as:<br />

(i) Tackiness test and/or trafficability time and methods of test.<br />

(ii) Breaking time test results for different weather conditions and substrates.<br />

(iii) Test results for bond to newly laid concrete. The data supplied should not be more than 6<br />

months old.<br />

217


APPENDIX 7/9: COLD-MILLING (PLANNING) OF BITUMINOUS BOUND FLEXIBLE SURFACING<br />

1. Cold-milling (planning) or scarifying of the existing surfacing will be required to remove the<br />

exiting wearing course at the location of all tie-ins. The minimum depth of cold-milling required<br />

is the depth of the existing wearing course material.<br />

2. The edges of transverse and longitudinal joints in milled areas shall be cleared and made truly<br />

vertical. These edges shall be painted with hot bitumen conforming to BS EN 13108-4:2006<br />

prior to laying any bituminous material.<br />

3. All horizontal planed surfaces shall be treated with a bituminous tack coat as Appendix 7/4.<br />

4. The surfaces of any milled areas shall be thoroughly cleared by a sweeper unit to remove all<br />

loose material and dirt in advanced of surfacing works on the planed surface.<br />

5. At all tie ins between new or re-surfaced pavements, the existing surface shall be cold milled at<br />

a constant depth of 45mm over a distance of 10m.<br />

6. Surplus material can only be disposed off in an approved tip.<br />

7. When planning or milling existing roads, no vertical step greater than 40mm shall be formed in<br />

the existing carriageway left open to traffic. A temporary ramp (maximum gradient 20%) of<br />

Wearing Course material shall be laid across the step until the discontinuity is made up with<br />

resurfacing or regulating material as described in the contract, at which time the temporary<br />

ramp shall be taken out.<br />

8. Planning or milling shall not begin if the surface to be treated is to be left more than 14 days<br />

before the application of an overlying course of material.<br />

9. Road reinstatement shall be in accordance with Northern Ireland Road Authority and Utilities<br />

Committee (NIRAUC) Specification for the reinstatement of openings in roads.<br />

218


APPENDIX 11/1 : KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS<br />

300x 150 mm half battered Precast concrete kerbs bedded on a concrete foundation to be used unless<br />

otherwise noted on the drawings.<br />

150 x 75 mm square edging kerb bedded on a concrete foundation to be used unless otherwise noted on the<br />

drawings.<br />

The Footway Construction shall be as follows:-<br />

TYPE 1 - CONCRETE FOOTPATHS (see drawings for locations)<br />

BaysSlab<br />

Slab<br />

Max Spacing of<br />

Longitudinal Steel<br />

Special Requirements<br />

Type<br />

Thickness<br />

Transverse<br />

Reinf.<br />

Contraction Joints<br />

Jointed<br />

150 mm-<br />

Details and layout of<br />

1 No. Layer of A393<br />

Anti-slip ‘brushed’ finish<br />

reinforced<br />

250mm<br />

joints to be agreed on<br />

mesh<br />

to surface of concrete,<br />

concrete<br />

along<br />

site with Project<br />

with smooth 150mm<br />

surface<br />

edges<br />

Manager.<br />

wide band to edges of<br />

slab<br />

slab.<br />

Sub-Base Clause Material Thickness<br />

850NI Type 6F2 Stone 150 mm<br />

See also Contract<br />

Drawings<br />

Notes:<br />

1. Concrete to be grade 35/20/OP.<br />

2. Reinforcement to Clause 1008.<br />

TYPE 2 - CONCRETE HARDSTANDING COMPOUND AREAS (see drawings for locations)<br />

BaysSlab<br />

Type<br />

Jointed<br />

reinforce<br />

d<br />

concrete<br />

surface<br />

slab<br />

Sub-<br />

Base<br />

Slab<br />

Thickness<br />

Max Spacing of<br />

Transverse<br />

Contraction Joints<br />

Longitudinal Steel<br />

Reinf.<br />

220mm Details and layout of 1 No. Layer of A393<br />

joints to be in<br />

mesh<br />

accordance with<br />

contract drawings.<br />

Any variations from<br />

drawing to be<br />

approved by Project<br />

Manager.<br />

Clause Material Thickness<br />

850NI Type 6F2 Stone 150 mm<br />

Special Requirements<br />

Anti-slip ‘brushed’ finish<br />

to surface of concrete.<br />

See also Contract<br />

Drawings<br />

219


Notes:<br />

1. Concrete to be grade 35/20/OP.<br />

2. Reinforcement to Clause 1008.<br />

APPENDIX 12/1: TRAFFIC SIGNS: GENERAL<br />

All traffic signs, including supporting posts, brackets, fixing details and the like, shall be supplied and<br />

erected, including reinstatements, by the Contractor. The precise location of the signs and bollards shall<br />

be agreed with the Engineer.<br />

The Contractor shall supply and erect all the required illuminated bollards for the Works. The Contractor<br />

shall provide attendance to the Engineer and install ducting to be as per Appendix 5/2. The Contractor<br />

shall be responsible for all excavations, foundations and reinstatements.<br />

APPENDIX 12/3: TRAFFIC SIGNS - ROAD MARKINGS AND STUDS<br />

1 ROAD MARKINGS<br />

All permanent road markings shall be white and shall consist of continuous or intermittent lines, letters,<br />

figures, arrows or symbols laid in accordance with the Traffic Signs Regulations NI, including any<br />

subsequent amendments, Chapter 5 of Traffic Signs Manual or as directed by the Engineer.<br />

Road markings shall comply with Clause 1212 NIS contained in Appendix 0/5.<br />

The locations of road markings and studs will be as directed by the Engineer.<br />

220


APPENDIX 17/1 : CONCRETE – CLASSIFICATION OF MIXES<br />

1. All structural concrete shall comply with the following requirements and be supplied by a<br />

QSRMC accredited firm:<br />

Mix Reference<br />

Mix Reference<br />

C35<br />

C15<br />

Ordinary or Special Concrete (O or S) O O<br />

Class of Concrete (Grade/Max Agg.Size) 35/20 15/20<br />

Minimum Cement Content (kg/m3) 345 230<br />

Maximum Free Water/Cement Ratio 0.47 0.65<br />

Required Workability 50 75<br />

Max Cement Content {See NG 1704:3} 550 550<br />

Required Type and Class of Cement OPC to BS 12:1978 OPC to BS 12:1978<br />

Required Source/Special Type of Agg. Agg. To BS 882:1983 Agg. To BS 882:1983<br />

Required Admixture None None<br />

Air Entrainment Required {YES/NO}<br />

Yes, for Concrete Paths &<br />

Hardstanding Areas<br />

No<br />

Min or Max Temp of Fresh Concrete ºC - -<br />

Sampling and Testing App 1/5 App 1/5<br />

Other Requirements - -<br />

221


APPENDIX 17/3 : SURFACE FINISHES<br />

1. The required surface finish to the new concrete footways and hardstanding areas = brushed with<br />

smooth edges as detailed in Appendix 11/1.<br />

2. Permanently exposed concrete surfaces shall be to Class F3 finish to Clause 1708 and shall be<br />

protected from rust marks and stains of all kinds.<br />

3. Hidden concrete surfaces shall be to class F1 finish to Clause 1708.<br />

4. All formwork joints for exposed surfaces shall form a regular pattern agreed with the Client’s<br />

Representative with horizontal and vertical lines continuous throughout each structure and all<br />

construction joints shall coincide with these horizontal and vertical lines.<br />

5. Surface finish to the exposed soffit and internal sides of the precast concrete beams, and to the<br />

outside exposed elevation of the precast concrete edge beam, is to have a Class F3 finish. The<br />

hidden concrete face on the top surface of the precast concrete beams that will be cast into the deck<br />

shall be Class 2, “rough as cast”, to clause 1710 of the specification.<br />

222


APPENDIX 17/4 : CONCRETE – GENERAL<br />

1. Provide a minimum 50mm concrete cover to all reinforcement, with exception of salt silo which will<br />

have a minimum 75mm concrete cover to all reinforcement<br />

2. The use of admixtures shall not be permitted without the written approval of the Project Manager.<br />

3. See Appendix 1/5 for testing requirements for concrete.<br />

4. The location of all proposed construction joints must be as indicated on the relevant contract<br />

drawings.<br />

223


APPENDIX 23/2 SEALING OF GAPS SCHEDULE (OTHER THAN IN BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINTS)<br />

GENERAL<br />

1. Joints in concrete paths and concrete hardstanding are to be located and to be in accordance with<br />

details on Contract Drawings.<br />

2. Where cold poured sealants are indicated on the Drawings for sealing of gaps or joints, they shall<br />

consist of gun applied two part polysulphide complying with BS EN ISO 11600:2003.<br />

3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all gap joints sealers shall be backed with a<br />

suitable sized circular cross section rod of closed cell expanded polyethylene. Such rods shall be<br />

compressed and pushed into the joint prior to sealing.<br />

4. Unless otherwise indicate on the Drawings, all joint fillers in gap joints shall consist of closed cell<br />

expanded polyethylene board of appropriate width.<br />

5. Joint faces shall be prepared and joints installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s<br />

Instructions.<br />

224


APPENDIX 25/2: REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED SOIL AND ANCHORED EARTH<br />

STRUCTURES<br />

All earth retaining walls shall have a natural looking stone finish as Acheson and Glovers Anchor<br />

Landmark Basalt or equal and approved.<br />

The earth retaining structures shown in outline in the drawings 073030/GA/14 to 21 and in elevation on<br />

drawings 073030/GA/22 and 23 shall be designed and constructed by the contractor.<br />

The retaining wall system selected for each section shall not take up an extent of land take that will cause<br />

a reduction in the area and dimensions shown on the drawings for any of the other facilities that make up<br />

the works shown on the drawings including roads, graveplots, paths, headstone foundation, buildings,<br />

access areas, planting areas and landscape areas and existing areas that are to be maintained. Where the<br />

selected retaining wall system is located adjacent to a graveplot area the contractor must demonstrate that<br />

graves can be dug immediately behind the wall without compromising the stability and safety of the wall or<br />

the excavation.<br />

Reinforced Earth Retaining Walls<br />

Reinforced Earth Retaining Walls - see Drawing No. 073030/GA/12, 13, 22 & 23 for location, layout and<br />

details of reinforced earth slopes and associated works encompassed by the “Designated Outline”<br />

Reinforced earth Retaining Walls to comply with Clause 622 of the Specification and Appendix 6/10 of the<br />

Specification.<br />

Design for reinforced earth slopes shall comply with all the relevant design guides and advice notes in the<br />

Highway Agency’s, Design Manual For Roads And Bridges DB2/05 Technical approval of Highway<br />

Structure, HA68/94 - Design Methods for the Reinforcement of Highway Slopes by Reinforced Soil and<br />

Soil Nailing Techniques. Minimum unfactored design live load surcharge to the top of the slope is 10<br />

kN/m 2 .<br />

The design shall comply with BD70/03 Strengthened / Reinforced soils and other fills for Retaining Walls<br />

and Bridge Abutments<br />

The design of the retaining walls including the facing units and reinforcing elements shall comply with BS<br />

8006-1:2010 Code of Practice for strengthened / reinforced soils and other fills.<br />

The design of the retaining walls shall comply with BSEN 14475:2006 Execution of special Geotechnical<br />

works. Reinforced Fill.<br />

225


APPENDIX 25/5: REQUIREMENTS FOR BURIED RIGID PIPES FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES<br />

1 Any requirements for drainage of structures are as per Appendix 5/1. Location of drainage is shown<br />

on Drawing No. 073030/GA/26.<br />

226

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!